2014

System overview
 System overview

2
Content

M1 controller hardware 8

Processor modules
ME203 series 11
MX200 series 13
MPC200 series 16
MC200 series 18
MH200 series 20

Digital input/output modules

Digital input modules DI212/216/232 25
Digital output modules DO216/232 27
Digital relay output modules DOR206/230 29
Digital input/output modules DIO216/232 31
Digital input/output modules DIO248/264/280 33

Analog input/output modules

Universal input/output module GIO212 40
Universal input/output module AIO208/216 44
Analog input modules AI202/SI, AI204/SI 47
Analog input modules AI208/SI 49
Analog input modules AI204/x 51
Analog output module AO202 53
Analog output module AO208/l 54
Analog output modules AO202/SI, AO204/SI 55
Analog input/output modules AIO288/x 56
Temperature input module PTAI216 59
Temperature input modules TI214/x 61
Strain gauge input module DMS202 63

Function modules
Counter modules CNT204/x 67
Encoder interface modules ISI222/x 69
Pulse width modulation module PWM202 72
Axis controller module ACR222/2 73

Grid measurement module

Grid measurement, protection and synchronization module GSP274 77
Grid measurement and protection module GMP232 84
Grid measurement module GM260 90

System modules
Power supply module NT255 95
Power supply module NT250/48 97
Distributor modules VP200/x 98
Dummy module LM201 99
Rail adapter S202 100
Backplane BS200 series 101
Backplanes BS200 series 102
Backplanes BS200/S series 103
Bus bar Adapters BS200/ET series 104

Storage media
PC cards PCC201/xx 106
Compact Flash memory CF200/xx 107
CFast memory CFA200/xx 108
Bachmann System Maintenance Stick BSM 109

2
 Networking 112

Interfaces
Industrial Ethernet master EM2x3 115
Interface modules RS204 117

Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet Switch SWI205 121
Ethernet Remote Station ERS202 123
Media convertor – unmanaged switch FCS214/x 125

Bus expansion
Bus expansion modules BEx200 series 129

FASTBUS
FASTBUS module Fx210 series 133
FASTBUS module Fx220 series 135

CANopen
CANopen master module CM202 141
CANopen slave modules CS200/x 143
Digital input/output modules DIOxxx-C 145
Analog and digital input/output module DA3284-C 147
Temperature I/O modules TCO2xx-C 150
CANopen configurator 152

DeviceNet
DeviceNet master DNM201 153

EtherCAT
EtherCAT master 156
ECS200 EtherCAT Slave Module 157
EtherCAT configurator 159

PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS DP master module DPM200 162
PROFIBUS configurator 164

PROFINET
PROFINET IO (RT) 166
PROFINET configurator 167

M-BUS
MBUS201 master 169

MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU
Modbus master 172
Modbus slave 175

Telecontrol/field level
MMS client (IEC61850 / IEC61400-25) 178

SERCOS
SERCOS master module SEM201 182

bluecom 183

Communication – control room networking

OPC UA Server 191
M1 OPC standard server 195
M1 OPC enterprise server 199
MMS server (IEC61850 / IEC61400-25) 203
IEC60870-5 Server (Slave) 207

3
Security 214

Communication and information security 216

Safety technology 224

Safety modules & Safety Developer

Safety processor module SLC284 227
Safety input module SDI208 230
Safety output modules SDO204 232
Safety Developer Engineering tool 235

Redundancy 240

Hot-standby redundancy 243

Warm-standby redundancy 247
Network redundancy 251

HMI devices 256

Operator terminals
Operator terminal OT100 series 259
Operator terminal OT200 series 261
Operator terminal OT1300 series 264

Industrial PC 270

Industrial PC IPC1400 series 272

Headless IPCs and remote displays

Remote displays DD900 series 279
Remote displays DF900 series 281
Cabinet PC IPM1400 283

Engineering software 288

Project engineering made easy: SolutionCenter

M-Base 291

Configuration
Device Manager 293

Test and diagnostics

Scope 3 295

Programming
M-PLC programming interface 302
C/C++ Developer 305

Model-based design/Simulation
M-Target for Simulink® 308
4
 Visualization/SCADA 314

atvise® scada 316

M1 webMI pro 326
Vis Designer 331
M-JVIS, M-JSYS tool library 336

Motion Control 340

Control
M-SMC Software Motion Control 343
M-SHAFT Shaft controller 345
M-CNC Three-dimensional motions 347
Drive Middleware 349
M-TEMP Temperature controller 351

Condition Monitoring 354

Vibration sensor input module AIC212 357

Ω-Guard® System variants 361
Remote service via WebLog Expert 363
Acceleration sensors BAM100 / BAM500 364
μ-bridge sensor 365
Structure Vibration Monitor SVM300 series 366

Sector-specific solutions 368

Wind Turbine Essentials WTE 369

Wind Power Scada WPS 375

Directives and certificates 380

Standards and approvals 381

ColdClimate 389

CAE/CAD data 391

ePLAN library 392
3D-CAD model library 394

Installation in the control cabinet/housing 395

Dimensions 397

Bachmann training 400

Imprint 401

5
6
7
Scalable. Robust. Versatile.

M1 controller hardware -
industrial controller with a future

Individual requirements can be met easily with a wide range of powerful

CPUs based on industrial (Pentium) processors and with an extensive range
of I / O modules. Real-time capable bus systems enable the automation to
be decentralized without any loss of performance.

The M1 controller perfectly combines the openness of a PC-based controller

with the reliability of industrial hardware platforms. Designed for the tough-
est ambient conditions, they guarantee fault-free operation with a fanless
installation up to an ambient temperature of 60 °C.

State of the art system architecture designed for seamless networking ca-
pability enables the M1 to be integrated easily in the area of the control-
ler and system peripherals. Real-time Ethernet enables real-time controller
networking and the support of all currently available fieldbus systems en-
ables external components to be connected via standard interfaces.

8
 Processor modules

Maximum performance and unrivalled robustness.

The processor modules of the M1 automa- As Programmable Automation Controllers

tion system stand out on account of their (PAC), M1 CPUs combine flexibility, open
optimum performance and unrivalled ro- standards and the performance of the PC /
bustness. Integrated into Bachmann CPU IT-world with the industrial robustness of
boards and I/O systems, industrial Penti- classical PLC.
um processors in an embedded design en- The comprehensive scope of Bachmann
sure absolute deterministic real-time be- electronic software enables it to be used
havior. as a PLC, motion controller or communica-
tion and data centre.
Even the most rigorous demands in terms
of flexible data exchange and networking Consistent compatibility of the PACs
can be met without costly additional mod- application software protects the user's
ules: M1 processor modules offer the full investments for future expansions.
range of interfaces already »on-board«.
This offers the automation engineer to-
tal freedom and ensures cost efficient and
compact design. Ample power reserves for
networking and communication-intensive
applications are provided as basic fea-
tures. The mass storage of the device is
also fully scalable.

Processor modules
ME203 series

Features
Intel 80386 EX, 33 MHz
Integrated power supply, 17 W / 24 V
SRAM: 512 kB (battery backed)
DRAM: 8 MB
FLASH: 8 MB file-flash, 2 MB boot flash
1x Ethernet 10 / 100 Mbit /s or 1x CAN/CANopen
1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
Slots: PCC201/xx

9
 Processor modules

Processor modules MX200 series

Features
CPU x86 66 MHz / CPU 133 MHz / CPU 200 MHz
Pentium class
Integrated power supply 17 W / 24 V
nvRAM: 512 kB, DRAM: 256 MB,
FLASH: 16 MB internal
2x Ethernet 10 / 100 Mbit / s
1x CAN/CANopen
1x USB, 1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
Slots: PCC201/xx, CF200/xx

Processor modules MPC200 series

Features
CPU 400 / 650 / 700 / 933 MHz Pentium class
SRAM: to 512 kB (battery backed)
DRAM: 64 or 128 MB, FLASH: 8 MB internal
nvRAM-0: 64 kB (no battery necessary)
1x USB, 1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
2x Ethernet 10 / 100 Mbit / s
Slots: PCC201/xx, CF200/xx

Processor modules MC200 series

Features
CPU 600 MHz ATOM E620 / 1,6 GHz ATOM E680
DRAM: 1 GB DDR2
nvRAM0 (data memory): 512 kB
1x USB-Host, 1x Service USB interface, 1x RS232,
1x RS232/422/485
2x Ethernet 10 / 100/1000 Mbit / s with IEEE1588
Slots: CFast200/xx

Processor modules
MH200 series

Features
CPU 1.2 GHz Celeron
nvRAM: 512 kB
FLASH: 16 MB internal
2x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
1x USB 2.0
Internal mass memory: CFast card
Slot: CFA200/xx
Integrated power supply 10
 Processor modules

Processor modules ME203 series

The processor modules of the ME203 series

extend the range of the M1 controller family
in terms of reduced power consumption and
moderate cycle times. With an extremely slim
design of only one module width, ME203 CPUs
offer all the essential features of larger type
series but with a lower power consumption.

Several networking and power supply options scale

the module ideally for smaller applications. As
fully-fledged M1 CPUs, ME203 processor modules
are not only configured with the same tools as
the high-end families MX and MPC, but are also
fully code and application compatible, although
they have less memory and fewer interfaces.

All modules have two serial interfaces and a

front slot for one PC card. The optional Ethernet
interface allows integration in 10 / 100 Mbit /
s networks at full data rate. With the retentive
program and data storage devices, also larger
projects can be handled without the need for
external media. In addition to the supply of the
processor module, an integrated optional power
supply provides 17 W for extra I/O modules.

• 80386 EX processor
• 2 serial interfaces
• Optional integrated power supply, 17 W / 24 V DC
• Optional CAN bus interface
or Ethernet 100 Mbit 100 Mbit / s interface
• RAM 8 MB DRAM
• Data memory 512 kB SRAM, (battery backed)
• Integrated program memory
• Removable memory:
PC cards with 8 / 16 / 32 / 64 MB
• Battery backed real-time clock (RTC)
• Status displays for RUN, INIT and ERROR
• Watchdog

Item Item no.

ME203/EN 00013177-00
ME203/EN 00015985-00
ME203/CN 00013176-00
ME203/CNW 00013191-00
ME203/CN 00016336-00

11
 Processor modules

ME203 series
Processor + memory
CPU Intel 80386 EX, 33 MHz
SRAM (data memory) 512 kB (battery backed)
DRAM (working memory) 8 MB
PC card ** PCC201 / xx with 16 / 32 / 64 MB
Boot FLASH 2 MB (reserved by system software)
Program FLASH *** 8 MB
Interfaces
Serial (standard) 1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485, 64 byte FIFO
Ethernet (optional) 1x 10/100 Mbit / s
CAN (optional) 1x 10 k .. 1 MBaud*
Power supply
External power supply 5 V, ±15 V via backplane
module**
Internal power supply module Own supply and 17 W for I/Os
(optional) modules: +5 V / 2 A, +15 V / 250 mA, -15 V / 200 mA
supply voltage: 24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Galvanic isolation Supply to the system 500 V
Additional features
Watchdog
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Ambient conditions Standard Cold Weather (W) ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C fanless
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with
condensation condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with condensation
condensation
Execution variants
ME203/EN CPU module 386EX (33MHz); 8MB DRAM; 512kB SRAM; 8MB file-flash;
1x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; integrated power supply 17W;
PCC slot
ME203/EN Like ME203/EN; ColdClimate ( )
ME203/CN CPU module 386EX (33MHz); 8MB DRAM; 512kB SRAM; 8MB file-flash;
1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; integrated power supply
17W; PCC slot
ME203/CNW CPU module 386EX (33MHz); 8MB DRAM; 512kB SRAM; 8MB file-flash;
1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; integrated power supply
17W; PCC slot; Cold Weather (W)
ME203/CN Like ME203/CN; ColdClimate ( )

* TCP / IP protocol can also be run via CAN

** not included in delivery
*** depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory is reserved for the system software
12
 Processor modules

Processor modules MX200 series

The processor modules of the MX200 series are

Module based on PC technology for the M1
controller system. Depending on the type, the
modules are equipped with a power supply and an
integrated CAN master, and have 100 Mbit Ether-
net ports that allow the simple integration of the
controller in physically separated networks. The
processor module with integrated floating point
unit (FPU) is suitable for control applications. The
MX200 modules are equipped with non-volatile
RAM which provides maximum data security for
more than 10 years without battery back-up.

Depending on type, the following features are:

• 2 serial interfaces
• 2 Ethernet-interfaces 10 / 100 Mbit / s
with status displays
• 1 CAN interface
• 1 USB interface
• Status indicating LEDs for RUN, INIT and ERROR
• Mass storage (Compact Flash)
• RAM 256 MB DRAM
• Data memory 512 kB nvRAM
• Program memory of 16 / 32 / 64 MB FLASH on
PC card and 16 MB internal FLASH (4 MB for
system software, 12 MB for applications)
• Integrated power supply

Item Device Item no.

MX207 00014445-00
MX213 CF512MB 00018594-00
MX213 CF4GB 00018594-10
MX213 CF512MB 00018597-00
MX213 CF4GB 00018597-10
MX220 CF512MB 00018593-00
MX220 CF4GB 00018593-10
MX220 00019210-00
MX220 CF512MB 00017689-00
MX220 CF4GB 00017689-10

13
 Processor modules

MX200 series MX207 MX213/x MX220/x

Processor + memory
CPU x86 x86 x86
Performance 66 MHz 133 MHz 200 MHz
(Pentium equivalent)
CF (mass storage) - Without restriction
nvRAM (data memory) 512 kB
DRAM (working memory) 256 MB
PC card (program memory)** - PCC201 / xx with 16 / 32 / 64 MB FLASH
FLASH (program memory)** 16 MB internal
Interfaces
Serial 1x RS232 1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485
Ethernet 1x 10 / 100 base-Tx 2x 10 / 100 base-Tx
USB 1x USB 2.0
CAN 1x 10 k .. 1 Mbit/s
Power supply for I/O
Supply voltage 24 VDC (18 .. 34 V)
Nominal power 17 W for I/O
Module +5 V / 2000 mA; +15 V / 250 mA; -15 V / 200 mA
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for Ethernet and fieldbuses SERCOS and CAN
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C fanless
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation

* not included in delivery

*** depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory is reserved for the system software

14
 Processor modules

MX200 series
Execution variants
MX220 CPU module LX700 (433MHz); 256MB DRAM; 512kB nvRAM; 16MB file-
flash; 2x Eth100; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485;
1x USB2.0; integrated power supply 17W; PCC slot; CF slot
MX220 Like MX220; ColdClimate ( )
MX213 CPU module LX700 (266MHz); 256MB DRAM; 512kB nvRAM; 16MB file-
flash; 2x Eth100; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485;
1x USB2.0; integrated power supply 17W; PCC slot; CF slot
MX213 Like MX213; ColdClimate ( )
MX207 CPU module LX700 (266MHz); without Cache; 256MB DRAM; 512kB
nvRAM; 16MB file-flash; 1x Eth100; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232;
1x USB2.0; integrated power supply 17W

15
 Processor modules

Processor modules MPC200 series

The processor modules of the MPC200 series are

modules for the M1 Controller System with Pen-
tium class III processors, based on PC technology.
They are available with various processor clock
rates and in several configurations.

• Flexibility thanks to PC technology

• Pentium III class processors
• Various processor clock rates
• 2 serial interfaces
• 2 Ethernet-interfaces 10 / 100 Mbit/s
with status displays
• 1 USB interface V1.1 functionality
• Real time clock, status displays for RUN,
INIT, ERROR
• Mass storage Compact Flash type I
• RAM 128 MB DRAM
• Data memory 512 kB SRAM,
battery backed
• Data memory 64 kB nvRAM
• Program memory 32 / 64 MB FLASH
on PC card

Item Device Item no.

MPC240 00012711-40
MPC240 CF512MB 00018591-00
MPC240 CF4GB 00018591-10
MPC240 00016338-40
MPC240 CF512MB 00020547-00
MPC240 CF4GB 00020547-10
MPC240/W 00013127-40
MPC240/W CF512MB 00021018-00
MPC240/W CF4GB 00018372-00
MPC265 00012708-40
MPC265 CF512MB 00018587-00
MPC265 CF4GB 00018587-10
MPC270 00012710-40
MPC270 CF512MB 00018589-00
MPC270 CF4GB 00018589-10
MPC270 00016180-40
MPC270 CF512MB 00020413-00
MPC270 CF4GB 00020413-10
MPC270/W 00013129-40
MPC270/W CF512MB 00023264-00
MPC270/W CF4GB auf Anfrage
MPC293 00014274-40
MPC293 CF512MB 00017629-00
MPC293 CF4GB auf Anfrage
MPC293/W 00017332-40
MPC293/W CF512MB 00020575-00
16
 Processor modules

MPC200 series MPC240 MPC265 MPC270 MPC293

Processor + memory
CPU Celeron / Pentium III architecture (embedded), 400 / 650 / 700 MHz
400 MHz 650 MHz 700 MHz 933 MHz
CF (mass storage) Without restriction
nvRAM-0 (data memory) 512 kB SRAM, battery backed
nvRAM-1 (data memory) 64 kB nvRAM (no battery necessary)
DRAM (working memory) 128 MB
PC card (program memory)** PCC201 / xx with 32 / 64 MB FLASH
Internal FLASH (program memory)** 8 MB, 4 MB for system software
Interfaces
Serial 1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485
Ethernet 2x 10 / 100 base-TX
USB 1x
Power supply
External power supply module 5 V, ±15 V via backplane
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for SERCOS and CAN, Ethernet fieldbus
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Ambient conditions Standard Cold weather ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C fanless -30 .. +60 °C fanless
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with
condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with condensation
condensation
Execution variants
MPC240 CPU module P III (400MHz); 512kB SRAM; 64kB nvRAM; 8MB file-
flash; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; 1x USB1.1;
PCC slot; CF slot
MPC265 CPU module Cel (650MHz); 512kB SRAM; 64kB nvRAM; 8MB file-
flash; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; 1x USB1.1;
PCC slot; CF slot
MPC270 CPU module P III (700MHz); 512kB SRAM; 64kB nvRAM; 8MB file-
flash; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; 1x USB1.1;
PCC slot; CF slot
MPC240/W CPU module P III (400MHz); 512kB SRAM; 64kB nvRAM; 8MB file-
flash; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; 1x USB1.1;
PCC slot; CF slot; Cold Weather (W)
MPC240 Like MPC240; ColdClimate ( )
MPC270 Like MPC270; ColdClimate ( )
MPC293 CPU module P III (933MHz); 512kB SRAM; 64kB nvRAM; 8MB file-
flash; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; 1x USB1.1;
PCC slot; CF slot
MPC293 Like MPC293; ColdClimate ( )

* not included in delivery

17 ** depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory is reserved for the system software
 Processor modules

Processor module MC200 series

The powerful processor modules of the MC200

series offer maximum performance for demanding
applications of your M1 control system. The
CPUs are based on the latest embedded ATOM
technology, consequently they are ideally suited
for the most demanding regulating tasks,
process control, signal processing and complex
communication protocols. Through the use of state-
of-the-art technology in a robust design, a compact
powerhouse with a long service life and a broad
temperature range (-30 to +60 °C) is available.
The supplemental integrated, autonomous process
image controller significantly offloads the processor
and the I/O bus. This enables a new dimension in
data transmission speed to the inputs and outputs
for the fastest possible process cycles. Fast single
accesses in the µs range for precise control and
regulating tasks are also available. For efficient
networking and state-of-the-art fieldbuses, two
independent Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, including
IEEE-1588 hardware support, are available. An
internal CFast card enables fastest access speeds
via the modern SATA (Serial Advanced Technology
Attachment). Non-volatile memory of 512 kB is
available as a drive and securely stores machine
data for longer than 10 years, without an external
energy supply or battery.

• 2 serial interfaces
• USB 2.0 host interface
• USB device service interface
• 2 Ethernet interfaces 10/100/1000 Mbit/s with
IEEE 1588
• Process image controller
• 1 GB DRAM DDR2
• Data memory 512 kB non-volatile
• Internal mass storage CFast card
• internal 64 MB program memory

Item Device Item no.

MC205 00018805-10
MC205 CFA4GB 00018805-12
MC205 00020513-10
MC205 CFA4GB 00020513-12
MC210 00018806-10
MC210 CFA4GB 00018806-12
MC210 00020514-10
MC210 CFA4GB 00020514-12

18
 Processor modules

MC200 series MC210, MC210 MC205, MC205

Processor + memory
CPU 1.6 GHz ATOM E680 600 MHz ATOM E620
I/O bus Process image controller
CFast (mass storage) 1 x integrated (accessible from the side) / > 8 GB
RAM 1 GB DRAM DDR2
nvRAM-0 (data memory) 512 kB
Internal FLASH (program memory) 64 MB, 40 MB free for application program
Interfaces
Serial 1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485 (SW configurable)
Ethernet 2x 10 / 100 / 1000 Base-T with IEEE1588
USB host 1x USB 2.0
Service USB interface 1x USB device
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for I/O bus, fieldbuses SERCOS and CAN, Ethernet
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C, fan-free
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with condensation
condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with condensation
condensation
Design variants
MC210 CPU module ATOM E680 (1,6GHz); 1GB DRAM, 512kB nvRAM;
64MB file-flash; 2x Eth100/1000; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485;
1x USB2.0; 1x USB2.0 Device; CFast slot
MC205 CPU module ATOM E620 (600MHz); 1GB DRAM, 512kB nvRAM;
64MB file-flash; 2x Eth100/1000; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485;
1x USB2.0; 1x USB2.0 Device; CFast slot
MC210 Like MC210; ColdClimate ( )
MC205 Like MC205; ColdClimate ( )

19
 Processor modules

Processor modules MH200 series

The high-performance MH212/S processor

module Celeron M offer maximum performance
for demanding applications with an M1 controller.
The CPU is based on the latest PC technology,
consequently it is ideally suited for demanding
computation tasks, databases, signal processing or
extensive network applications. With integration of
the power supply and the generously dimensioned
passive cooling system, a compact powerhouse
with long service life and an extensive temperature
range (-30 °C to +60 °C) is ready. The additional
integrated autonomous process image controller
results in a significant offload of the processor
and enables a new speed dimension for data
transmission to the inputs and outputs for the
fastest process cycles. For efficient networking and
the state-of-the-art fieldbusses, two independent
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces including IEEE-1588
hardware support are ready. An internal CFast card
enables fastest access speeds via the modern SATA
(Serial Advanced Technology Attachment). Non-
volatile memory of 512 kB is available as a drive
and stores machine data for longer that 10 years,
without an external energy supply or battery.

• 2 serial interfaces
• USB 2.0 interface
• 2 Ethernet interfaces 10/100/1000 Mbit/s with
IEEE 1588
• Process image controller
• Data memory 512 kB non-volatile
• Program memory intertal 16 MB Flash
• Internal mass storage CFast card
• Power supply 100 watt, power for I/O modules
30 watt

Item Device Item no.

MH212/S 00016370-00
MH212/S CFA4GB 00016370-02
MH212/S 00018652-00
MH212/S CFA4GB 00018652-02

20
 Processor modules

MH200 series MH212/S, MH212/S

Processor + memory
CPU 1.2 GHz Celeron M ULV 722
I/O processor process image controller
CFast (mass storage) 1 x integrated (accessible via side cover)
nvRAM-0 (data memory) 512 kB
DRAM 2 GB
Internal FLASH (program memory) 16 MB
Interfaces
Serial 1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485 (SW configurable)
Ethernet 2x 10 / 100 / 1000 base-T
USB 1x USB 2.0
Power supply
Internal power supply module CPU supply and 30 watt for I/Os
Supply voltage 24 V DC (18 V ... 34 V)
Nominal power 17 W
Module +5 V / 3 A; +15 V / 500 mA; -15 V / 500 mA
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for I/O busses, fieldbusses SERCOS and CAN, Ethernet
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with
condensation condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with
condensation condensation
Execution variants
MH212/S CPU module Celeron M ULV 722 (1,2GHz); 2GB DDR;
512kB nvRAM; 16MB file-flash; 2x Eth100/1000; 1x RS232;
1x RS232/422/485 isolated; 1x USB2.0; integrated power supply
30W; CFast slot
MH212/S Like MH212/S; ColdClimate ( )

21
Processor modules

22
 Digital input/output modules

Efficiency for all channel types.

The M1 Automation System's wide range Bachmann electronic's M1 I /O modules

of digital I/O modules means there is a not only allow the process image access
module for any channel type. A selection typical of PLCs but also direct access at
from the standard 6-channel variant up any point in the program. This makes it
to the ultra-compact 80-channel module possible to configure individual digital in-
guarantees the right module for every pur- puts and their status changes as interrupt
pose. sources so that programs can respond
to process-controlled inputs. All modules
Combined I/O modules allow the operating support transmission via FASTBUS (fiber
mode (DI / DO) of each individual channel optic cable), CAN or P­ ROFINET and offer
to be configured by the user. As well as a high degree of fl
­ exibility in the design of
the global standard 24 V DC input signal, sophisticated automation solutions.
48 V DC modules are also available for the
power station sector.

Digital input modules

DI212/216/232

Features
Number of inputs: 12 / 16 / 32
Input voltage:
nom. 24 V DC / nom. 48 V DC
Separate single groups
Interrupt inputs: max. 2
Sink/source inputs
Galvanic isolation
Status display for each channel via LED

23
 Digital input/output modules

Digital output modules

DO216/232

Features
Number of outputs: 16 / 32
Output voltage:
nom. 24 V DC / nom. 48 V DC
Output current: depends on
type 2.5 / 1 / 0.5 A
Total current depends on type:
8 / 16 A
Galvanic isolation
Status display for each channel
via LED

Digital relay output Digital input/output

modules DOR206/230 modules DIO216/232

Features Features
6 relays Total channel number: 16 / 32,
Standard socket for SIL relays nom. 24 V DC
Electromechanical or solid Number configurable inputs/
state relays outputs: 16
Mechanically locked relays Number of inputs: 8 / 16 / 32
Galvanic isolation measured for Number of outputs: 16
system to Configurable interrupt inputs
chanal 2500 V AC Galvanic isolation from system
Status display for each channel Status display for each channel
via LED via LED

Digital input/output modules

DIO248/264/280

Features
Total channel number: 16 / 32 / 48 / 64 / 80,
nom. 24 V DC
Number configurable inputs/outputs: 16
Number of inputs: 16 / 32 / 48
Number of outputs: 16/ 32 / 48
Configurable interrupt inputs
Configurable 32 Bit counter
PDM output mode
Galvanic isolation from system
Status display for each channel via LED

24
 Digital input/output modules

Digital input modules

DI212/216/232

The digital input modules DI212, DI216, DI232,

DI232 , DI232 /np1 and DI232 /48 are used to
connect up to 12, 16 or 32 digital sensors to the
M1 controller.

• Digital input modules with 12, 16 or

32 inputs
• Current sinking logic > 2 mA acc.
to EN61132 type 1
• DI212, DI216, DI232, DI232 , DI232 / np:
input voltage: nom. 24 V DC (18 .. 34 V DC)
• DI232 /48: input voltage: nom. 48 V DC
(30 .. 58 V DC)
• Inputs 1 and 2 configurable as interrupt
inputs
• Galvanic isolation of inputs from the system
• Status display for each channel via LED
• Sink / source inputs (DI232 /np1)

Item Item no.

DI212 00010281-00
DI216 00009002-00
DI232 00008997-00
DI232 00016411-00
DI232/np1 00011516-00
DI232/48 00012162-00

25
 Digital input/output modules

DI212 DI216 DI232, DI232

Inputs
Number of inputs 12 16 32
Isolated input groups 1 (1-12) 2 (1-8 / 9-16) 2 (1-16 / 17-32)
Input voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC
Internal resistance Approx. 6 kΩ Approx. 6 kΩ Approx. 6 kΩ
Low level -34 V .. +5 V -34 V .. +5 V -34 V .. +5 V
High level +15 V .. +34 V +15 V .. +34 V +15 V .. +34 V
Input delay (normally via filter) 3 ms 3 ms 3 ms
Interrupt inputs Max. 2 Max. 2 Max. 2
Input delay (normally) 50 µs 50 µs 50 µs
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V 300 V 300 V
Galvanic isolation of groups - 500 V 500 V

DI232/np1 DI232/48
Inputs
Number of inputs 32 32
Isolated input group 4 (1-8 /9-16), (17-24/25-32) 2 (1-16 / 17-32)
Input voltage 24 V DC 48 V DC
Internal resistance < 4,7 kΩ < 7,5 kΩ
Low level |UC-UIN| < 5 V -34 V .. +10 V
High level |UC-UIN| > 15 V +30 V .. +58 V
Input delay (normally via filter) 100 µs 3 ms
Interrupt inputs Max. 2 Max. 2
Input delay (normally) 50 µs 20 µs
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V 500 V
Galvanic isolation of groups 500 V 500 V
Current consumption (via BS2xx) 80 mA at 5 V 88 mA at 5 V

Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )

Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
DI212 Digital input module; 12x 24V; 3ms filter; 1 group; 2 interrupt
­channels; 50µs delay; 3-wire system; isolated
DI216 Digital input module; 16x 24V; 3ms filter; 2 groups; 2 interrupt
channels; 50µs delay; isolated
DI232 Digital input module; 32x 24V; 3ms filter; 2 groups; 2 interrupt
channels; 50µs delay; isolated
DI232 Like DI232; ColdClimate ( )
DI232/np1 Digital input module; 32x 24V; 100µs filter; sink / source; 4 groups;
2 interrupt channels; 50µs delay; isolated
DI232/48 Digital input module; 32x 48V; 3ms filter; 2 groups; 2 interrupt
channels; isolated

26
 Digital input/output modules

Digital output modules

DO216/232

The digital output modules DO216, DO232,

DO232 and DO232/48 are suitable for connect-
ing up to 16 or 32 digital signal receivers (relays,
contactors, signal lamps, valves, etc.) to the M1
controller.

• Digital output modules with 16 or 32 outputs

• Outputs 24 V DC (DO216, DO232, DO232 )
• Outputs 48 V DC (DO232 / 48)
• 16 outputs with 2.5 A or 32 outputs
with 1 A / 0.5 A
• Outputs parallel connectable
• Monitoring of short circuit, wire break
and overload
• Compact design
• Status display for each channel via LED

Item Item no.

DO216 00009004-00
DO232 00009003-00
DO232 00016414-00
DO232/48 00012176-00

27
 Digital input/output modules

DO216 DO232, DO232 DO232/48

Description
Number of outputs 16 32 32
Output current / channel* 2.5 A 1A 0.5 A
Groups with different power 2 (1-8 / 9-16) 2 (1-16 / 17-32) 2 (1-16 / 17-32)
supplies
Total current / group Max. 8 A Max. 8 A Max. 8 A
Switching delay (resistive load)
0 -> 1 Normally 80 µs Normally 80 µs Normally 25 µs
(at 1 A) (at 1 A) (at 0.5 A)
1 -> 0 Normally 250 µs Normally 250 µs Normally 25 µs
(at 1 A) (at 1 A) (at 0.5 A)
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V 500 V
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
DO216 Digital output module; 16x 2.5A / 24V DC outputs; 2 groups;
isolated
DO232 Digital output module; 32x 1A / 24V DC outputs; 2 groups; isolated
DO232 Like DO232; ColdClimate ( )
DO232/48 Digital output module; 32x 0.5A / 48V DC outputs; 2 groups;
isolated

* rated

28
 Digital input/output modules

Digital relay output modules

DOR206/230

Relays are the simplest way of controlling galvani-

cally isolated power circuits. The output module’s
direct plugability relays drastically reduce wiring
work, save valuable control cabinet space and
facilicate troubleshooting. The locking mechanism
keeps the relay in place even when subjected to
shocks and vibrations. The relays offer maximum
flexibility for implementation in control cabinets
thanks to possibilities offered by standard relay
types with a voltage range from 24 V/48 V DC or
230 V AC, a broad power range and the selection
of valuable electro-mechanical relays or solid state
for high make-and-break cycles.
Quick and easy serviceability without the use of
tools is won by availability, clear status and error
display (thanks to LED) and a locking/ejecting
mechanism of relays as service parts.

• 6 relays
• Normally open contact (NO), normally closed
contact (NC), change-over contact (CO)
• Standard socket for SIL relays
• Electromechanical or solid state relays
• Mechanically locked relays
• Coil current monitoring
• Status display for each channel via LED
• Galvanic isolation measured for voltages
from system to channel 2500 V AC
• Backplanes BS2xx/S with protection class 1 for
other voltages than SELV are available
• Cost effective and space saving through direct
wiring to the consumer without relay and
terminal

Item Item no.

DOR206/230 00014497-10

29
 Digital input/output modules

DOR206/230
Output relays
Quantity 6 relay outputs; 3 groups with 2 output relays each are together
on an output plug
Relay socket For SIL relays 28 x 5 x 15 mm
relay coil Coil voltage 24 V DC, power rating 170 mW
Relay contact 230 V AC, 24 V DC depending on relay type
Switching capacity per channel (max.) Ohm resistive load up to 2 A AC
AC 15 230 VA (230 V AC / 1 A AC)
DC 13 12 W (24 V DC / 0.5 A DC)
Status indication (LED) Green
Switching rate (max. load in Ohms) 1 Hz
RC circuit Depending on relay and load complete externally
Input voltage, rated 230 V AC, 24 V DC depending on relay type (current consumption
not allowed)
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation relay outputs to the 2500 V AC / 5.5 mm
system
Galvanic isolation between the groups 1500 V AC / 3 mm (between the three relays output groups and to
the Cabinet)
Galvanic isolation between relay 800 V AC / 1 mm (between every two relay outputs)
outputs
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
DOR206/230 Digital relay output module 6x sockets with relay 24V/230V; AC15
230 VA; DC13 12W; change-over contact; BS2xx protection class
1 necessary with 230V working voltage

Safety instruction for operation

If higher voltages than safe low voltages are connected, then a backplane with BS2xx/S protective ground-
ing for protection class 1 must be used. Safe low voltages and dangerous voltages may not be connected
together on a relay module. In addition a suitable safeguard against accidental contact must be provided:
for example, installation in a control cabinet. While in operation all sockets must have a relay plugged in.
Cage clamps are the best method for protecting against accidental contact by technicians. It is not permis-
sible to use these relays as safety relays or for safety related applications.

30
 Digital input/output modules

Digital input / output modules

DIO216/232

The digital input / output modules DIO2xx/x can be

used to operate receivers of digital control devices
such as contactors, relays, pneumatic and hydraulic
valves as well as for reading signals from digitally
operating sources such as sensors, photocells or
switches.

• 16 / 32 / 48 / 64 or 80 digital channels
• 16 channels can be configured as input
or output
• Configurable interrupt inputs
• Status display for each channel via LED
• Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
• Supply voltage protected against reverse polarity
• Cost effective and space saving
• Full wiring without extra potential rails
(3-wire, only DIO216)

Item Item no.

DIO216 00010615-00
DIO216/4 00010892-00
DIO216/4 00016141-00
DIO232 00013034-00
DIO232 00019502-00

31
 Digital input/output modules

DIO216/4 DIO232
DIO216
DIO216/4 DIO232
Inputs
Quantity Max. 16 Max. 16 16 .. 32
Input voltage range (H) 15 .. 34 V DC
Input voltage range (L) 0 .. 5 V DC
Input delay (normally) 600 µs 600 µs 0 .. 365 ms
Internal resistance 6.8 kOhm
Status indication (LED) Green
Interrupt inputs 1 1 8
Outputs
Quantity Max. 16 Max. 16 16 .. 32
Output voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Output current per channel (max.) 1A 1A 0.5 A
Total current (max.) 12 A 16 A 8A
Status indication (LED) green
Switching frequency
1 kHz
(max., ohmic load)
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with
condensation condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
DIO216 Digital input/output module; 16x DIO; 24V / 1A; 600µs filter;
1 group; 3-wire system; 1 interrupt channel; 50µs delay; isolated
DIO216/4 Digital input/output module; 16x DIO; 24V / 1A; 600µs filter;
4 groups; 3-wire system; 1 interrupt channel; 50µs delay; isolated
DIO216/4 Like DIO216/4; ColdClimate ( )
DIO232 Digital input/output module; 16x DI; 40µs..365ms filter configurable;
16x DIO; 24V / 0.5A; 2 groups; 8 interrupt channel; 35µs delay;
­isolated
DIO232 Like DIO232; ColdClimate ( )

32
 Digital input/output modules

Digital input / output modules

DIO248/264/280

The input/output module DIO2xx are used for

controlling digital consumer like contactors,
relays, pneumatic and hydraulic valves, as
well as for reading signals of digital working
sensors, detectors or switches. On events can
be reacted expressly via 8 available interrupt
inputs. Alternatively there are available up to four
counters, for detecting e.g. positions or counting
goods. For the energy-saving operation of
inductivities all outputs can be operated as PWM.
Especially for the PWM operation of valves a hold
time is additionaly configurable between 0 up to
2s. Outputs are parallel connectable, in case it is
operated in the same operation mode.

• 16 / 32 / 48 / 64 or 80 digital channels
• 16 channels can be configured as input
or output
• Configurable interrupt inputs
• Configurable 32 bit counter
• Mode: event counter, incremental encoder, gate
measurement, cycle time or frequency measure-
ment
• PWM output mode for e.g. valve economy mode
• Status display for each channel via LED
• Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
• Supply voltage protected against reverse
polarity
• Cost effective and space saving

Item Item no.

DIO248 00019116-00
DIO264 00019115-00
DIO280 00019114-00
DIO280 00019119-00

33
 Digital input/output modules

DIO280
DIO248 DIO264
DIO280
Inputs
Quantity 16 .. 32 24 .. 40 32 .. 48
Input voltage range (H) 15 .. 34 V DC
Input voltage range (L) 0 .. 5 V DC
Input delay (normally) Standard: 600 µs
Settable 10 µs ... 270 ms
Internal resistance 8 kOhm
Status indication (LED) Green
Interrupt inputs 8, configurable as counter inputs or interrupt inputs
Counter
Quantity up to 4
Resolution 32 Bit
Operating mode event counter, incremental encoder, gate measurement, cycle time or
frequency measurement
Encoder types incremental encoder with A and B channel and one-channel pulse
encoder
Input signal A, B, Initator (interrupt inputs configurable)
Signal evaluation 1 / 2 / 4-fold edge evaluation or pulse direction mode
Max. input frequency one-channel: 50 kHz dual-channel (A/B): 20 kHz
Outputs
Quantity 16 .. 32 24 .. 40 32 .. 48
Output voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Output current per channel (max.) 0,5 A
Total current (max.) 16 A 20 A 24 A
Status indication (LED) Green
Switching frequency
1 kHz
(max., ohmic load)
Inductive breaking capacity 1,15 H
PWM
Quantity Like outputs
Pulse duty ratio / resolution 0 .. 100 % / 13 Bit
Frequency 1 Hz .. 1 kHz
Holding time (valve mode) 0 .. 2s configurable
Start/Stopp By dedicated output
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Internal power supply BS2xx
Internal current consumption 180 mA
(at 5 V)

34
 Digital input/output modules

DIO280
DIO248 DIO264
DIO280
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Energetic recovery Sensor energetic recovery of DIO by switched-off supply
Input voltage Nominal 24 V DC
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Working temperature -40 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with
condensation condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Design variants
DIO248 Digital input/output module; 16x DI; 600µs filter; 16x DIO; 16x DO;
24V / 0.5A; 4 groups, 600µs filter; 8 interrupt channel; 50µs delay;
isolated
DIO264 Digital input/output module; 24x DI; 600µs filter; 16x DIO; 24x DO;
24V / 0.5A; 5 groups; 600µs filter; 8 interrupt channel; 50µs delay;
isolated
DIO280 Digital input/output module; 32x DI; 600µs filter; 16x DIO; 32x DO;
24V / 0.5A; 6 groups; 600µs filter; 8 interrupt channel; 50µs delay;
isolated
DIO280 Like DIO280; ColdClimate ( )

35
Digital input/output modules

36
 Analog input / output modules

The appropriate accuracy for each task.

The diverse requirements of industrial and modules, the scope of products also
plant automation in the field of analog sig- comprises models with single channel
nal processing can be ideally covered by isolation, wire break detection and much
the M1 Automation System's signal mod- more. Resolutions from 12-bit to 16-bit
ules. offer perfect accuracy for every task. Fast
sampling times in some cases adjustable
Pt100 temperature sensors or DMS input filters and support of spontaneous
sensors with perfectly scalable channel single accesses are also ideally suited for
quantities, modules of various standard dynamic applications.
levels for general analog transmission
are available. Beside commonly supplied

Universal input/output Universal input/output

module GIO212 module AIO208/216

Features Features
Number of in- and outputs: 12 Number of in- and outputs: 8
(analog und digital) (AIO208) / 16 (AIO216)
Resolution: input 16 Bit, Resolution: input 16 Bit,
output 14 Bit output 14 Bit
Input voltage: to ±10 mV Input voltage: ±10 V to ±10 mV
Input current: 0(4) .. 20 mA Input current: 0(4) .. 20 mA
Digital input 24 V Filter from 4 kHz to 0.5 Hz
Digital 32-bit counter Temperature sensor Pt 2-,3-,4-wire
Digital output 100 mA Thermoelements J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B
Filter from 4 kHz to 0.5 Hz Galvanic isolation from
Temperature sensor Pt 2-,3-,4-wire system: 500 V
Thermoelements J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B Condensation-proof ColdClimate
Galvanic isolation from ­design ( )
system: 500 V
Condensation-proof ColdClimate
­design ( )

Analog input modules Analog input module

AI202/SI, AI204/SI AI208/SI

Features Features
Number of inputs: 2 / 8 Number of inputs: 8
Input current: 0 .. 20 mA Input current: 4 .. 20 mA,
Differential inputs 0 .. 20 mA, -20 .. +20 mA
Resolution: 13...16 bit Resolution: 13...16 bit
Galvanic isolation from Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V channels: 500 V

37
 Analog input / output modules

Analog input Analog output

modules AI204/x module AO208/l

Features Features
Number of inputs: 1 / 2 / 4 Number of outputs: 8
Input voltage: ±10 V DC Output current: 0 .. 20 mA or
Differential inputs 4 .. 20 mA
Resolution: 16 bit Resolution: 13 bit
Inputs can be synchronized Galvanic isolation from
Galvanic isolation from system: 500 V
system: 500 V Galvanic isolation of
Galvanic isolation of channels: 500 V
channels: 500 V

Analog output Analog output modules

module AO202 AO202/SI, AO204/SI

Features Features
Number of outputs: 2 Number of outputs: 2 / 4
Output voltage: ±10 V DC Output current: 0 .. 20 mA
Differential and short circuit Differential outputs
proof outputs Short circuit proof outputs
Resolution: 16 bit Resolution: 16 bit
Outputs can be synchronized Galvanic isolation from
Galvanic isolation from system: 500 V
system: 500 V Galvanic isolation of
Galvanic isolation of channels: 500 V
channels: 500 V

Analog input/output Temperature recording

modules AIO288/x module PTAI216­

Features
Features
Number of inputs: 4
Number of inputs:
(±10 V DC / ±1 V DC or
8 (±10 V DC / ±1 V DC
0 .. 20 mA)
or 0 .. 20 mA)
Connection: single-ended or
Number of outputs:
differential
8 (±10 V DC)
Resolution: 14 bit at AI
Resolution: 14 bit
Number of Pt100/Pt1000 sensors:
Connection:
12
single-ended or differential
Connection: 2-wire technology
Number of Pt100 sensors: 4
Resolution: 12 bits with Pt100/
Connection: 2- or 4-wire
Pt1000
technology
Galvanic isolation from
Optional galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
system: 500 V 38
 Analog input / output modules

Temperature recording Strain gauge module

modules TI214/x DMS202

Features Features
TI214: 14 inputs for Pt100 / Number of strain gauge (DMS)
Pt1000 sensors as well as type measuring inputs: 2 (full bridge)
J or K thermocouples Industrial connectors (LEMO)
TI214/2: thermal couples type Analog measuring outputs: 2
N or S Automatic measuring range
Resolution 14 bit (16 bit with selection 
measured value filtering) Wire break detection on
Wire break detection on the the measurement inputs
measurement inputs Resolution: 12 bit
Galvanic isolation from Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V system: 500 V

39
 Analog input / output modules

Universal input/output module

GIO212

The GIO212 is a module that can measure and

output various types of signals. Each channel
can be used as analog or digital output or input.
With the standard signals current (0..20 mA and
4..20 mA) and Voltage (±10 V), various sensors
and actuators can be connected. A resolution of
at least 14 bits allows measurement results from
signals that do not completely use the measuring
range (e.g. 0.. 5 V). Temperatures are playing a
significant role in ever more processes, which is
why this module supports Pt1000, Pt100 in 2-, 3-,
and 4-wire measurement, as well as all standard
type thermoelements. Similarly, the channels
can be used as digital inputs, which can also be
configured as interrupt input and digital 32-bit
counters. The quick digital 24V output can be
selected as Push-Pull, High-Side or Low-Side. The
output can be controlled as simple output or as
PWM.
Up to two signal types can be used simultaneously
per channel. Analog sensors can be supplied
via the digital output (short circuit-proof and
monitored), actuator signals read back and digital
signals monitored analog. Thus, this is a single
universal module for countless applications instead
of different modules for each signal type. A cost-
effective solution that simplifies logistics and
Item Item no. service.
GIO212 00020620-00 Various modes can be combined and set easily
GIO212 00020623-00 via a configuration wizard in the SolutionCenter
engineering tool.

• 12 channels • Resolution: Input 16-bit with filter, output 14-bit

• Analog and digital inputs and outputs • Filter adjustable from 4 kHz to 0.5 Hz per channel
• Modes that can be selected per channel: • Digital status display for analog channels
• Analog voltage input to ±10 mV • Digital inputs in accordance with IEC 61131 Type
• Analog current input 0(4) .. 20 mA 1,2,3
• Temperature sensor Pt elements as 2-,3-,4-wire • Digital outputs up to 10 kHz
• Thermoelements type J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B • All outputs overload, short circuit and external
• Analog voltage output ±10 V voltage-proof
• Analog current output 0(4) .. 20 mA • Measuring range monitoring freely adjustable
• Digital input 24 V (±105 %)
• Digital 32-bit counter, A and A/B operation • Error message on overload and overtemperature
• Digital output 100 mA and undervoltage of the supply
• Low-Side, High-Side, Push-Pull • Galvanic isolation from the system 500 V
• Digital output as 16-bit PWM • Condensation-proof ColdClimate design ( )

40
 Analog input / output modules

GIO212
Inputs/Outputs
Quantity 12 channels, individually configurable as input or output
Modes per channel Analog input
Temperature measurement input for Pt elements and thermoelements
Analog output
Digital input
Counter input
Digital output
PWM output
SYNC signal In Analog input, digital input, temperature measurement, counter (depen-
ding on the mode)
Out Analog output, digital output
Analog inputs in general
Digital resolution 16-bit
Measuring range ±105 % of nominal range
Measuring range monitoring Lower and upper measuring range limit, error message as status or
measuring range monitoring
Allowed common mode voltage Max. ±1 V
Refresh cycle time 100 µs
Cut-off frequency (3 dB) 4 kHz to 0.5 Hz adjustable channel by channel
Filtering slope > 80 dB/decade
Voltage inputs
Input voltage ±10 V, ±1 V, ±100 mV, ±10 mV
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.05 % of output voltage range
Current inputs
Input current ±20 mA or 0 .. 20 mA or 4 .. 20 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.2 % of output voltage range
Input impedance Max. 300 Ohm
Shunt short-circuit proof To +24 V
Interference voltage strength +24 V
Temperature inputs PTC
Temperature inputs PTC Pt100, Pt1000 selectable
Connection type 2-, 3- or 4-wire, optional
Input impedance > 100 kOhm
Temperature range -100 .. +800 °C
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Up to 300 °C ±0.25 % precisely of the input range
Value of the LSB 0.1 K, measurement values in 1/10 Kelvin

41
 Analog input / output modules

GIO212
Temperature inputs TE
Temperature elements Types J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B can be selected
Temperature ran- J -100 .. +1200 °C
ges per type K -100 .. +1370 °C
T -100 .. +400 °C
N -100 .. +1300 °C
E -100 .. +1000 °C
R -50 .. +1768 °C
S -50 .. +1768 °C
B +600 .. +1820 °C
Ground Up to ±3 V
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Input range max. ±0.15 % of input current range
(S, R, T max. ±0.3 %)
Value of the LSB 0.1 K, measurement values in 1/10 Kelvin
Analog outputs in general
Digital resolution 14-bit
Output signal range ±105 % nominal range
Voltage outputs
Output voltage ±10 V
Output current Max. 10 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Min. 1 kOhm, max. ±0.05 % of output current range
Current outputs
Output current 0(4) .. 20 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.25 % of the output current range
Apparent ohmic resistance Up to 600 Ohm
Digital inputs
Input voltage Nom. 24 VDC
Low level 0 V .. 5 V
High-level +11 V .. +34 V
According to Type 1 2 mA .. 6 mA
IEC61131-2 Type 2 6 mA .. 10 mA
Input current at
Type 3 2 mA .. 6 mA
24 V
Input type "source" 2 mA .. 6 mA
Input type "comparator" Typ. 2.5 V
Prof. filter for digital inputs 16 µs .. 262 ms, default 1 ms
Digital counter
Modes Count direction
1, 2, 4x evaluation
Period duration measurement
Pulse duration measurement
Combination with 2nd channel: pulse/direction mode or quadrature
­encoder

42
 Analog input / output modules

GIO212
Digital counter
Counter Counter up or down (in combination with 2nd channel)
32-bit
Input type 24 V, like digital input
Trigger (2nd channel) Save value
Reset (2nd channel) Reset counter
Digital output
Output type Low-Side, High-Side or Push-Pull (half bridge)
Output current / channel* 0.1 A (briefly 0.5 A for < 10 s)
Short-circuit current/channel 800 mA
Max. switching frequency 10 kHz
Broken wire detection Yes
Short circuit, overload Yes
PWM output
Output Specification like digital output
Frequency range 0.95 Hz .. 10 kHz
Pulse range 100 µs (10 µs) .. 8.192 ms
Frequency resolution 16 bit (LSB is 125 ns or 16 µs)
Internal power supply
Supply internal Via backplane BS2xx
Current consumption internal 80 mA
Power supply external
Voltage range external 18 .. 34 VDC
Current consumption external Typically 200 mA without external load
24 V
Galvanic isolation from the 500 V
system
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Design variants
GIO212 Universal input/output module; 12x analog In ±10V ±20mA Pt TC; 16bit;
analog Out ±10V 20mA; 14bit; digital In DI 5V / 24V, 125kHz, sink/­source,
counter; digital Out 24V/100mA, 10kHz, highside/lowside/pushpull, pwm;
configurable DI/AI filter; 100µs sample and refresh time; threshold moni-
toring; isolated
GIO212 Like GIO212; ColdClimate ( )

43
 Analog input / output modules

Universal input/output module

AIO208/216

The AIO208 and AIO216 modules enable the

measuring or output of all standard analog signals.
The AIO208 offers 8 channels and the AIO216
16 channels compactly in a single module. The
standard signal types for current (0 .. 20 mA and
4 .. 20 mA) and voltage ranges (±10 V .. ±10 mV)
allow the connection of a wide range of sensors and
actuators. A minimum 14-bit resolution makes it
­possible to also measure signals that do not fully
utilize the measuring range (e.g. 0 .. 5 V) with
a sufficiently high resolution. Temperatures are
playing an important role in an increasing number
of processes. These modules therefore also sup-
port Pt100, Pt1000 in 2, 3 and 4-wire measuring
­circuits, as well as all standard thermocouples.
For each channel, a second channel with unused
signal types can be used in addition to the pri­mary
configured signal type. For example, a current
output can be assigned to a voltage input so that
up to twice the number of channels per module are
provided.
This enables one module to cover virtually all
analog signal measuring tasks instead of having to
use many different modules for each signal type. A
cost-effective solution that simplifies logistics and
servicing. Different modes can be combined and set
simply using a configuration wizard in the Solution-
Center engineering tool.

Item Item no. • 16 channels AIO216, 8 channels AIO208

AIO208 00020628-00 • Analog inputs and outputs
AIO208 00020632-00 • Modes that can be selected per channel:
AIO216 00020627-00 • Analog voltage input ±10 V to ±10 mV
AIO216 00020631-00 • Analog current input 0(4) .. 20 mA
• Temperature sensor Pt elements as 2-,3-,4-wire
• Thermo couples type J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B
• Analog voltage output ±10 V
• Analog current output 0(4) .. 20mA
• Resolution: 16-bit input with filter, 14-bit output
• Filter adjustable from 4 kHz to 0.5 Hz per channel
• All outputs overload, short circuit and external
voltage-proof
• Measuring range monitoring freely adjustable
(±105 %)
• Error message on overload and overtemperature
and undervoltage of the supply
• Galvanic isolation from the system 500 V
• Optional condensation-proof ColdClimate ( )

44
 Analog input / output modules

AIO208/216
Inputs/Outputs AIO208 AIO216
Quantity 8 channels 16 channels
Modes per channel Analog input
Temperature measurement input for Pt elements and thermo couples
Analog output
SYNC signal In Analog input, temperature measurement
Out Analog output
Analog inputs in general
Digital resolution 16-bit
Measuring range ±105 % of nominal range
Measuring range monitoring Lower and upper measuring range limit, error message as status or
measuring range monitoring
Allowed common mode voltage Max. ±1 V
Refresh cycle time 100 µs
Cut-off frequency (3 dB) 4 kHz to 0.5 Hz adjustable channel by channel
Filtering slope > 80 dB/decade
Voltage inputs
Input voltage ±10 V, ±1 V, ±100 mV, ±10 mV
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.05 % of input voltage range
Current inputs
Input current ±20 mA or 0 .. 20 mA or 4 .. 20 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.2 % of input voltage range
Input impedance Max. 300 Ohm
Shunt short-circuit proof Up to +24 V
Interference voltage strength +24 V
Temperature inputs PTC
Temperature inputs PTC Pt100, Pt1000
Connection type 2-, 3- or 4-wire
Input impedance > 100 kOhm
Temperature range -100 .. +800 °C
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Up to 300 °C ±0.25 % of input range
Value of the LSB 0.1 K, measurement values in 1/10 Kelvin
Temperature inputs TE
Temperature elements Types J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B can be selected
Temperature J -100 .. +1200 °C
ranges per type K -100 .. +1370 °C
T -100 .. +400 °C
N -100 .. +1300 °C
E -100 .. +1000 °C
R -50 .. +1768 °C
S -50 .. +1768 °C
B +600 .. +1820 °C

45
 Analog input / output modules

AIO208/216
Temperature inputs
Ground Up to ±3 V
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.15 % of input current range
(S, R, T max. ±0.3 %)
Value of the LSB 0.1 K; measurement values in 1/10 Kelvin
Analog outputs in general
Digital resolution 14-bit
Output signal range ±105 % nominal range
Voltage outputs
Output voltage ±10 V
Output current Max. 10 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Min. 1 kOhm, max. ±0.05 % of output range
Current outputs
Output current 0(4) .. 20 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.25 % of the output range
Apparent ohmic resistance Up to 600 Ohm
Power supply
Supply internal Via backplane BS2xx
Current consumption internal 80 mA
Voltage range external 18 .. 34 VDC
Current consumption external 24 V Typically 200 mA without external load
Galvanic isolation I/O to system 500 V
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Design variants
AIO208 Universal analog input/output module; 8x analog In ±10V ±20mA Pt
TC; 16bit;analog Out ±10V 20mA; 14bit; configurable analog filter;
100µs sample and refresh time; threshold monitoring; isolated
AIO208 Like AIO208; ColdClimate ( )
AIO216 Universal analog input/output module; 16x analog In ±10V ±20mA Pt
TC; 16bit; analog Out ±10V 20mA; 14bit; configurable analog filter;
100µs sample and refresh time; threshold monitoring; isolated
AIO216 Like AIO216; ColdClimate ( )

46
 Analog input / output modules

Analog input modules

AI202/SI, AI204/SI

The analog input module AI20x / SI offers two or

four high resolution analog 16 bit current input
channels. Single channel isolation, high immu-
nity to interference, as well as integrated signal
filtering (delta-sigma converter) make this module
particularly interesting for process technology.

• 2 or 4 analog inputs
• Input current 0 .. 20 mA
• Input impedance 75 Ω
• Resolution: 16 bit
• Refresh cycle time 250 ms / channel
• Galvanic isolation of channels
• Galvanic isolation from system
• Monitoring of internal voltages

Item Item no.

AI202/SI 00012245-10
AI204/SI 00012245-00

47
 Analog input / output modules

AI202/SI, AI204/SI
Current inputs
Quantity 2 (AI202 / SI) or 4 (AI204 / SI)
Input current range 0 .. 20 mA
Input impedance 75 Ω
Digital resolution 16 bit
Value of the LSB 509 nA (Vref = 2.5 V to 75 Ω)
Cross-talk attenuation > 100 dB between the channels
Signal suppression 50 Hz / 60 Hz > 60 dB
Error at 25 °C ±0,1%
Error at the entire temperature range ±0.5 %
Sample frequency 4 measurements per second / channel
Input filter fg (3dB) delay time 1ms, Low-pass filter: 1st order
Galvanic isolation of channels 500 V
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
AI202/SI Analog input module; 2x In 20mA; 16bit; 0.1%; single
isolated
AI204/SI Analog input module; 4x In 20mA; 16bit; 0.1%; single
isolated

48
 Analog input / output modules

Analog input modules

AI208/SI

The compact analog input module AI208 / SI

offers eight individual galvanically isolated current
inputs. The measuring range is +/- 24.6 mA and
covers standards 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 20 mA and
-20 .. +20 mA.
Via adjustable measuring range limits errors, such
as short circuit, sensor defect or wire break can
be easily detected. Threshold values that can be
configured within the measuring range permit
monitoring of the process factor without having
to sample it. The shunt is protected against short
circuit of the 24 V supply, which can easily occur
with the sensor wiring. Robustness and above-
average diagnostic capabilities are the outstanding
characteristics of this input module.

• 8 analog inputs
• I nput current 0 .. 20 mA, 4 .. 20 mA,
-20 .. +20 mA
• Input impedance approx. 200 Ω
• Resolution: 13 .. 16 bit
• Adjustable input filter 2.5 kHz .. 2.5 Hz

Item Item no.

AI208/SI 00017772-00
AI208/SI 00018843-00

49
 Analog input / output modules

AI208/SI
Current inputs
Quantity 8
Input current range 0 .. 20 mA, 4 .. 20 mA, -20 .. +20 mA
Measuring range ±24.6 mA
Input impedance Normally 200 Ω
Digital resolution 13 bit (2.5 kHz filter) .. 16 bit (10 Hz filter)
Value of the LSB 751,202 nA
Cross-talk attenuation > 80 dB between the channels
Signal suppression 50 Hz / 60 Hz 75 dB / 80 dB at 2.5 Hz filter
Sample frequency Maximum 10 kHz (filter 2.5 kHz)
Filtering slope From cutoff frequency (3 dB) with 60 dB/decade
Input filter Adjustable: 2.5 kHz, 1.2 kHz, 640 Hz,
320 Hz, 160 Hz, 80 Hz, 40 Hz, 20 Hz, 10 Hz, 5 Hz, 2.5 Hz
Galvanic isolation of channels 500 V
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with
condensation condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
AI208/SI Analog input module 8x IN; +-20 mA /13 .. 16bit;
0.1%; sample time configurable up to 100µs; threshold;
single isolated
AI208/SI Like AI208/SI; ColdClimate ( )

50
 Analog input / output modules

Analog input modules

AI204/x

The analog input module AI204/x offers two or

four high-resolution 16 bit analog input channels
depending on the model. The extraordinarily high
accuracy with integrated temperature calibration
predestine this unit for demanding measurement
applications for industrial processes.

• 1, 2, or 4 analog inputs
• Input voltage -10 V .. +10 V
• Resolution: 16 bit
• Sample time from 20 µs
• Inputs can be synchronized
• Galvanic isolation of channels
• Galvanic isolation from system
• Temperature calibration
• C onnection possibility differential
• I nternal voltage generation is monitored

Item Item no.

AI204/1 00010693-20
AI204/2 00010693-10
AI204/4 00010693-00
AI204/4 00017447-00

51
 Analog input / output modules

AI204/x
Voltage inputs
Quantity 1, 2 or 4
Input voltage ±10 V
Input impedance > 33 kΩ
Digital resolution 16 bit
Value of the LSB 305 µV
Allowed common mode voltage Max. ±2 V
Cross-talk attenuation > 66 dB
Cross-talk attenuation > 120 dB between the channels
Error at 25 °C ±1mV (±0.005 %)
Error at the entire temperature range ±1mV (±0.005 %)
Sample time 20 / 160 / 320 / 640 µs at
1- / 8- / 16- / 32-times sampling
Temperature calibration Normally 500 µs per calibration
Input filter 0.33 kHz / 4 kHz selectable by software
Galvanic isolation of channels 500 V
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with condensation
condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
AI204/1 Analog input module; 1x In +-10V; 16bit; high precision
0.005 %; 20µs sampling time; digital averaging; single
isolated
AI204/2 Analog input module; 2x In +-10V; 16bit; high precision
0.005 %; 20µs sampling time; digital averaging; single
isolated
AI204/4 Analog input module; 4x In +-10V; 16bit; high precision
0.005 %; 20µs sampling time; digital averaging; single
isolated
AI204/4 Like AI204/4; ColdClimate ( )

52
 Analog input / output modules

Analog output module

AO202

The analog output module AO202 offers two

high-precision 16 bit analog output channels.

• 2 analog outputs
• Output voltage -10 V .. +10 V
• Resolution: 16 bit
• Outputs can be synchronized
• G
 alvanic isolation of channels
• Galvanic isolation from system
• Differential connection
• Short circuit proof
• Monitoring of internal power supply

Item Item no.

AO202 00010692-00

AO202
Voltage outputs
Quantity 2
Output voltage ±10 V
Output impedance output is corrected to ±2 mA
Digital resolution 16 bit
Value of the LSB 305 µV
Cross-talk attenuation > 120 dB between the channels
Error at 25 °C ±2.5 mV (±0.0125 %)
Error in the entire temperature range ±12 mV (±0.06%)
Refresh cycle time 10 µs per channel
Galvanic isolation of channels 500 V
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
AO202 Analog output module; 2x Out +-10V; 16bit; high
­precision 0.0125%; 10µs refresh cycle; single isolated

53
 Analog input / output modules

Analog output module

AO208/l

The analog output module AO208/I offers eight

13 bit current outputs.

• 8 analog outputs
• Output current 0 .. 20 mA or 4 .. 20 mA
• Resolution: 13 bit
• Apparent ohmic resistance ≤ 500Ω
• Galvanic isolation from system
• Monitoring of internal voltages
• Short circuit proof

Item Item no.

AO208/I 00011244-00
AO208/I 00017441-00

AO208/I
Current outputs
Quantity 8
Output current 0 .. 20 mA / 4 .. 20 mA
Digital resolution 13 bit
Apparent ohmic resistance ≤500Ω
Value of the LSB 2.44 µA
Cross-talk attenuation > 70 dB between the channels
Error at 25 °C ±100 µA (±0.5 %)
Error at the entire temperature range ±160 µA (±0.8%)
Setting time of 1% of the output current range Max. 500 µs
Refresh cycle time 500 µs
Galvanic isolation of channels No isolation
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with condensation
­condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
AO208/I Analog output module; 8x Out 20mA; 13bit; 0,5%;
500µs refresh cycle; isolated
AO208/I Like AO208/I; ColdClimate ( )

54
 Analog input / output modules

Analog output modules

AO202/SI, AO204/SI

The analog input module AO20x / SI

offers two or four high resolution analog
16 bit current output channels.

• 2 or 4 analog outputs
• Output current 0 .. 20 mA
• Resolution: 16 bit
• Galvanic isolation of channels
• Galvanic isolation from system
• Short circuit proof outputs

Item Item no.

AO202/SI 00012246-10
AO204/SI 00012246-00

AO202/SI, AO204/SI
Analog outputs
Quantity 2 (AO202 / SI) or 4 (AO204 / SI)
Output current 0 .. 20 mA
Apparent ohmic resistance Up to 500 Ω
Digital resolution 16 bit
Value of the LSB 305 nA
Cross-talk attenuation > 100 dB between the channels (50 .. 60 Hz)
Error at 25 °C ±0,2%
Error at the entire temperature range ±0,6%
Setting time of 0.1 % of the output current Max. 3 ms
range
Galvanic isolation of channels 500 V
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
AO202/SI Analog output module; 2x Out 20mA; 16bit; 0.2%; single
isolated
AO204/SI Analog output module; 4x Out 20mA; 16bit; 0.2%; single
isolated

55
 Analog input / output modules

Analog input/output modules

AIO288/x

The analog input/output module AIO288/x

offers eight analog input channels as well as eight
analog output channels.

• 8 analog inputs
• 8 analog outputs
•C  onnection possibility single-ended
or differential
• Power supply for up to 4 potentiometers
• Temperature inputs for up to
4 Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
• 2-wire or 4-wire inputs for
Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
• Wire break detection for the inputs (for
voltage and temperature)
• Short circuit proof outputs
•O  verload detection for
potentiometer power supplies
• Monitoring of the external
supply voltage

Item Item no.

AIO288 00014470-00
AIO288 00016157-00
AIO288/1 00014470-10

AIO288/x
Voltage inputs
Quantity Max. 8
Input voltage ±1 V or ±10 V
Input impedance > 100 kΩ
Digital resolution 14 bit
Allowed common mode Max. ±1 V
voltage
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.05 % of input voltage range
Input cutoff frequency 1.5 kHz (3 dB)
Cross-talk attenuation > 60 dB
Sample time 200 µs

56
 Analog input / output modules

AIO288/x
Voltage outputs
Quantity Max. 8
Output voltage ±10 V
Digital resolution 14 bit
Allowed common mode voltage Max. ±1 V
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.025 % of output voltage range
Settling time of 1 % of the Max. 400 µs
output current range
Cross-talk attenuation > 60 dB
Refresh cycle time 200 µs
Current inputs
Quantity Max. 8
Input current 0 .. 20 mA
Input impedance 243 Ω
Digital resolution 14 bit
Max. input current 35 mA (destruction limit)
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.1 % of input current range
Input cutoff frequency 1.5 kHz (3 dB)
Sample time 200 µs
Temperature inputs
Temperature inputs Pt100, Pt1000 selectable
Quantity Max. 4
Connection type 2- or 4-wire, optional
Temperature range -100 .. +500 °C
Input impedance > 100 kΩ
Basic accuracy at 25 °C Max. ±0.1 % of input current range
Input cutoff frequency 1.5 kHz (3 dB)
Value of the LSB 0.1 K
Sample time 200 µs
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V

Potentiometer power supply

Quantity Max. 4
Voltage range ±10 V
Error at 25 °C Max. ±100 mV
Load Max. 40 mA
External power supply Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption 230 mA at +5 V DC
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V (only AIO288)

57
 Analog input / output modules

AIO288/x
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with
condensation condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
AIO288 Analog input/output module; 8x In +-10V +-1V 20mA 4x Pt100/1000;
14bit; 0.1%; 200µs sample time; 8x Out +-10V; 4x Poti supply;
­isolated
AIO288 Like AIO288; ColdClimate ( )
AIO288/1 Analog input/output module; 8x In +-10V +-1V 20mA 4x Pt100/1000;
14bit; 0.1%; 200µs sample time; 8x Out +-10V; 4x Poti supply; NOT
isolated

58
 Analog input / output modules

Temperature input module

PTAI216

The temperature recording module PTAI216 has

four analog input channels and 12 inputs for
Pt100/Pt1000 sensors.

•4
 analog inputs ±10 V / ±1 V / 0 .. 20 mA
•1
 2 inputs for Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
•S
 ingle-ended or differential inputs
for analog signals
•2
 -wire inputs for Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
•R
 esolution 14 bit (AI) / 12 bit (Pt100/Pt1000)
•S
 ample time 2.5 ms (AI) / 480 ms (Pt100/
Pt1000)
•C
 hannels galvanically isolated from system
•w
 ire break detection for the inputs
•M
 onitoring of the external power
supply

Item Item no.

PTAI216 00010708-00
PTAI216 00017456-00

59
 Analog input / output modules

PTAI216
Voltage inputs
Quantity Max. 4
Input type Single-ended or differential
Input voltage ±1 V or ±10 V
Input impedance > 33 kΩ
Input filter 170 Hz (low pass 1st order)
Digital resolution 14 bit
Allowed common mode voltage Max. ±1 V
Cross-talk attenuation > 60 dB
Sample time 2.5 ms
Current inputs
Quantity Max. 4
Input current 0 .. 20 mA
Input impedance 243 Ω
Digital resolution 14 bit
Max. input current 35 mA (destruction limit)
Error at operating temperature -30 ... +60oC -> ±0.3%*
Sample time 2.5 ms
Pt100/Pt1000* inputs
Quantity 12
Input type 2-wire technology
Temperature range -100 .. +300 °C
Constant current via sensor Pt100: 3 mA
Pt1000: 0.3 mA
Digital resolution 12 bit
Value of the LSB 0.1 K
Averaging Over 16 values per 480 ms
External power supply
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption internal Normally 70 mA at 24 V DC
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with
condensation condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
PTAI216 Temp.-recording module; 12x Pt100/1000; 4x In +-10V +-1V 20mA;
14bit; 0.25 %; isolated
PTAI216 Like PTAI216; ColdClimate ( )

* only applies for DC in the input current range 20 mA

60
 Analog input / output modules

Temperature input modules

TI214/x

The temperature recording modules TI214/x pro-

vide 14 temperature measuring channels in a single
module width. With the TI214 either Pt100/Pt1000
sensors in 2 and 3 wire technology or type J or K
thermocouples can be connected to each measuring
channel. The TI214/2 module allows for the con-
nection of type N or S thermocouples. The sensor
type can be individually selected for each channel.
In this way, the most effective and cost-efficient
solution can be implemented for the application.
The average determination of the measured
value can be set between 16 fold and 64 fold
for easy an reliable interference suppression.

With the module version TI214 the tempera-

ture of the switching cabinet can be measured
on the same module with an inexpensive Pt100
sensor, while for example the temperature con-
trol systems are fitted with thermocouples.
The new 3-wire measuring evaluation of the
Pt100/Pt1000 sensor compensates the voltage er-
ror of both symmetrical cable runs and enables the
precision of complex 4-wire measuring technol-
ogy to be implemented in inexpensive 3-wire tech-
nology. The Pt sensors can also be connected in
simple 2-wire technology and this is sufficient for
many applications with short measuring lines.

TI214/x
• Resolution 14 bit (16 bit measured value averaging)
• Averaging of measured values for interference sup-
pression
• Wire break detection the inputs
• Channels isolated against the system
• Monitoring of the external power supply
• Cold junction temperature compensated

TI214
• 14 inputs for Pt100 / Pt1000 sensors as well as type
J or K thermocouples
• 2-wire or 3-wire input for Pt100 / Pt1000 sensors

TI214/2
• 14 inputs for thermocouplers type N or S

Item Item no.

TI214 00014008-00
TI214/2 00014008-20
TI214 00018808-00

61
 Analog input / output modules

TI214 / TI214 TI214/2

Temperature measuring inputs
Quantity 14 14
Connection type Pt100/Pt1000 3-wire or 2-wire technology -
Input filter Low pass filter 1st order Low pass filter 1st order
cutoff frequency (3 dB) 17 kHz cutoff frequency (3 dB) 8Hz
Sensor types thermocouples J or K in insulated or uninsulated N or S in insulated or uninsulated
design in accordance with design in accordance with
DIN IEC584 each input can be DIN IEC584 each input can be pro-
programmed for different types grammed for different types
Temperature range Pt100/Pt1000 -100 .. +800 °C -
Temperature range thermocouples J/K: -30 .. +1000 °C N: -30 .. +1300 °C
S: -30 .. +1600 °C
Constant current Pt sensor 2 mA (Pt100), 200 µA (Pt1000) -
Digital resolution 14 bits (16 bits representation with measured value averaging)
Value of the LSB 0.055 K (Pt100 / Pt1000) 0.08 K
0.062 K (thermocouple N -30 .. +1300 °C)
(thermocouple -30 .. +1000 °C) 0.098 K
(thermocouple S -30 .. +1600 °C)
Base accuracy 0.1 % of measuring range at 0.15 % for type N and
25 °C (Pt100 / Pt1000)* 0.25 % for type S of measuring
0.15 % of measuring range at range at +25 °C (thermocouples
+25 °C (thermocouples J / K)** N / S)**
Conversion time 80 ms at 16 fold averaging 1 ms without averaging
320 ms at 64 fold averaging 80 ms at 16 fold averaging
320 ms at 64 fold averaging
Thermocouples linearization Polynomial to IEC60584 part 1, Polynomial to IEC60584 part 1,
for sensor types J or K for sensor types N or S
Error detection Wire break
Interference voltage strength -36 V .. +36 V
External power supply
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption internal normally 160 mA at + 24 V DC
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Models
TI214 Temperature recording module; 14x thermocouple type J,K (FeCo/
NiCrNi); Pt100/1000; 14bit; 0.15%; isolated
TI214/2 Temp.-recording module; 14x thermocouple type N,S; 14 bit;
0.15%; isolated
TI214 Like TI214; ColdClimate ( )

* only applies for 3-conductor technology

** without consideration of cold point compensation 62
 Analog input / output modules

Strain gauge input module

DMS202

The strain gauge module DMS202 is a two-chan-

nel, micro controller operated measuring module
to read quickly changing DMS signals up approx.
1 kHz with a sample time of only 12.5 µs.

•2
 DMS measurement inputs
•H
 igh-quality plug-in connector
•2
 analog measurement outputs
•A
 utomatic measuring range selection
(input)
•W
 ire break detection on the measurement inputs
•M
 onitoring of the external
supply voltage

Item Item no.

DMS202 00009884-00

63
 Analog input / output modules

DMS202
Bridge supply
Carrier frequency 5 kHz ±2 %
Amplitude 4 Veff ±2 %
Synchronization of the carrier frequency Optional
Synchronization range 5 kHz ±2 %
DMS amplifier input
Input resistance > 5 MΩ
Desired signal bandwidth 1 kHz
Resolution 12 bit
max. input common mode voltage 10 V (no overdrive)
CMRR (0 .. 5 kHz) > 80 dB
Wire break monitoring Yes, error message
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Monitoring of the ext. voltage Yes, power-fail signal
Conversion time 12.5 µs for one channel, 25 μs for two-channel operation
Measurement range selection 2.0 / 4.0 / 8.0 / 16.0 mV or Auto Range
Measurement range switchover Automatic or via software
Measurement outputs
Output voltage 0 .. 10 V
Internal resistance <2Ω
Load resistor > 2.5 kΩ
Special functions Peak value capture
Electronic capacity comparison
Carrier frequency synchronization
External power supply
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption external 100 mA at 24 V DC
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Execution variants
DMS202 Strain gauge measuremet, 2x full bridge; +-2/4/8/16mV;
25µs sampling time; 5 kHz carrier frequency, 12bit; isolated

64
 Function modules

Flexibility and precision in soft motion control.

As the leading provider in the field of soft face). The possibility of controlling the drives
motion control, Bachmann electronic offers with analog signals (voltage), step mo-
a flexible line of modules for directly wired tor outputs or PWM output channels allows
motion control. ­flexible configuration.

Bachmann modules cover all types of data All encoder interface modules of the M1
acquisition, from fast pulse and incremen- system offer precise synchronizability as
tal encoder cards with bandwidths up to well as comprehensive functional support
8 MHz to SSI (Serial Synchronous Inter- for the programmer.

Counter modules
CNT204 / x

Features
Number of counter inputs: 4
(for single-channel pulse encoders, zero initiators, triggers)
Number of incremental encoders: 2 input channels
(HTL and / or RS422)
Encoder power supply direct from the module via the
connectors
Inputs can be synchronized

Encoder interface modules

ISI222 / x

Features
Input channels for incremental or SSI encoder: 2
Output channels analog: 2 (±10 V DC)
Input channels digital: 4 (reference, trigger)
Encoder power supply directly from the module via the
connectors
Monitoring of all external supply voltages
Max. input frequency: 1 MHz / 8 MHz

65
Pulse width modulation
module PWM202

Features
Pulse width modulated output channels: 2
18 .. 48 V DC external supply TTL
Integrated current control
Output current: to 2 A
Resolution: 10 / 16 bit
Monitoring of the load current
Monitoring of all external supply voltages

Axis controller module

ACR222 / 2

Features
Interfaces for stepping motor output stages up to
150 kHz: 2
Interfaces for incremental encoders to 1 MHz: 2
Encoder power supply direct from the module via the
connectors
Monitoring of all external supply voltages
Linear or sine shaped acceleration profiles
External set or integrated profiles

66
 Function modules

Counter modules CNT204/x

The counter module CNT204 / x contains four

counters for single line pulse generators. Two of
the channels can optionally be used as inputs for
incremental encoders.

•4 counter inputs for single line pulse generators

• Status indication: LED (green) per counter/
initiator input
• 2 input channels for incremental encoders
• Encoder power supply directly from the module
via the connectors
• Inputs can be synchronized
• Monitoring of all supply voltages
• Period measurement with 42 ns resolution
• Differential measurement (phase shift between
C1 and C3 or C2 and C4) with 42 ns resolution

Item Item no.

CNT204/ H 00010709-10
CNT204/H 00016407-10
CNT204/R 00010709-20

67
 Function modules

CNT204/x
Incremental encoder inputs
Quantity 2
Counter resolution 32 bit
Input signals A-, A+ / B-, B+ / N-, N+
Signal evaluation 1- / 2- / 4-edge evaluation or pulse direction mode
Max. input frequency 1 MHz (RS422) / 300 kHz (HTL)
Input filter 185 kHz .. 6 MHz adjustable, default 6 MHz
Counter inputs
Quantity 4 (2 if INC inputs are used)
Counter resolution 32 bit
max. input frequency 20 kHz
min. pulse length 25 µs
Input filter 183 Hz .. 46.88 kHz adjustable, default off (fg=100 kHz)
Encoder power supply +5 V +24 V
voltage +5 V Uext -1 V
Tolerance ±5 % like Uext
max. current / encoder 200 mA 300 mA
Ripple < 150 mVss like Uext
Short circuit proof Yes, permanent Yes, permanent
External power supply
Power supply 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption internal 40 mA at 24 V + 1.2x current consumption of the encoders
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
CNT204/H Counter module; 2x INC HTL 300kHz + 2x counter HTL 20kHz oder
4x counter HTL 20kHz; HTL=24V; 32bit; INC A,A/B/N; position; phase
­difference; period; trigger; isolated
CNT204/H Like CNT204/H; ColdClimate ( )
CNT204/R Counter module; 2x INC RS422 1MHz + 2x counter HTL 20kHz oder
4x counter HTL 20kHz; HTL=24V; 32bit; INC A,A/B/N; position; phase
­difference; period; trigger; isolated

68
 Function modules

Positioning modules ISI222/x

Especially designed for sophisticated motion con-

trol applications the ISI222 module offers compact
equipment and optimum precision. Equipped for
the total control of two motion axes, the module
features a number of encoder interfaces for posi-
tion acquisition, analog outputs for the application
of manipulated variables, as well as digital inputs
for the initiator or trigger. Furthermore, due to the
central communication concept, all I / Os of the re-
maining M1 system can also be incorporated into
the motion control (limit switches, etc.).
Input frequencies up to 8 MHz and the integrated
synchronization (IO-Bus-Sync) with the total sys-
tem allow highly dynamic and precise movements.

Beside the full compatibility to the well proven

controller modules M-SMC, M-CNC and M-SHAFT,
also the user own programs and individually
designed control tasks can utilize the extensive
integrated functions of the module simply via
the known standard interfaces (SVI, MIO). The
extensive integrated error monitoring with ongo-
ing checking of the encoder resolution identifies
hard-to-see wiring or ESD problems and allows
the application especially under difficult environ-
mental conditions.

•2 input channels for incremental and SSI

encoders
•F ull 32 bit counter
•2 analog outputs (14 bit)
•4 fast digital input channels for initiator and
trigger
•P osition measurement / position storage can be
initiated via triggers
•V irtual for use in applications: zero pulse, speed,
etc.
• Synchronization via SYNC / PreSYNC
•E ncoder supply via module
•M onitoring of the encoder voltage
•W ire break monitoring (encoder)

Item Item no.

ISI222 00013737-00
ISI222 00016421-00
ISI222 / 8 00014127-00

69
 Function modules

ISI222 / x
Encoder interface module
Quantity 2
Counter resolution 32 bit
Input signals A-, A+ / B-, B+ / N-, N+
Signal evaluation 1- / 2- / 4-edge evaluation or pulse direction mode
Input frequency Max. 1 MHz (ISI222), max. 8 MHz (ISI222 / 8)
Synchronization By means of SYNC signal
Modes Reference value monitoring
Conditional storage of counter value
Conditional load / rest of counter value
Speed measurement
Error detection Wire break, encoder resolution monitoring
Galvanic isolation of channels* 500 V
SSI encoder interface*
Quantity 2
Data word length programmable up to 32 bits
Input signals D-, D+
Output signals T-, T+
Data format Graycode and binary format, others can be evaluated by SW
Transfer clock rate 100 kHz .. 2 MHz
Synchronization Via preSYNC function
Encoder power supply
Output voltage ranges +5 V and +15 V selectable with jumper, 24 V looped through
Output voltage +5 V +15 V -1 V
Tolerance ±5 % ±3 % like Uext
max. current / encoder 250 mA 100 mA 300 mA
Short circuit proof Yes, permanent Yes, permanent Yes, permanent (PTC)
Ripple < 150 mVss at +5 V and +15 V
Galvanic isolation of channels 500 V
Analog outputs
Quantity 2
Output voltage ±10 V
Resolution 14 bit
Output current Max. ±2 mA
Conversion time <40 µs
Basic accuracy at 25 °C 0.025 %
Error at the entire ±0.1%
Temperature range
Setting time of 1% of the Max. 500 µs
output current range
Error detection Wire break
Short circuit proof Yes, permanent
Synchronization By means of SYNC signal

* only for ISI222

70
 Function modules

ISI222 / x
Digital inputs
Quantity 4 (2 INIT, 2 TRIG)
voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
Input delay 30 µs default, filter adjustable
Acc. to IEC 61131 Type 1
Function INIT: initiator, trigger for strobe register, digital input
TRIG: trigger for strobe register, digital input
Connection type
Connection for analog and Phoenix Contact MINICOMBICON connector RM 3.5 with flange
digital I / O
Connection type Screw clamp, spring tension clamp
plug codable, labeling by channels
Operating conditions
Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
Mounting Mountable on backplane BS2xx
Mounting position Horizontal (vertical at -20 .. +55 °C Horizontal (vertical at -30 .. +55 °C
operating temperature) operating temperature)
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
ISI222 Positioning module; 2x In INC/SSI; 1MHz; 32bit; RS422 level; INC A,
A/B/N; position; gate time; period; velocity; encoder supply 5V / 15V / 24V;
2x Out +-10V; 14bit; 0.025 %; 40µs; synchronized; PreSYNC; 4x DI 24V;
trigger; homing
ISI222 Like ISI222; ColdClimate ( )
ISI222 / 8 Positioning module; 2x In INC; 8MHz; 32bit; RS422 level; INC A, A/B/N;
position; gate time; period; velocity; encoder supply 5V / 15V / 24V; 2x Out
+-10V; 14bit; 0.025 %; 40µs; synchronized; PreSYNC; 4x DI 24V; trigger;
homing; SSI-Encoder not supported

71
 Function modules

Pulse Width Modulation Module

PWM202

The pulse width modulation module PWM202 has two

power outputs for direct activation of inductive or
ohmic loads, such as DC motors, immersion coils, etc.
with pulse width modulated signals.

•  pulse-width modulated output channels

2
• 2 shielded DSub connectors for output channels
• Status indication: LED (green) per output
• Choice of high-power or TTL output level
• Monitoring of the load current
• Monitoring of the external supply voltage
• Monitoring of the internal temperature

Item Item no.

PWM202 00011056-00

PWM202
Outputs
Quantity 2
State indicating LEDs RDY yellow, OUT-1 / OUT-2 green
Output voltage 18 .. 48 V (= Uexternal) or TTL level
Output current 0 .. 2 A at f ≤ 40 kHz and Uout ≤ 48 V (TA = +60 °C)
Frequency Channel 1: 3 Hz .. 40 kHz adjustable
Channel 2: 155 Hz .. 40 kHz adjustable
Duty cycle 0 .. 100 % individually adjustable for each channel
Resolution channel 1 16 bit, edge aligned or center aligned
Resolution channel 2 10 bit, edge aligned
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Load resistor Normally 20 Ω
External power supply
Voltage range 18 .. 48 V DC
Power consumption Max. 10 W + load
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Monitoring
External power supply Yes, power-fail signal + interrupt
Overvoltage Yes
Undervoltage Yes
Overcurrent (channel) Yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
PWM202 Pulse width modulation module; 2 channels each 2A/48V or TTL;
actuator or current regulation; isolated
72
 Function modules

Axis controller module

ACR222/2

The axis controller module ACR222/2 is a encoder

interface module to operate one / two (micro)
stepping motor output stages with stepper
frequencies of up to 150 kHz.

•2  interfaces for stepping motor output stages

to 150 kHz
•2  interfaces for incremental encoders up to 1 MHz
• Encoder
 power supply directly from the module
via the connectors
• Inputs
 for home, abort and
2 limit switches per channel
• Monitoring
 of the external supply voltage
2
• Linear, sine or parabolic acceleration
• Two-step linear speed profiles

Item Item no.

ACR222 / 2 00009928-10

73
 Function modules

ACR222/2
Encoder interface
Counter resolution 24 bit
Counter modes 1- / 2- / 4-edge evaluation
Encoder frequency Max. 1 MHz
Inputs HEDL (HP / AVAGO interface) / RS422
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Encoder power supply +5 V or +15 V selectable with jumper
Motor controller interface
Stepper frequency Max. 150 kHz
Number of steps (range) 1 .. 16 777 215
Acceleration type Linear, sin2- or parabolic
Acceleration time / braking time 8 ms .. 131 s
Output voltage Low: 0 .. 2 V, high: 3 .. 34 V, Imax = 10 mA
Input voltage Low: 0 .. 3 V, high: 4 .. 30 V
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption internal Normally 400 mA at 24 VDC + Σ current consumption of
the encoders and sensors
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Execution variants
ACR222 / 2 Stepper motor module; 2x Out 150kHz; 2x In INC; 1MHz;
RS422; 8x DI 24V; acceleration modes linear/sine²/
parable; without power amplifier; encoder supply 5/15V

maximum frequency [kHz] maximum frequency [kHz]

Start ramp breaking ramp Start ramp

[ms] [ms] [ms] middle frequency [kHz]

breaking ramp
[ms]

position
or SW-trigger

74
 Grid measurement module

Safety and efficiency of the electrical energy supply.

The safety and efficiency of the electrical fieldbus and telecontrol interfaces that are
energy supply are placing increasing simple and affordable.
demands on the generator units, High resolution and fast acquisition of all
transmission systems and consumers. A grid variables forms the indispensable basis
new generation of systems for measuring, of all grid modules. The integrated energy
monitoring and protection provides an metering simplifies handling in engineering
essential technical basis. Our grid modules and operation. In order to ensure network
supply the latest state-of-the-art technology stability, generator units must be able to
as a fully integrated solution in the guarantee a defined response according to
automation units of the M200 system. This the relevant grid codes. Faults in the grid or
provides modular expansion capability, data in the plant must lead to defined responses
storage and communication over several such as the provision of control power or grid

Grid measurement, protection and

synchronization module GSP274

Features
Measures current, voltage, frequency, power and
power quality
Synchronism-check relay
Monitoring functions to ensure safe generator
operations
Controls two circuit breakers
Integrated fault recorder
Provides grid measurement simulation
Integrated sequence of events recorder
4Q energy counter

Grid measurement and protection

module GMP232

Features
Measures current, voltage, frequency, power and
power quality
Input voltage up to 690 VL-L, RMS
Numerous monitoring functions
Integrated fault recorder
Sequence of events recorder with real time stamp
Two integrated relays
Grid measurement simulation
Monitoring functions are independent of PLC status

75
disconnection. The GSP274 and GMP232 module coupling of generators. GM260 modules
series offer for this configurable protection and impress with their particularly compact
monitoring functions in accordance with the design and simple handling for consumption
latest standards. The integrated harmonics optimization and energy monitoring.
analysis function deals with the problems of
power quality caused by increasingly larger
power electronic components. Precise, time-
stamped event logging and integrated real-
time data recorders provide a convenient
basis for commissioning or fault analysis.
Furthermore, the GSP274 modules also provide
a synchronization unit for the automatic grid

Grid measurement module

GM260

Features
Current, voltage, frequency and grid measurement
Remanent four-quadrant power counter
Rated voltage up to 480 VL-L, RMS
Robust and reliable hardware

76
 Grid measurement module

Grid measurement, protection and

synchronization module GSP274

The GSP274 enables the safe, reliable and automatic

synchronization of generator units to the power
supply grid. It also provides a number of monitoring
functions for generator and grid protection. The circuit-
breakers are tripped by the module directly via digital
outputs and relays. Additional digital inputs enable
the monitoring of the relevant switching state. The
continuous monitoring of grid harmonics up to the 50th
harmonic can be used for direct responses as well as
for evaluating the power quality.
Item Item No.
GSP274 00019756-00 The module is provided with an integrated real-
time data recorder for the high-precision recording
of up to 16 measuring channels during protective
tripping or synchronization. Error events are recorded
continuously and stored permanently with a high
resolution time entry. The internal time base of the
module can be synchronized to an external time
source (e.g. IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol),
which supports the analysis of the data from spatially
separated measurement and protection devices.

The GSP274 is fully integrated in the Bachmann

SolutionCenter. Configurations can be created simply
and stored for later reuse. Both the measured channel
values and also the derived values are made available
directly in the user interface. Commissioning and
fault analysis are simplified with tabular, phasor and
time sequence displays. Event logs and recorded
time sequences can be exported in CSV respectively
COMTRADE format. The integrated simulation
function simplifies the configuration of protection and
monitoring functions.

• Measurement of current, voltage, frequency, power,

power factor, phase angle
• Measurement of grid harmonics up to the
50th (power quality)
• Synchronization monitoring / Synchro-check
• Monitoring/Protection functions for grid and
generator protection
• Controls two circuit-breakers
• Integrated real-time data recorder
• Integrated event logging
• 4Q energy counter
• Measured value simulation

77
 Grid measurement module

GSP274 - Grid measurement

Current/voltage measurement
Measuring method True RMS (incl. harmonics)
Sampling rate 50 µs (20 kHz)
Measurement interval 50 Hz: 10 ms
60 Hz: 8.33 ms
Voltage measurement
Number 7 (generator: L1,L2,L3,N / grid: L1,L2,L3,N / busbar Lx,Ly)
Maximum rated voltage UL-L, RMS: 480 VAC UL-N, RMS: 277 VAC
Voltage measuring range UL-L, RMS: 17.3 – 728 VAC, UL-N, RMS: 10 – 420 VAC
Accuracy* ±0.1 %
Continuous overload UL-L, RMS: 675 VAC, UL-N, RMS: 390 VAC
Short-term overload (10x10 s, Interval 10 s) UL-L, RMS: 1143 VAC, UL-N, RMS: 660 VAC
Input impedance >2 MΩ

Current measurement
Number 4 (generator: 3x, Generator star/neutral-point: X 1)
Accuracy* ±0.1 %
Current transformer rated current 5A
Current measuring range 0 – 10 AAC
Continuous overload 10 AAC
Short-term overload 100 AAC
(5x1 s, interval 300 s)

Frequency measurement
Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Reference range 50 Hz: 35 to 65 Hz
60 Hz: 45 to 75 Hz
Accuracy* ±0.01 Hz
Measurement interval Between two zero crossings
50 Hz: 10 ms
60 Hz: 8.33 ms
Frequency change measurement Yes
Maximum frequency change ±1 Hz/s

Power measurement – active, reactive and apparent power

Measured values P, Q, S per phase and as total
Accuracy* ±0.2 %
Calculation method DIN 40110-2, IEC61400-21
Measurement interval Calculation over one period
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms

* Accuracy values as a percentage of the nominal value at 25 °C

78
 Grid measurement module

GSP274 - Grid measurement

Energy
Accuracy* ±0.2 %
Resolution 1 Ws
Active energy Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Reactive energy Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Type of memory Nonvolatile (on the module)
Measurement interval Calculation over one period
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Power quality
Voltage Total harmonic distortion (THD) per phase
Current Total demand distortion (TDD) per phase
Voltage harmonics Amplitudes of harmonics up to 50th harmonic per phase
Current harmonics Amplitudes of harmonics up to 50th harmonic per phase
Calculation method EN 61000-4-7
Measurement interval 50 Hz: Calculation over 10 periods
60 Hz: Calculation over 12 periods
Digital inputs – Switch position indication
Number 4
Signal rated voltages 24 V DC (type 1 acc. to DIN EN 61131-2)
Input voltage range (H) 15 to 34 V DC
Input voltage range (L) -34 to 5 V DC
Internal resistance 6.8 kOhm
Input delay (typically) 1 ms
Status display (LED) Green

Digital outputs – Synchronization and alarming

Number 4
Signal rated voltages 24 V DC (type 1 acc. to DIN EN 61131-2)
Output voltage range (H) 18 to 34 V DC
Output current max. 0.5 A
Status display (LED) Green

Digital relay outputs – Grid and system protection

Number/type 2 changeover contacts
Signal rated voltages 230 V AC, 48 V DC, 24 V DC (not mixed)
Output current max. Nominal 0.5 A at +24 VDC, DC-13
Nominal 0.5 A at +24 VDC, resistive load
Nominal 1A at 230 VAC, AC-15
Nominal 2A at 230 VAC, resistive load
Output current overload 4A
Status display (LED) Green

79
 Grid measurement module

GSP274 limit value monitoring

Figure 1: Available protection elements acc. to ANSI IEEE Std C37.2 – 2008 – overview

GSP274 - Limit value monitoring

Undervoltage/overvoltage (ANSI 27/59)
Accuracy* ±0.1 % full scale
Resolution 0.1 % URated
Delay 0 to 65535 ms
Evaluated potentials Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral
Protection elements U< Undervoltage warning
U<< Undervoltage error
U> Overvoltage warning
U>> Overvoltage error
Underfrequency/overfrequency (ANSI 81 U/O)
Accuracy* ±0.01 Hz
Delay 0 to 65535 ms
Protection elements f< Underfrequency inner band
f<< Underfrequency middle band
f<<< Underfrequency outer band
f> Overfrequency inner band
f>> Overfrequency middle band
f>>> Overfrequency outer band

80
 Grid measurement module

GSP274 - Limit value monitoring

Q(U)
Description Voltage dependent directional reactive power protection. Used to
support the voltage during grid faults. Trips if all three evaluated
voltages are below a certain limit (e.g. 0.85 URated) and inductive
reactive power is drawn from the power supply grid.
Rate of change of frequency – ROCOF (ANSI 81 R)
Description To calculate the frequency change over time the last 10 (50 Hz) or 12
(60 Hz) frequency samples are linearly interpolated.
Vector jump (ANSI 78)
Description Monitoring of sudden phase shifts for detection of sudden load
changes or islanding.
Overcurrent (ANSI 50TD)
Accuracy* ±0.1 % full scale
Resolution 0.1 % of IRated
Delay 0 to 65535 ms
Protection elements I> Overcurrent warning
I>> Overcurrent error
Time-dependent undervoltage monitoring – FRT (Fault Ride Through)
Description Time-dependent undervoltage monitoring is triggered if one of the
three evaluated voltages falls below a curve U(t) configured via inter-
polation points. Up to 10 time/voltage pairs are available to calculate
a grid-code dependent limit curve.
Voltage asymmetry (ANSI 47)
Description EN 50160: Asymmetry is defined as the ratio of negative sequence
components to positive sequence components. The reference value is
the current basic oscillation component.
Current asymmetry (ANSI 46)
Description EN 50160: Asymmetry is defined as the ratio of negative sequence
components to positive sequence components. The reference value is
the current basic oscillation component.
Power quality monitoring – PQM
Description Monitors voltage and current harmonics up to the 50th harmonic.
Trips if one of the pre-defined limits is exceeded (evaluation per
phase).
Protection elements THD Total harmonic distortion
TDD Total demand distortion
H2 to H50 Individual amplitudes of voltage harmonics
H2 to H50 Individual amplitudes of current harmonics

81
 Grid measurement module

GSP274 - Limit value monitoring

Alarm relays (ANSI 74)
Description Two relays for actuating the circuit-breakers are provided for single
fault tolerant grid and system protection acc. to VDE-AR-4105. See
Digital relay outputs
Synchronization test relays (ANSI 25)
Description Digital outputs control up to two circuit-breakers (2 DO per circuit-
breaker). They are activated by the GSP module if the synchronization
criteria are fulfilled. Pulse or continuous signal can be configured for
the actuation. See Digital outputs
Trip circuit monitoring – TCM
Description Digital inputs are provided to monitor the actual switching state of the
circuit-breakers. See Digital inputs
Time synchronization
Basic principle GSP module is synchronized automatically with the real-time clock of
the PLC-CPU. This can be synchronized via the network.
Physical medium Ethernet (CPU)
Protocols IEEE 1588 PTP (Precision Time Protocol)
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
Event logging with real-time stamp – SER (sequence of events recorder)
Description Monitoring events (configured alarm/protection functions) are stored
with a precise time reference when they occur.
Type of memory nonvolatile (on the module)
Size 1000 entries

Real-time data recorder / digital fault recorder – DFR

Description The GSP module is provided with 3 integrated real-time data record-
ers. One data recorder can be used for recording the synchronization
sequence between the generator and busbar and one for busbar and
grid. Another data recorder can carry out recordings when triggered
by a monitoring function.
Number of channels 16 channels (measured values, digital I/O, calculated values)
Memory depth per channel 40,960 sampling values (4 s at 100 µs sampling rate)
Sampling rate 100 µs, 200 µs, 400 µs, 800 µs, 1.6 ms
Pre-trigger Yes

82
 Grid measurement module

GSP274 - Module properties

Electrical safety
Product standard IEC/EN61131-2
Generic standard IEC/EN60664-1
Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category 3
Test surge voltage 4 kV
Protection class 2

Approvals / certificates
General CE, UL/cUL, CCC
Medium voltage directive BDEW:2008, FGW TR3:2011 (Rev. 22), FGW TR8:2011 (Rev. 5)
Low-voltage directive VDE AR-N-4105:2011
Marine GL, DNV, LR, ABS, BV
Others In preparation: G59/2:2010, IEEE 37.90:2006

Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 to +60 °C
Rel. air humidity, operation 5 to 95 % no condensation
Storage temperature -40 to +85 °C
Rel. air humidity, storage 5 to 95 % no condensation
Maximum operating height 2,000 m above sea level (operation up to 4,500 m on request)

Power supply
Via backplane +5 V | ≤ 316 mA, +15 V| ≤ 21 mA, -15 V | ≤ 23 mA
External on the module 24 V | 110 mA

System requirements
Hardware All M1 CPU families apart from ME203, SK1 backplane not required
Software M-Base 3.90 / SolutionCenter 1.90 or higher

Models
GSP274 Grid measurement, protection and synchronization module; 7x In
480V, 4x In 5A; 4x In 5A; 4x In 24V; 4x Out 24V; 2x Out Relay
24/48V DC, 230V AC; U-, I-, P-, Q-, f-measurement; 4Q-energy
­ etering, integrated monitoring/protection functions, harmonic
m
analysis, integrated realtime data recorder (16 channels); sequence
of event log with realtime stamp

83
 Grid measurement module

Grid measurement and protection

module GMP232

The GMP232 module enables the safe, reliable and

fast measuring of all relevant values for three-
phase electrical networks. It also provides a number
of monitoring functions for generator and grid
protection. Up to two circuit-breakers/trip circuits are
triggered by the module directly via relay outputs.
The continuous monitoring of grid harmonics up to the
50th harmonic can be used for direct responses
as well as for evaluating the power quality.

The module is provided with an integrated real-time

data recorder for the high-precision recording of up
to 16 measuring channels during alarm/protection
events. Error events are recorded continuously and
stored permanently with a high resolution time
entry. The internal time base of the module can
Item Item No. be synchronized to an external time source (e.g.
GMP232 00017829-00 IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol), which supports
GMP232 00019063-00 the analysis of the data from spatially separated
measurement and protection devices.

The GMP232 is fully integrated in the Bachmann

SolutionCenter. Configurations can be created simply
and stored for later reuse. Both the measured channel
values and also the derived values are made available
directly in the user interface. Commissioning and
fault analysis are simplified with tabular, phasor and
time sequence displays. Event logs and recorded
time sequences can be exported in CSV respectively
COMTRADE format. The integrated simulation
function simplifies the configuration of protection and
monitoring functions.

• Measurement of current, voltage, frequency, power,

power factor, phase angle
• Direct connection to input voltages up to 690 VL-L, RMS
• Measurement of grid harmonics up to the 50th
(power quality)
• Monitoring/Protection functions for grid and
generator ­protection
• Direct relay outputs for circuit-breaker/trip circuits
• Integrated real-time data recorder
• Integrated event logging
• 4Q energy counter
• Measured value simulation

84
 Grid measurement module

GMP232 – Grid measurement

Current/voltage measurement
Measuring method True RMS (incl. harmonics)
Sampling rate 50 µs (20 kHz)
Measurement interval (RMS values) 50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Individual sampling values Intervals that can be called via function calls in the user application:
100 µs, 200 µs, 400 µs, 800 µs, 1.6 ms (via block access)
Voltage measurement
Number 3
Maximum rated voltage UL-L, RMS: 690 VAC UL-N, RMS: 400 VAC
Voltage measuring range UL-L, RMS: 17.3 – 1195 VAC, UL-N, RMS: 10 - 690 VAC
Accuracy* ±0.1 %
Continuous overload UL-L, RMS: 1437 VAC, UL-N, RMS: 830 VAC
Short-term overload(10x1 s, interval 10 s) UL-L, RMS: 2390 VAC, UL-N, RMS: 1380 VAC
Input impedance >2 MΩ

Current measurement
Number 3
Accuracy* ±0.1 %
Current transformer rated current 5A
Current measuring range 0 – 10 AAC
Continuous overload 10 AAC
Short-term overload (5x1 s, interval 300 s) 100 AAC

Frequency measurement
Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Reference range 50 Hz: 35 to 65 Hz
60 Hz: 45 to 75 Hz
Accuracy* ±0.01 Hz
Measurement interval Between two zero crossings
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Frequency change measurement Yes
Maximum frequency change ±1 Hz/s

Power measurement – active, reactive and apparent power

Measured values P, Q, S per phase and as total
Accuracy* ±0.2 %
Calculation method DIN 40110-2, IEC61400-21
Measurement interval Calculation over one period
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms

* Accuracy values as a percentage of the nominal value at 25 °C

85
 Grid measurement module

GMP232 – Grid measurement

Energy
Accuracy* ±0.2 %
Resolution 1 Ws
Active energy Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Reactive energy Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Type of memory Nonvolatile (on the module)
Measurement interval Calculation over one period
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Power quality
Voltage Total harmonic distortion (THD) per phase
Current Total demand distortion (TDD) per phase
Voltage harmonics Amplitudes of harmonics up to 50th harmonic per phase
Current harmonics Amplitudes of harmonics up to 50th harmonic per phase
Calculation method EN 61000-4-7
Measurement interval 50 Hz: Calculation over 10 periods
60 Hz: Calculation over 12 periods
Digital relay outputs
Number/type 2 changeover contacts
Signal rated voltages 230 V AC, 48 V DC, 24 V DC (not mixed)
Output current max. Nominal 0.5 A at +24 VDC, DC-13
Nominal 0.5 A at +24 VDC, resistive load
Nominal 1A at 230 VAC, AC-15
Nominal 2A at 230 VAC, resistive load
Output current overload 4A
Status display (LED) Green

86
 Grid measurement module

GMP232 – Limit value monitoring

Undervoltage/overvoltage (ANSI 27/59)
Accuracy* ±0.1 % full scale
Resolution 0.1 % URated
Delay 0 to 65535 ms
Evaluated potentials Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral
Protection elements U< Undervoltage warning
U<< Undervoltage error
U> Overvoltage warning
U>> Overvoltage error
Underfrequency/overfrequency (ANSI 81 U/O)
Accuracy* ±0.01 Hz
Delay 0 to 65535 ms
Protection elements f< Underfrequency inner band
f<< Underfrequency middle band
f<<< Underfrequency outer band
f> Overfrequency inner band
f>> Overfrequency middle band
f>>> Overfrequency outer band
Q(U)
Description Voltage dependent directional reactive power protection. Used to
support the voltage during grid faults. Trips if all three evaluated
voltages are below a certain limit (e.g. 0.85 URated) and inductive
reactive power is drawn from the power supply grid.
Rate of change of frequency – ROCOF (ANSI 81 R)
Description To calculate the frequency change over time the last 10 (50 Hz) or 12
(60 Hz) frequency samples are linearly interpolated.
Vector jump (ANSI 78)
Description Monitoring of sudden phase shifts for detection of sudden load
changes or islanding.
Overcurrent (ANSI 50TD)
Accuracy* ±0.1 % full scale
Resolution 0.1 % of IRated
Delay 0 to 65535 ms
Protection elements I> Overcurrent warning
I>> Overcurrent error
Time-dependent undervoltage monitoring – FRT (Fault Ride Through)
Description Time-dependent undervoltage monitoring is triggered if one of the
three evaluated voltages falls below a curve U(t) configured via inter-
polation points. Up to 10 time/voltage pairs are available to calculate
a grid-code dependent limit curve.
Voltage asymmetry (ANSI 47)
Description EN 50160: Asymmetry is defined as the ratio of negative sequence
components to positive sequence components. The reference value is
the current basic oscillation component.

87
 Grid measurement module

GMP232 – Limit value monitoring

Current asymmetry (ANSI 46)
Description EN 50160: Asymmetry is defined as the ratio of negative sequence
components to positive sequence components. The reference value is
the current basic oscillation component.
Power quality monitoring – PQM
Description Monitors voltage and current harmonics up to the 50th harmonic.
Trips if one of the pre-defined limits is exceeded (evaluation per
phase).
Protection elements THD Total harmonic distortion
TDD Total demand distortion
H2 to H50 Individual amplitudes of voltage harmonics
H2 to H50 Individual amplitudes of current harmonics
Time synchronization
Basic principle The GMP module is synchronized automatically with the real-time
clock of the PLC-CPU. This can be synchronized via the network.
Physical medium Ethernet (CPU)
Protocols IEEE 1588 PTP (Precision Time Protocol)
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
Event logging with real-time stamp – SER (sequence of events recorder)
Description Monitoring events (configured alarm/protection functions) are stored
with a precise time reference when they occur.
Type of memory Nonvolatile (on the module)
Size 1000 entries

Real-time data recorder / digital fault recorder – DFR

Description A high resolution time sequence recording can be started automati-
cally when a monitoring function is triggered.
Number of channels 16 channels (measured values, digital I/O, calculated values)
Memory depth per channel 40,960 sampling values (4 s at 100 µs sampling rate)
Sampling rate 100 µs, 200 µs, 400 µs, 800 µs, 1.6 ms
Pre-trigger Yes

88
 Grid measurement module

GMP232 – Module properties

Electrical safety
Product standard IEC/EN61131-2
Generic standard IEC/EN60664-1
Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category 3
Test surge voltage 6 kV
Protection class 2

Approvals / certificates
General CE, UL/cUL, CCC
Medium voltage directive BDEW:2008, FGW TR3:2011 (Rev. 22), FGW TR8:2011 (Rev. 5)
Marine GL, DNV, LR, ABS, BV
Others In preparation: G59/2:2010, IEEE 37.90:2006

Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )

Operating temperature -30 to +60 °C
Rel. air humidity, operation 5 to 95 % no condensation 5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 to +85 °C
Rel. air humidity, storage 5 to 95 % no condensation 5 to 95 % with condensation
Maximum operating height 2,000 m above sea level (operation up to 4,500 m on request)

Power supply
Via backplane +5 V | ≤ 260 mA, +15 V| ≤ 20 mA, -15 V | ≤ 16 mA
External on the module 24 V | ≤ 87 mA

System requirements
Hardware All M1 CPU families apart from ME203, SK1 backplane not required
Software M-Base 3.85 / SolutionCenter 1.85 or higher

Models
GMP232 Grid measurement and protection module; 3x In 690V, 3x In 5A;
2x Out Relay 24/48V DC, 230V AC; U-, I-, P-, Q-, f-measurement;
4Q-energy metering, integrated monitoring/protection functions,
harmonic analysis, integrated realtime data recorder (16 channels);
sequence of event log with realtime stamp
GMP232 CC Like GMP232; ColdClimate ( )

89
 Grid measurement module

Grid measurement module

GM260

The GM260 module enables the safe, reliable

and fast measuring of all relevant values for
three-phase electrical networks. Two separate
three-phase branches can be measured if there is a
common voltage measuring point. The grid variables
are calculated online in the module as TrueRMS
values including harmonics up to the 40th harmonic.
This is particularly useful for applications such as
for operational measurement on machines or the
energy monitoring in plants and buildings. As well
as functions for determining the active, apparent
and reactive power for each phase, two separate
4-quadrant energy counters are directly integrated
in the module.

The GM260 module is fully integrated in the

Item Item No. Bachmann SolutionCenter. Both the measured
GM260 00022162-00 channel values and also the derived values are made
available directly in the user interface.

• Measurement of current, voltage, frequency, power,

power factor, phase angle
• Direct connection to input voltages up to 480 VL-L, RMS
• TrueRMS calculation online
• 2 independent 4Q energy counters
• Compact design for 2 three-phase branches

Voltage
inputs

Current Current
inputs inputs

Application example: Power measurement with

­common voltage input

90
 Grid measurement module

GM260 – Grid measurement

Current/voltage measurement
Measuring method True RMS (incl. harmonics)
Measurement interval 50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Voltage measurement
Number 3
Maximum rated voltage UL-L, RMS: 480 VAC, UL-N, RMS: 277 VAC
Voltage measuring range UL-L, RMS: 69.3 - 625 VAC, UL-N, RMS: 36 - 361 VAC
Accuracy* ±0.3 %
Continuous overload UL-L, RMS: 675 VAC, UL-N, RMS: 390 VAC
Short-term overload(10x1 s, interval 10 s) UL-L, RMS: 1039 VAC, UL-N, RMS: 600 VAC
Input impedance >2 MΩ
Current measurement
Number 6
Accuracy* ±0.5 %
Current transformer rated current 1A
Current measuring range 0.01 - 1.2 AAC
Continuous overload 1.2 AAC
Short-term overload (5x1 s, interval 300 s) 3 AAC
Frequency measurement
Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Reference range 45 to 65 Hz
Accuracy* ±0.02 Hz
Measurement interval Between two zero crossings
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Power measurement – active, reactive and apparent power
Measured values P, Q, S per phase and as total
Accuracy* ±0.8 %
Calculation method DIN 40110-2
Measurement interval Calculation over one period
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms

* Accuracy values as a percentage of the nominal value at 25 °C

91
 Grid measurement module

GM260 – Grid measurement

Energy
Number of energy counters 2
Accuracy* ±0.8 %
Resolution 1 Wh
Active energy Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Reactive energy Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Measurement interval Calculation over one period
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Type of memory Nonvolatile (on the module)
Memory cycle 1 sec
Electrical safety
Product standard IEC/EN 61131-2
Generic standard IEC/EN 60664-1
Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category 3
Test surge voltage 4 kV
Protection class 2
Approvals / certificates
General CE, CCC (UL on request)
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 to +60 °C
Rel. air humidity, operation 5 to 95 % no condensation
Storage temperature -40 to +85 °C
Rel. air humidity, storage 5 to 95 % no condensation
Maximum operating height 2,000 m above sea level (operation up to 4,500 m on request)
Power supply
Via backplane +5 V | ≤ 130 mA, +15 V| ≤ 45 mA
System requirements
Hardware All M1 CPU families apart from ME203, SK1 backplane not required
Software M-Base 3.91 / SolutionCenter 1.91 or higher (recommended)
(if the release driver is installed manually, also executable from the
system software of the CPU ≥ M-Base 3.90)
Models
GM260 Grid measurement module; 3x In 480V, 6x In 1A; U-, I-, P-, Q-, f-
measurement; 4Q-energy metering

92
 System modules

Systematic perfection.

The M1 automation system is based on an Extremely space-saving standardized module

ingenious and field-tested modular con- sizes, robust and absolutely maintenance-free
cept. Precisely matched to the respective mechanical design as well as immunity to ex-
requirements, automation engineers can ternal influences particularly characterize the
assemble the technically and economically M1 system concept from Bachmann electron-
optimized configuration from a broad selec- ics.
tion of modules.

Power supply module Power supply module

NT255 NT250/48

Features Features
Power supply of modules via Power supply of modules via
backplane backplane
Supply voltage: Supply voltage:
18 .. 34 V DC 38 .. 58 V DC
Monitoring of supply voltage Monitoring of supply voltage
Power-fail signal for processor Power-fail signal for processor
module module
Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation
Output power: 45 W (55 W) Output power: 45 W
Buffer time: 18 ms Buffer time: 10 ms

Distribution modules Dummy module

VP200 / x LM201

Features Features
Distributor module for Placeholder for one module
backplanes slot as a reserve for future
2 potentials up to 24 V or 48 V extension
with 23 pins each No electronics
12 A per pin Used to protect the backplane

93
 Backplanes BS2xx

Features
1 .. 16 module slots
Seamless connection possible
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Snappable on backplane
Stabile mechanical design

Backplane BS2xx/ Backplanes BS2xx/S

Features Features
1 .. 16 module slots 1 .. 16 module slots
Seamless connection possible Seamless connection possible
Vibration proof fixing of modules Vibration proof fixing of modules
Snappable on backplane Snappable on backplane
Stabile mechanical design Stabile mechanical design
ColdClimate design (protected against For protection class 1
temporary condensation) Grounding tab for protective conductor
connection

Rail adapter S202 Bus bar Adapters BS200/ET

Features Features
2 module slots 2 .. 8 module slots
Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail Optimized thermal connection
Vibration proof fixing of modules Stabile mechanics / compact design
Vibration proof fixing of modules

94
 System modules

Power supply module NT255

With the NT255 Bachmann electronic sets new

standards for the power supplies of CPUs and
backplane-supplied modules. As a result of in-
tensive development work and in consideration
of field experiences with several thousand supply
modules, the NT255 combines long term know-
ledge with the latest technologies.

Best possible, selected components and lifetime

optimized design form the reliable base for the
module. Recent planar transformer technologies
ensure a significantly increased efficiency, the
integrated heat dissipation in the circuit board
(»coolPCB technology«) prevents even mini-
mal local warming and thus the early ageing of
components. Moreover, because of the extremely
reduced weight of the parts, the module is even
more robust against shock and vibrations.

In spite of the primary design focus on a long ser-

vice life and robust design, the NT255 also offers
outstanding technical features: up to 80 % longer
buffer time at short voltage drops and generous
power reserves (55 W peak power) for temporary
overload ensure safety and reliability in every
respect.

• I nput voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC

•P  rovides all the necessary CPU voltages as well
as supply for modules on backplanes
•4  5 W output power (55 W peak power)
•G  alvanic isolation input / ground
•G  alvanic isolation input / system
•E  lectronic reverse polarity protection
•2  state indicators allow differentiation between
supply failures and internal errors
•M  onitored supply voltage
•M  onitored output voltages
•P  ower-fail signal and state information for CPU
module (processable from application)

Item Item no.

NT255 00013251-00
NT255 00016158-00

95
 System modules

NT255
Input
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Input voltage, peak value +40 V at t < 1 s / min
Power consumption Max. 68 W
Reverse polarity protection Electronic
Starting current limitation Max. 8 A after 5 ms
Fuse SMD wire fuse 7 A at device defect
Input voltage monitoring Yes, for power fail message
Output
Output power 45 W (55 W)
Output voltage / output current +5 V/ 6 A (8 A peak)
+15 V / 0.5 A
-15 V / 0.5 A
Power-fail bypass 18 ms, power-fail message after 3 ms
Monitoring
State indication Power-fail on processor
State display LEDs (Power, Error, Ready)
Galvanic isolation 500 V (input / system), 100 V (input / ground)
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with condensation
condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without 5 .. 95 % with condensation
condensation
Execution variants
NT255 Power supply 45W (55W); 24V; 5V 6A; +-15V 0.5A
NT255 Like NT255; ColdClimate ( )

96
 System modules

Power supply module NT250/48

The power supply module NT250 / 48 is suitable

for operation on 48 V DC input voltage. It supplies
all M1 modules with all voltages required.

• P
 ower supply for M1 controller systems
• S
 tate indicating LED
• S
 upply voltage 38 .. 58 V DC
• M
 onitoring of supply voltage
• P
 ower fail signal for processor module
• G
 alvanic isolation input / bus
• G
 alvanic isolation input / ground

Item Item no.

NT250 / 48 00012754-00

NT250 / 48
Power supply unit
Voltage range 38 .. 58 V DC
Input voltage, peak value +60 V at t < 1 s / min
Inrush current Max. 7 A after < 0.5 s
Output voltage / output current +5 V / 6.0 A
+15 V / 0.5 A
-15 V / 0.5 A
Output power 42 W
Galvanic isolation 500 V (input / bus), 100 V (input / ground)
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Execution variants
NT250 / 48 Power supply 42W (55W); 48V; 5V 6A; +-15V 0.5A

97
 System modules

Distribution module VP200 / x

The distribution module VP200 / x is used as back-

plane to distribute the supply voltage to sensors,
switches etc.

• Distributor module for backplanes

• 2 potentials up to 24 V with 23 pins each
• 12 A per pin
• Can be snapped on backplanes as stand-alone
module or can be integrated on an M1 backplane

Item Item no.

VP200 00009496-00
VP200 / S 00009498-00

VP200 / x
Distribution modules
Quantity of potentials 2
Quantity of pins 23 per common potential
Current Max. 12 A per pin
voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Execution variants
VP200 Supply voltage distribution module
VP200 / S Supply voltage distribution module (potential rails) with mounting
plate

98
 System modules

Dummy module LM201

The dummy module LM201 is used as fill-in for

later extensions and does not contain any elec-
tronic components. Used to protect the backplane.

•P  laceholder for one module slot

• No electronics
• Used to protect the backplane

Item Item no.

LM201 00009494-00

LM201
Execution variants
LM201 Dummy module (cover)

99
 System modules

Rail adapter S202

The DIN rail adapter S202 serves as a mounting ele-

ment for individual modules on a top-hat rail per DIN
60715.

• 2 module slots
• Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
• Vibration proof fixing of modules

Item Item no.

S202 00021588-00

S202
Dimensions
Number of module slots 2
Width 110 mm
Depth 15 mm
Height 119 mm
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature Corresponding to the combined M200-module
Rel. humidity operation Corresponding to the combined M200-module
Storage temperature Corresponding to the combined M200-module
Rel. humidity storage Corresponding to the combined M200-module

Design variants
S202 Backplane with 2 module slot, without circuit board

100
 System modules

Backplanes BS200 series

The backplanes BS201 to BS216 interconnect the

M1 controller hardware modules, such as power
supplies, CPU modules and input / output modules,
mechanically and electrically.
They are the backbone of the controller.

• 1 .. 16 module slots
• Seamless connection / possible
• Stabile mechanics / compact design
• Vibration proof fixing of modules
• Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail

Item Item no.

S201 00009542-00
BS201 00010507-00
BS202 00009802-00
BS203 00009313-00
BS204 00009752-00
BS205 00009206-00
BS206 00009792-00
BS207 00009207-00
BS208 00009793-00
BS209 00009634-00
BS210 00009794-00
BS211 00009795-00
BS212 00009796-00
BS213 00009797-00
BS214 00009798-00
BS215 00009799-00
BS216 00009800-00

BS200 series
Dimensions
Number of module slots 1 .. 16
Width 55 mm x number of module slots
Depth 23 mm incl. connector
Height 119 mm
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C (vertical: -30 .. +55 °C)
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Execution variants
BS201 Backplane with 1 module slot
BS202 Backplane with 2 module slots
.. ..
BS216 Backplane with 16 module slots
S201 Backplane with 1 module slot, without circuit board
101
 System modules

Backplanes BS200 series

The backplanes for BS200/W for cold weather and

protection class 1 interconnect the M1 controller hard-
ware modules, such as power supplies, CPU modules
and I / O modules, mechanically and electrically. They
are the backbone of the controller.

• 1 .. 16 module slots
• Seamless connection / possible
• Stabile mechanics / compact design
• Vibration proof fixing of modules
• Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
• ColdClimate design (protected against temporary
condensation)

Item Item no.

BS203 00015947-00
BS204 00015948-00
BS205 00015949-00
BS206 00015950-00
BS207 00015951-00
BS208 00015952-00
BS209 00015953-00
BS210 00015954-00
BS211 00015955-00
BS212 00015956-00
BS213 00015957-00
BS214 00015958-00
BS215 00018623-00
BS216 00018624-00

BS200 series
Dimensions
Number of module slots 3 .. 16
Width 55 mm x number of module slots
Depth 23 mm incl. connector
Height 119 mm
Ambient conditions ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C (vertical: -30 .. +55 °C)
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Execution variants
BS203 Backplane with 3 module slots; ColdClimate ( )
BS204 Backplane with 4 module slots; ColdClimate ( )
.. ..
BS216 Backplane with 16 module slots; ColdClimate ( )

102
 System modules

Backplanes BS200/S series

The backplanes of the series BS200/S for protec-

tion class 1 interconnect the M1 controller hardware
modules, such as power supplies, CPU modules and
input / output modules, mechanically and electrically.
They are the backbone of the controller.

• 3 .. 16 module slots
• Seamless connection / possible
• Stabile mechanics / compact design
• Vibration proof fixing of modules
• Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
• For protection class 1
• Grounding tab (item no. 00016115-00) for
protective conductor connection, necessary for use
of voltages other than SELV

Item Item no.

BS203/S 00016785-00
BS204/S 00016786-00
BS205/S 00016787-00
BS206/S 00016788-00
BS207/S 00016789-00
BS208/S 00016790-00
BS209/S 00016791-00
BS210/S 00016792-00
BS211/S 00016793-00
BS212/S 00016794-00
BS213/S 00016795-00
BS214/S 00016796-00
BS215/S 00016797-00
BS216/S 00016798-00
Protective conductor
connection set 00016115-00

BS200/S
Dimensions
Number of module slots 3 .. 16
Width 55 mm x number of module slots
Depth 23 mm incl. connector
Height 119 mm without protective conductor connection
137 mm with protective conductor connection
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C (vertical: -30 .. +55 °C)
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Execution variants
BS203/S Backplane with 3 module slots, Protection Class 1
BS204/S Backplane with 4 module slots, Protection Class 1
.. ..
BS216/S Backplane with 16 module slots, Protection Class 1
103
 System modules

Bus bar Adapters BS200/ET

The busbar adapters of the BS200/ET family are used

to optimize thermal and robust Controller connection
to e.g. the cabinet back panel. Through this appli-
cation-specific coupling, the heat can be specifically
removed through the rear wall of the cabinet housing,
in which the cooling of the interior becomes much
easier. Frequently, a maintenance-intensive active
cooling of the components in the interior can there-
fore be avoided.
This adapter also allows for direct mounting without a
top-hat rail, if this is beneficial for structural ­reasons,
like in the case of a vertical mount or increased
­mechanical loads.
These accessories can be used for the bus bar-series
BS200.

• 2 .. 8 module slots
• Optimized thermal connection
Bus bar adapter with fitted M1 controller
• Stabile mechanics / compact design
• Vibration proof fixing of modules

Item Item no.

BS202/ET on request
BS203/ET on request
BS204/ET 00021791-00
BS205/ET 00021558-00
BS206/ET 00021792-00
BS207/ET 00021793-00
BS208/ET 00021794-00

BS200/ET
Dimensions
Number of module slots 2 .. 8
Width 55 mm x number of module slots
Depth 10 mm
Height 150 mm
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature Corresponding to the installed bus bar family
Rel. humidity operation Corresponding to the installed bus bar family
Storage temperature Corresponding to the installed bus bar family
Rel. humidity storage Corresponding to the installed bus bar family

Design variants
BS202/ET Backplane adapter with 2 module slots; for heat dissipation to the rear panel
BS203/ET Backplane adapter with 3 module slots; for heat dissipation to the rear panel
.. ..
BS208/ET Backplane adapter with 8 module slots; for heat dissipation to the rear panel

104
 Storage media

Robust in every detail.

To safely satisfy the high availability re- Due to the extended ambient conditions, the
quirements imposed on the entire automa- high number of supported write cycles and the
tion system, program memory and d ­ ata exchange of experience with suppliers these
memory should also be selected with the memory cards are strongly recommended for
utmost care. The PCC201, CF200, as well use both in the controller system as well as in
as the latest CFA200 families are special- the operating and monitoring devices, and in
ly selected industrial types that meet the industrial PCs.
special requirements imposed by the harsh
­everyday conditions.

PC cards PCC201/xx Compact Flash

Memory CF200/xx

Features Features
Memory capacity 32 / 64 MB Compact Flash type I
Access width 16 bits according to Compact Flash
Designed as 5 V card specification
Program voltage of 12 Vpp Memory capacity 512 MB,
Write protection via 4 GB, 8 GB
operating software Fast data transfer with ATA
Write protection via
operating software
Extended temperature range
Long service life / MTTF

CFast Memory CFA200/xx Bachmann System

Maintenance Stick

Features Features
CFast type I USB stick with backup and re-
Memory capacity 4/8 GB store program
Fast data transfer with SATA For operator terminals and
Write protection via industrial PCs with Linux and
operating software Windows
Extended temperature range Memory capacity 8 GB
Long service life / MTTF

105
 Storage media

PC cards PCC201/xx

The PCC201/xx PC cards serve as a storage

medium of the M1 controller. Depending on the
memory extension, the PC cards may contain
source codes and pieces of documentation in ad-
dition to the operating system, the drivers and the
application software.

The PCC201 cards can directly be written to and

formatted in all processor modules of the M1 con-
troller. With an A-PCC200 adapter it is possible to
use the PC cards in the PCMCIA slots of PCs and
notebooks.

The PCC201 series is produced entirely in-house

Item Item no. and therefore long-term supply is guaranteed.
PCC201/32 00012081-30
PCC201/64 00012081-40 • Memory capacity 32 / 64 MB
A-PCC200 00009540-00 • Access width 16 bits
• Designed as 5 V card
• Program voltage of 12 Vss
• Write protection via operating software

PCC201/xx
Basic data
Register No CMR (Component Management Register)
Powerdown mode Not possible
Information All information is stored in CIS
(Card Information Structure)
Operating voltages
Operating voltage 5 V (min. 3 V for FLASH memory)
Program voltage 12 V
Ambient conditions Standard
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Execution variants
PCC201/32 PC Card 32MB
PCC201/64 PC Card 64MB
A-PCC200 Adapter for PCC-Card

106
 Storage media

Compact Flash memory CF200/xx

Given the high availability demands placed

on automation systems, program and data
memory must be selected with particu-
lar care. The Compact Flash memory cards
CF200/xx are therefore especially selected
industrial types that can cope with the re-
quirements of harsh daily working routines.
Use of the CF200/xx both in CPUs of the M1
family and in CT and WT devices is strongly
recommended due to the extreme environ-
mental conditions, the large number of sup-
ported write cycles and the many years
of lasting experience with suppliers.

Item Item no. • Compact Flash type I

CF200/512 00012759-00 according to Compact Flash specification
CF200/4GB 00013556-00 • Memory capacity 512 MB, 2/4 GB
CF200/8GB 00014321-00 • Fast data transfer
• Write protection via operating software
• Extended temperature range
• Long service life / MTTF

CF200/xx
Technical data
Memory type Compact Flash type I
Memory capacity 512 MB, 4 GB, 8 GB
Data transfer rate Up to 8 MB/s
Operating voltage 3.3 V / 5 V (automatic adaptation)
Read / write cycles 2,000,000
MTBF at 25 °C > 4,000,000 h (depending on free memory)
Data retention 10 years

Data reliability < 1 unrecoverable errors in 1014 bits read accesses

Vibration 2G 10 Hz .. 2 kHz
Shock 2000 G half cycle 0.5 ms
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Execution variants
CF200/512 Compact Flash Card 512MB
CF200/4GB Compact Flash Card 4GB
CF200/8GB Compact Flash Card 8GB

107
 Storage media

CFast memory CFA200/xx

The full speed of the SATA interface is available

with the CFAST Flash memory card for power-
ful controllers. Up to 30x the transmission rates
of the CF cards can be reached. Given the high
availability demands placed on automation
systems, program and data memory must be
selected with particular care. The CFast mem-
ory cards CFA200 / xx are therefore especially
selected industrial types that can cope with the
requirements of harsh daily working routines.
Use of the CFA200/xx both in CPUs of the M1
family as well as in our visualization devices
is strongly recommended due to the extreme
environmental conditions, the large number of
supported write cycles and the many years of
lasting experience with suppliers. The robust-
ness was significantly increased in comparison
with a CF card via a stable edge connector.

• CFast type I
Item Item no.
• Memory capacity 4/8/16 GB
CFA200/4GB 00017355-00
• Fast data transfer
CFA200/8GB on request
• Write protection via software
CFA200/16GB 00019082-00
• Extended temperature range
• Long service life / MTTF

CFA200/xx
Technical data
Memory type CFast type I
Memory capacity 4 / 8/16 GB
Data transfer rate up to 100 MB / s
Operating voltage 3.3
Read / write cycles > 3,000,000
MTBF at 25 °C > 2,500,000 h (depending on free memory)
Data retention 10 years
Vibration 20 G 10 Hz .. 2 kHz
Shock 1500 G half cycle 0.5 ms
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Execution variants
CFA200/4GB CFast Card 4GB
CFA200/16GB CFast Card 16GB

108
 Storage media

Bachmann System Maintenance Stick

for Linux and Windows devices
The Bachmann System Maintenance Stick (BSM
Stick) is a combination of an 8 GB USB stick and
an easy-to-operate, graphic backup and restore
program for operator terminals and industrial PCs
with Linux and Windows. Using the BSM Stick
you can conveniently create complete backups of
the operating system on a USB stick, or restore a
complete backup from the stick.

The operating philosophy of the Bachmann System

Maintenance Utility is based on the easiest possible
operation via a standard PC keyboard, so that a
corrupt operating system of an operator terminal
or IPC can be quickly restored in the field, even
by unexperienced operating personnel (one-click
recovery). With the aid of the BSM Stick the
end customer can keep machine downtimes to a
minimum; this makes "repairs" of the visualization
hardware, due to an operating system defect,
unnecessary. Also the end customer can save the
high expenses associated with keeping a pool
of replacement devices on hand for these kinds
of service cases. Thus the BSM Stick directly
helps to reduce costs and optimizes availability
of the terminal or of the IPC, and thus it helps to
optimize availability of the system or machine, and
contributes to increased acceptance of a machine
on the part of the end customer.

The Bachmann System Maintenance Stick supports

all series OT200, and series OT1300 operator
terminals, as well as the series IPC1400 and
IPC300 IPCs.

System prerequisites
• Free USB port
• System BIOS that supports booting from the USB
port
• External standard PC keyboard

Scope of delivery
• 8 GB USB with pre-installed Bachmann System
Maintenance Utility

Item Item no.

BSM Stick on request

109
Storage media

110
111
Independent. Powerful. Open.

Networking – the backbone

of the automation solution

As an automation specialist in the area of distributed energy generation

plants, we know the significance of a powerful, scalable, and absolutely
reliable networking solution. Networking as the backbone of every
automation solution has the task of connecting different sub-components
according to their requirements in terms of signaling. In this regard
rigorous requirements are imposed on real-time capability, manipulation
security, as well as availability.

To meet these high requirements, Bachmann electronic provides an

extensive offering of different networking components. For example,
our offering enables a central control room connection adapted to the
particular customer requirements via Ethernet, or a machine-internal,
flexible connection of the individual machine components on the controller
via r­ eal-time capable fieldbuses. You decide which of the networking
possibilities established on the market best fits your automation task.
Bachmann electronic is guaranteed to have a suitable solution in its
product line.

112
 System networking – Interfaces

Numerous upgrade possibilities.

The M1-CPU already offers hardware 9-pin D-Sub connectors. In addition the
interfaces for Ethernet and serial EM203 module extends the system by
connections. If needed the number of additional network adapters with three
these interfaces can be increased by RJ45 ports. This means that the interface
placement of appropriate hardware extensions can also be used on Fastbus
modules on the backplane. The RS204 substations.
module offers additional serial ports with

Topology: Interface
SYSTEM NETWORKING INTERFACES

M1-CPU EM203 RS204

RS485 WIND
SENSOR

SERVICE INSTALLER
RS232, RS422

PITCH
CONTROL

Modbus RTU
CONVERTERS

CMS
SYSTEM

113
Industrie Ethernet master
EM203, EM213, EM213

Features
Additional Ethernet port (separate IP address)
Cable length to 100 m per line
RJ45 connections: 3
Status display via LED
Integrated switch
Transfer rate to M1 CPU:
max. 2.4 Mbit / s user data
Transfer rate as switch: max. 100 Mbit / s

Interface modules
RS204

Features
4 interfaces on one module
Several interface modules per controller possible
RS232 / RS422 / RS485 can be combined
High-speed interfaces up to 1.5 Mbit / s
Switchable terminating resistors

114
 Interfaces

Industrie Ethernet master EM2x3

The module EM2x3 extends the control

system with an additional Ethernet adapter
with 3 ports for 10/100 MBit. Thus Ethernet
ports for connection of a service laptop or
for other Ethernet-based networking are
also available on FASTBUS substations.

• Cable
 length to 100 m per line
• Status
 display via LED
• 3xRJ45 connections
• Integrated switch

Item Item no.

EM203 00012671-00
EM213 00017321-00
EM213 00017470-00

VISUALIZATION

CMS

FS EM

FO (FASTBUS)

M1-CPU FM

INTERNET

115
 Interfaces

EM2x3
Ethernet master
Number of transceivers 3x 10 / 100BaseT
Connectors 3x RJ45 / crossed and uncrossed cables can be used
(autocross detection)
Line length max. 100 m / line
Transfer rate to M1 CPU max. 2.4 Mbit / s user data
Transfer rate as switch max. 100 Mbit / s
Line impedance 100 Ω
Status display LEDs for power, collision + 4x LinkPuls, 3x speed (10 / 100 Mbit / s)
Ambient conditions Standard EM203 Standard EM213 ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C -30 .. +60 °C -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 %
with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % 5 .. 95 % 5 .. 95 %
without condensation with condensation with condensation
Model variants
EM203 Ethernet interface module; RJ45; 3 Ports; Eth100
EM213 Ethernet interface module; RJ45; 3 Ports; Eth100
EM213 like EM213; ColdClimate ( )

116
 Interfaces

Interface modules RS204/x

The interface module RS204 is used to

connect four asynchronous serial i­nterfaces
to the M1 controller.

• 4
 interfaces on one module
• Any
 number of interfaces possible per controller
• RS232/RS422/RS485
 and TTY can be combined
• High
 speed interfaces with up to 1.5 Mbaud
• Auto-flow
 control for automatic handshake
• Integrated
 terminating resistors
(connect/disconnect)
• Interfaces galvanically isolated from the system

Item Item no.

RS204 00009918-00
RS204 00016169-00
RS204/R 00009918-01
RS204/T 00009918-20

117
 Interfaces

RS204/x
Description RS232 RS422 RS485 TTY
Transfer rate* (max.) 115,2 Kbaud 921,6 Kbaud 921,6 Kbaud 9,6 Kbaud
Signal level RS232 RS422 RS485
Terminating resistance - Yes, adjustable via DIP switch -
Operating mode Full duplex Full duplex Half duplex TX active/RX active
TX active/RX passive
TX passive/RX active
TX passive/RX passive
External power supply
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption 125 mA bei 24 V DC
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
RS204 Serial interface, 4x RS232 / 422 / 485, 128 byte FIFO, isolated
RS204 like RS204, ColdClimate ( )
RS204/T Serial interface, 3x RS232 / 422 / 485, 1x TTY, 128 byte FIFO, insulated
RS204/R Serial interface, 3x RS232 / 422 / 485, 1x RS232, 128 byte FIFO, insolated

* The following transfer rates [bit / s] can be set via software: 110, 300, 1.2 k, 2.4 k,
4.8 k, 9.6 k, 19.2 k, 38.4 k, 57.6 k, 115.2 k, 230.4 k, 460.8 k, 921.6 k

118
 System networking – Ethernet

For the safest connections.

A secure, powerful and robust Ethernet available. This means that the states of
connection is gaining ever greater the optical components and of the fiber
significance. Whether as a simple switch optic cable can be constantly monitored
like the SWl205, or as a media converter in diagnostic tools, as well as in the
with switch functionality, like the FCS214, controller-side software. Thus deficient
Bachmann electronic offers Ethernet connection quality due to installation
networking components in recognized errors or due to aging of the components
and proven quality. In addition, with the can be detected and corrected in a timely
FCS additional diagnostic functions are manner – even before a failure occurs.

Topology: Ethernet

ETHERNET
VISUALIZATION

CMS

FCS FS

FO MULTIMODE CABLE

M1-CPU FCS FM

CONVERTERS

INTERNET

119
 Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet switch

SWI205

Features
Cable length to 100 m per line
RJ45 connections: 5
Status display via LED
Transfer rate: max. 100 Mbit / s
Line impedance: 100 Ω
QoS (IEEE 802.1Q,p)

Ethernet Remote Station

ERS202

Features
1 serial interface
2 Ethernet-interfaces 10 / 100 Mbit / s with status
displays
1 USB interface
RAM 256 MB DRAM
Data memory 512 kB NVRAM
Integrated power supply

Media converter unmanaged switch

FCS214

Features
Implementation copper – FO
Up to 1 Gbit/s throughput
Unmanaged – easy commissioning
Reliable hardware
Detailed, integrated diagnostic possibilities

120
 Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet switch SWI205

The module SWI205 is a powerful and industry

compliant Ethernet switch and is used to connect
M1 control systems, laptops and networks
with the Ethernet 10 / /100BaseT technology.

• Cable
 length to 100 m per line
• Status
 display via LED
• 5xRJ45 connections

Item Item no.

SWI205 / S 00012672-00

121
 Ethernet

SWI205
Ethernet switch
Number of transceivers 5x 10 / 100BaseT
Connectors 5x RJ45 / crossed and uncrossed cables can be used
(autocross detection)
Line length max. 100 m / line
Transfer rate max. 100 Mbit / s
Line impedance 100 Ω
Status display LEDs for power, collision + 5x LinkPuls, 5x speed (10 / 100 Mbit / s)
External power supply
Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption normally 100 mA at 24 V DC
Reverse polarity protection yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Model variants
SWI205/S Ethernet switch; RJ45; 5 Ports; Eth100; integrated power supply 24V;
DIN rail mounting

122
 Ethernet

Ethernet Remote Station ERS202

The module ERS202 serves as a remote slave mo-

dule for sub-stations (e.g. redundant networks).
It manages the local data and the exchange
of two Ethernet ports to the for example red-
undant master controllers. Easy configuration
and efficient data exchange allows for safe ope-
ration with the fastest possible switchover.
The robust design as a cold climate versi-
on provides protection even under hard en-
vironmental conditions. An integrated po-
wer supply simplifies the construction.
The module offers the following features:
• 1 Serial interface
• 2 Ethernet-interfaces 10 / 100 Mbit / s
with status displays
• 1 USB interface
• Status indicating LEDs for RUN, INIT and ERROR
• RAM 256 MB DRAM
• Data memory 512 Kb NVRAM
• Program memory of 16 MB and inter-
nal FLASH (4 MB for system software,
12 MB for redundancy configuration)
• Integrated power supply

Item Item no.

ERS202 00021244-00

123
 Ethernet

ERS202
Processor + memory
CPU x86
NVRAM (data memory) 512 kB
DRAM (working memory) 256 MB
FLASH (program memory)* 16 MB internal
Interfaces
Serial 1x RS232
Ethernet 2x 10 / 100 base-Tx
USB 1x USB 2.0
Power supply
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Nominal power 17 W
Current consumption at + 5 V 2000 mA
Current consumption at + 15 V 250 mA
Current consumption at - 15 V 200 mA
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronization pulse for Ethernet
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Ambient conditions ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C, fan-free
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95% with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95% with condensation

Model variants
ERS202 Ethernet Remote Station; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x USB2.0; inegrated
power supply 17W; ColdClimate ( )

* depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory is reserved for the system software

124
 Ethernet

Media convertor – unmanaged

switch FCS214 series

The FCS214/x combines media convertor and

gigabit switch in a single module. With a fiber
optic connection and four RJ45 ports, it is
optimally suited for data transmission over long
distances. Selected diagnostic capabilities for
the fiber optic link and the Ethernet data traffic
can be directly integrated into existing PLC
applications. The flexible connector concept allows
easy connection via a patch cable or an industrial
grade push-pull plug connection via an adapter.

• 4x RJ45, 1x FO-connection
• Up to 1 Gbit/s throughput
• Unmanaged – easy commissioning
• Reliable hardware
• Connection via Harting PushPull® connector or
LC patch cable
• Integrated FO and Ethernet diagnostis

Item Item no.

FCS214/F 00017192-10
FCS214/G 00017192-00
FCS214/F 00019104-10
FCS214/G 00019104-00

Screwable adapter for using PushPull connector

Item Item no.
Adapter 00016682-00

125
 Ethernet

FCS214 FCS214/F FCS214/G

Ports
RJ45 4x 10/100/1000 MBit/s 4x 10/100/1000 MBit/s
Fiber optic cable 1x 100 MBit/s 1x 1000 MBit/s
FOC transmission medium Multimode Fibre (50/125 μm
and 62,5/125 μm) max. 2000 m
FOC connector type LC
FOC guide wavelength 1310 nm
Diagnostic possibilities
Fiber optic cable – received light output HW: three-color status LED
SW: 0 – 100 %
Ethernet – throughput number of data packets
Ethernet – quality of communication good/bad frames, bad size, CRC error,…
Ethernet – mirror port configurable

Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )

Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % 5 .. 95 % with condensation
without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Model variants
FCS214/F Ethernet fibre optic converter and switch; 100Mbit/s; 5
ports; 1x LC Connector; 4x RJ45; pluggable on back-
planes
FCS214/G Ethernet fibre optic converter and switch;
100/1000Mbit/s; 5 ports; 1x LC Connector; 4x RJ45;
pluggable on backplanes
FCS214/F like FCS214/F; ColdClimate ( )
FCS214/G like FCS214/G; ColdClimate ( )

Accessories*
Item Order designation Manufacturer Description
LC connector SXLC-DK0-56-0010 LEONI LC connector duplex
uniboot multimode type 2
for multimode fibers with 125 μm cladding
Harting connectors 09 57 402 0500 020 HARTING HARTING PushPull LC duplex plastic Multi
Mode SFP
Harting connectors 09 57 409 0500 020 HARTING HARTING PushPull LC duplex metal Multi
Mode SFP

*Information without guarantee, order directly from the manufacturer

126
 System networking – Bus expansion

Standardized performance.

With the bus expansion modules from the controller in multiple stations permits
Bachmann electronic for the CPU station, both spatial adaptation to the control
additional backplanes with I/O modules cabinet, as well as wide-area distribution
can be added. A configuration is not of I/O modules for extended machines and
required to do this; at system start all plants. There is no restriction for the user
stations and modules will be automatically in terms of performance and convenience.
detected and initialized. All I/O modules The interconnected backplanes behave as
can be reached transparently; the physical if they were connected on a single, large
structure of the control system does not backplane.
need to be considered. Organization of

Topology: bus expansion

M1 BEM

<3m

BES

BES

127
105
Bus extension modules
BEx200 series

Features
Bus expansion master module:
1 interface
Bus expansion slave module:
2 interfaces (cascadable)
Up to 6 or 15 substations
Minimal signal delay
Distances of up to 3 m between stations
Integrated watchdog on slave modules

128
 Bus expansion

Bus expansion modules

BEx200 series

With the bus extension modules BEM21x and

BES21x a »high speed« connection up to 3 m
away is possible with less than 1.5 µs access time
to distributed I / O units. Up to six distributed
substations can be directly interconnected in
a daisy chain topology. Each substation can in
turn handle up to 15 M1 standard modules.
The wiring using RJ45 connectors is
one advantage of this new technology.
Thus wiring is significantly facilitated.
A special protocol is not required to use the I / Os
with the bus expansion. The user can access
these modules directly: As if they were local.
The bus expansion module BES21x / N with
integrated 24 V power supply provides power
for the substation. If more than six substations
are required, BES222 / x can be used, which
enables a special signal conditioning for up to
15 substations.

• Bus
 expansion master module with 1 interface
• Bus
 expansion slave module with 2 interfaces
• Bus
 expansion slave module optionally
with integrated power supply
• Up
 to 6 or 15 local substations
• Minimal
 signal delay
• Distances
 of up to 3 m between 2 stations
• Integrated
 watchdog on slave modules

Item Item no.

BEM211 00012846-00
BES212 00012847-00
BES212 / N 00012848-00
BES222 00013502-00
BES222 / N 00013503-00

129
 Bus expansion

BEx200 series
Bus expansion interface
Line length 3m
Transmission medium CAT7 special cable
Max. number of stations 6 (BES212 / x) or
15 (BES222 / x)
Integrated power supply (optional)
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption max. 1.2 A at 24 V
Nominal power 17 W
Output current at +5 V 2A
Output current at +15 V 250 mA
Output current at -15 V 200 mA
Reverse polarity protection yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Model variants
BEM211 Bus extension master module with 1 interface
BES212 Bus extension slave module with 2 interfaces (up to 6 stations)
BES212 / N Bus extension slave module with 2 interfaces and integrated power
supply 17W (up to 6 stations)
BES222 Bus extension slave module with 2 interfaces (up to 15 stations)
BES222 / N Bus extension slave module with 2 interfaces; integrated power supply
17W (up to 15 stations)"

130
 System networking – FASTBUS

Extensive networking possibilities.

With the aid of FO-based FASTBUS the substations. Between the individual
solutions numerous distributed tasks can stations distances of up to 2000 m can be
be executed easily and reliably. FASTBUS bridged with no problems, in this regard
permits a mixed topology of star and the galvanic separation is ensured by the
linear networking. In order to design fiber optic connection. Use of the FASTBUS
distributed stations even more compact, does not require a configuration, or other
FASTBUS slaves with integrated power special handling in the software, but
supplies are available. These stations are rather functions in accordance with the
capable of supplying the I/O modules on »plug and play« principle.

Topology:
FASTBUSFASTBUS

CONTROL CABINET MOTOR

SPEED SENSOR

T TEMPERATURE SENSORS T
MPC FM21x

FS212 FS211

131
FASTBUS modules Fx210 series

Features
Fast, fail-safe distribution via fibre optic cables
(up to 200 m)
Master modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
Slave modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
Up to 15 remote substations, cascadable
Group isolation: 500 V

FASTBUS modules Fx220 series

Features
Distances to 2000 m via multimode cable
Master modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
Slave modules with integrated power supply
Up to 15 remote substations, cascadable
Connection technology via robust Harting PushPull®
connector or LC patch cable

132
 FASTBUS

FASTBUS modules Fx210 series

The FASTBUS modules, FM211, FM212, FS211,

and FS212 are designed to enable distribution of
substations over long distances with a very low
signal delay. The power supply integrated in the
FASTBUS slave modules, FS211 / N and FS212 / N
can supply the I / O modules of a substation.

• FASTBUS master modules with

1 or 2 FO interfaces
• FASTBUS slave modules with
1 or 2 FO interfaces
• FASTBUS slave modules with
integrated power supply
• Up to 15 distributed substations
• Distances to 50 m for POF cable,
150 m for HCS cables or 200 m for special
HCS cables between 2 stations
• Minimal signal delay

Item Item no.

FM211 00010495-00
FM212 00010496-00
FS211 / N 00010498-00
FS212 / N 00010500-00

133
 FASTBUS

Fx210 series
FASTBUS interface
Line length 50 / 150 / 200 m between the stations,
Total length max: 1000 m
Transmission medium Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) max. 50 m
Hard Cladded Silica (HCS) max. 150 m
HCS sometimes also referred to as Plastic Silica Fiber (PCF),
Special HCS cable 200 m
Number of stations max. 16
Integrated power supply
Input voltage 24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Current consumption max. 1.2 A at 24 V
Nominal power 17 W
Output current at +5 V 2A
Output current at +15 V 250 mA
Output current at -15 V 200 mA
Galvanic isolation from the system 500 V
Reverse polarity protection yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Model variants
FM211 FASTBUS master module with 1 FO interface; HCS/PCF 150m or
PMMA 50m
FM212 FASTBUS master module with 2 FO interfaces; HCS/PCF 150m or
PMMA 50m
FS211 / N FASTBUS slave module with 1 FO interface; HCS/PCF 150m or
PMMA 50m; integrated power supply 17W
FS212 / N FASTBUS slave module with 2 FO interfaces; HCS/PCF 150m or
PMMA 50m; integrated power supply 17W

134
 FASTBUS

FASTBUS modules Fx220 series

The FASTBUS modules FM221, FM222, FS221

and FS222 are designed to enable distribution
of substations over long distances with a very
low signal delay. The power supply integrated
in the FASTBUS slave modules FS221/N and
FS222/N can supply the I/O modules of
a substation. The flexible connector concept
allows easy connection via a patch cable or
an industrial grade push-pull plug connection
via an adapter.

• FASTBUS master modules with

1 or 2 FO interfaces
• FASTBUS slave modules
with integrated power supply
• Up to 15 distributed substations
• Connection technology via robust Harting
PushPull® connector or LC patch cable
• Distances to 2000 m via multimode cable
• Minimal signal delay
• ColdClimate models ( )

Item Item no.

FM221 00016747-10
FM221 00018091-10
FM222 00016747-00
FS221/N 00016749-10
FS221/N 00018092-10
FS222/N 00016749-00

Screwable adapter for using PushPull connector

Item Item no.
Adapter 00016682-00

135
 FASTBUS

Fx220 series
FASTBUS interface
Line length 2000 m between the stations,
Total length max: 2300 m
Transmission medium Multimode fiber (50/125 μm and 62.5/125 µm) max. 2000 m
FOC connector type LC
FOC guide wavelength 1310 nm
Number of stations max. 16 (max. 10 per line)
Link budget > 8 dB (3 dB Reserve)
Diagnostic possibilities
Fiber optic cable – received light HW: three-color status LED
output SW: 0 – 100 %
Integrated power supply
Input voltage 24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Nominal power 17 W
Output current at +5 V 2A
Output current at +15 V 250 mA
Output current at -15 V 200 mA
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
FM221 FASTBUS master module with 1 FO-port; 50/62.5µm multi mode
fiber; up to 2000m; LC connector
FM221 like FM221; ColdClimate ( )
FM222 FASTBUS master with 2 FO-ports; 50/62.5µm multi mode fiber; up
to 2000m; LC connector
FS221/N FASTBUS slave 1 FO-port; 50/62.5µm multi mode fiber; up to
2000m; LC connector; integrated power supply 17W
FS221/N like FS221/N; ColdClimate ( )
FS222/N FASTBUS slave 2 FO-ports; 50/62.5µm multi mode fiber; up to
2000m; LC connector; integrated power supply 17W

Accessories*
Item Order designation Manufacturer Description
LC connector SXLC-DK0-56-0010 LEONI LC connector duplex uniboot multimode type2
for multimode fibers with 125 μm outer diameter
(Minibreakout-cable)
Harting connectors 09 57 402 0500 020 HARTING HARTING PushPull LC duplex plastic Multi Mode SFP
(Breakout-cable)
Harting connectors 09 57 409 0500 020 HARTING HARTING PushPull LC duplex metal Multi Mode SFP
(Breakout-cable)
Fiber optic cable** 8421801LG000 LEONI AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)Y 2G50/125 TB900L 2,2
(multimode) (Breakout-cable)
Fiber optic cable** 84950785G222 LEONI I-V(ZN)Y 2G50/125 TB900L 2,8 (Minibreakout-
(multimode) cable)

*Information without guarantee, order directly from the manufacturer

**When using the cables of other manufacturers observe any changes to the specifications such
as attenuation or minimum bending radius. Fibers with a core diameter of 50 μm or 62.5 μm
can be used. The outer diameter of the FO cable depends on the connector used. 136
 Fieldbuses – CANopen

Proven millions of times over.

The Controller Area Network (CAN) in the modules from Bachmann electronic
CANopen specification has now developed facilitate the homogeneous design of an
to become the leading fieldbus system for automation system with high efficiency
industrial automation. Proven millions of and packing density. Galvanic separation
times over and perfectly mature, it offers from the main station, the scalable range,
the ideal basis for safe, easy, and yet and the extremely low-cost wiring make
flexible networking tasks. By using only the modules particularly attractive for
one fieldbus, the compact CAN I / O the users.

Possible topology: CANopen

M1 CONTROLLER WITH CAN MASTER CAN SLAVE

MX2xx WITH INTEGRATED

CAN INTERFACE CAN SLAVE WITH CS200 HEAD

CAN SLAVE CAN SLAVE

137
CAN master CM202

Features
Up to 4 CM202 modules
per M1 controller
2 independent CAN buses per
CANopen master module
Can be used either as NMT
master or NMT slave
Transfer rate:
10 kbit / s to 1 Mbit / s

CAN slave CS200 / x

Features
Head module for CANopen slave
stations
Up to 30 I / O modules per slave
station
Optional integrated power supply
Transfer rate:
10 kbit / s to 1 Mbit / s

138
 CANopen

Analog/digital I/O module

DA3284-C

Features
Compact CAN slave I / O module
8 analog inputs:
±10 V, ±1 V, Pt100, Pt1000, 0 (4) .. 20 mA
4 analog outputs ±10 V,
either ±10 V, 0 (4) .. 20 mA configurable
16 digital inputs
16 digital inputs or outputs (can be configured
individually), 2 integrated counter inputs

Digital I/O modules

DIOxxx-C

Features
Stand-alone, compact CAN slave module
16 / 32 / 48 input channels, of which 16 / 32 / 32 free
can be configured as output (DIO)
Digital outputs each with 1 A continuous current
Supply voltage: 18 .. 34 V DC
3-wire connection technology

139
 CANopen

Digital I/O modules

TCO2xx-C

Features
Stand-alone, compact CAN slave module
8 / 16 temperature sensor inputs
for temperature sensor types J and K
Measuring range: 0 .. 500 / 800 °C
12 / 24 digital each with max. 1 A

CANopen configurator

Features
Graphic configurator
Easy integration of the DCF files
Multiple networks
(up to 8 CAN networks per CPU)
CANSync for synchronization of drives*
CAN monitor for commissioning
and diagnostics
IP-based access to CAN nodes
with »IP over CAN« in accordance with
CiA Draft 301  /  405

 ANSync synchronization also via

*C
the SYNC mechanism of the CPU

Note: There are processor modules

with integrated CAN interface
(see the processor modules section)

140
 CANopen

CANopen master module CM202

The CAN master module CM202 can operate either

one or two separated networks. Both connections
can be configured independently as NMT master or
slave. In an M1 controller up to four CANopen
master modules CM202 can be operated.

• Up to 4 CANopen master modules

per M1 controller
•2  independent CAN buses per
CANopen master module
• Can
 be used as NMT master or slave
• Transfer
 rate 10 Kbaud to 1 Mbaud
• Bus
 length to 5000 m (signal repeater required)
• Galvanic isolation
• Short
 circuit proof

Item Item no.

CM202 00009698-00
CM202 00016404-00

141
 CANopen

CM202
CANopen master
Max. number of masters 4 per M1 controller
Number of CAN buses 2 per module
Max. number of nodes 64 per CAN bus
Protocol CANopen to CiA DS 301
Device profile in accordance with CiA DS 405
Firmware reloadable (FLASH technology)
Current consumption 320 mA / 5 V DC
CAN interface
Transfer rate 10 k .. 1 Mbaud
Bus length max. 5000 m
Connection 2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Pin assignment in accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Signal level in accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Galvanic isolation, 500 V
interfaces to the system
CANopen features in compliance with CiA Product Guide
CANopen master yes
CANopen slave yes
Extended boot-up no
Minimum boot-up yes
COB ID distribution per SDO, no DBT
Node ID distribution yes (no LMT)
No. of TxPDOs 128
No. of RxPDOs 128
PDO modes sync, async, RTR, event
Variable PDO mapping yes
Emergency message yes client (master), server (slave)
Life guarding yes (heartbeat and / or node guarding)
No. of SDOs 4 server, 64 client
Device profile 301, 302, 405
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Model variants
CM202 CAN fieldbus master module; 2x CAN/CANopen; up to 1Mbit/s;
Master/Slave configurable; CANsync; isolated
CM202 like CM202; ColdClimate ( )

142
 CANopen

CANopen slave modules

CS200 / x

The CANopen slave module CS200 / x is the

head module for CANopen slave stations. The
CANopen slave module CS200 / x allows modular
CANopen slave stations to be set up from the
M1 modules. The same modules that are used
for local stations can be used to design a slave
station, which simplifies stock-keeping and
consistently ensures the same technical data.

• Head
 module for CANopen slave stations
• Up
 to 30 I / O modules per slave station
• Optional
 integrated power supply
• Transfer
 rate 10 Kbaud to 1 Mbaud
• 
Bus length to 5000 m ­(signal repeater required)
• Two internally connected CAN interfaces for
loop-through of the cable
• Galvanic isolation between CAN
interfaces and control electronics
• 
Node address can be set via rotary switch
• 2 serial interfaces (COM 1/2)
• External 24 V power supply (CS200/N)

Item Item no.

CS200 00013178-00
CS200 / N 00013179-00

CS200 / x
CANopen slave
Node ID 1 .. 254 selectable via rotary switch
Protocol CANopen to CiA DS 301 V3.0
Device profile in accordance with CiA DS 401 for I / O, in accordance with CiA DS 402
for ACR
Firmware reloadable (FLASH technology)
Number of I / O modules 15 per station, 30 using bus extension modules BES / BEM or FASTBUS
Current consumption 600 mA / 5 V, 15 mA / + 15 V, 40 mA / - 15 V
Serial interfaces COM1: RS232, COM2: RS232 / 422 / 485

143
 CANopen

CS200 / x
CAN interface
Transfer rate 10 k .. 1 Mbaud
Bus length max. 5000 m
Connection 2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Pin assignment in accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Signal level in accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Terminating resistance 123 ohm, external
Galvanic isolation, 500 V
Interfaces to the system
CANopen features in compliance with CiA Product Guide
CANopen master N
CANopen slave Y
Extended boot-up N
Minimum boot-up Y
COB ID distribution per SDO, no DBT
Node ID distribution N, (no LMT)
No. of TxPDOs / RxPDOs 128 / 128
PDO modes sync, async, RTR, event
Variable PDO mapping Y
Emergency message Y
Life guarding yes (heartbeat / node guarding)
No. of SDOs 4 servers
Device profile 301, 401, 402
Optional integrated power supply (optional) CS200 / N
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption max. 1.2 A at 24 V
Nominal power 17 W
Current consumption at + 5 V 2000 mA
Current consumption at + 15 V 250 mA
Current consumption at – 15 V 200 mA
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Model variants
CS200 CAN bus master 1 line 1 Mbit/s, processor system, isolated
CS200 / N CAN fieldbus slave module; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1Mbit/s; isolated; inte-
grated power supply 17W

144
 CANopen

Digital input/output modules

DIOxxx-C

The digital I / O modules DIO16-C, DIO32-C, DIO48-

C or DIO264-C are stand-alone CAN slave modules
with 16, 32, 48 or 64 digital input / output channels.

• Stand-alone,
 compact CAN slave module
• 16
 / 32 channels can be freely
configured as input or output
• Digital outputs each with 1 A continuous current
• Two internally connected CAN interfaces for
loop-through of the cable
• Galvanic isolation between CAN interfaces
and control electronics
• Baud rate and node ID can be set via rotary switch
• Supply
 voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
• Operating
 range 0 .. +60 °C without additional cooling
• Full
 wiring without additional backplanes
• Snappable
 on EN 50022 backplanes

Item Item no.

DIO16-C 00010285-00
DIO16-C 00017453-00
DIO32-C 00010129-00
DIO48-C 00010526-00
DIO264-C 00009205-00

145
 CANopen

DIO16-C
DIOxxx-C DIO32-C DIO48-C DIO264-C
DIO16-C
Inputs
Quantity max. 16 max. 32 max. 48 max. 64
Input delay < 3.5 ms < 3.5 ms < 3.5 ms < 3.5 ms
Internal resistance 6 kΩ 6 kΩ 6 kΩ 6 kΩ
Status display green LED green LED green LED green LED
Outputs
Quantity max. 16 max. 32 max. 32 max. 32
Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC 18 .. 34 V DC 18 .. 34 V DC 18 .. 34 V DC
Isolated output blocks 1-16 1-16, 17-32 1-16, 17-32 1-16, 17-32
Nominal output current 1A 1A 1A 1A
Output current (sum / block) max. 12 A max. 12 A max. 12 A max. 12 A
Switching frequency max. 500 Hz max. 500 Hz max. 500 Hz max. 500 Hz
Short-circuit proof yes yes yes yes
Status display green LED green LED green LED green LED

CAN interface
Transfer rate (Kbaud) 10 .. 1000 10 .. 1000 10 .. 1000 10 .. 1000
Connection 2x 9-pin D-Sub 2x 9-pin D-Sub 2x 9-pin D-Sub 2x 9-pin D-Sub
Module ID 1 .. 254 1 .. 254 1 .. 254 1 .. 254
Galvanic isolation 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V
Terminating resistance 123 Ω, external 123 Ω, external 123 Ω, external 123 Ω, external
External power supply
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption normally 100 mA at 24 V DC
(without I / O)
Reverse polarity protection yes
CAN protocols
CAL / CANopen DS 301 communication profile, DS 401 device profile
Status LEDs RUN (guarding), INIT, ERROR
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Model variants
DIO16-C CAN slave - digital input/output module; 16x DIO; 24V / 1A; 1 group;
CAN/CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated
DIO16-C like DIO16-C; ColdClimate ( )
DIO32-C CAN Slave - Digital IO module; 32x DIO, 24V / 1A; 2 groups; CAN/­
CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated
DIO48-C CAN Slave - Digital IO module; 16x DI; 32x DIO, 24V / 1A; 2 groups;
CAN/CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated
DIO264-C CAN Slave - Digital IO module; 32x DI; 32x DIO, 24V / 1A; 2 groups;
CAN/CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated

146
 CANopen

Analog and digital input/output

module DA3284-C

Noteworthy compactness and a clever mix of

possible signal types are offered by the CAN bus
compact module DA3284-C. As a stand-alone
fieldbus module (CANopen), the module offers
the complete I /O spectrum already integrated for
small applications or distributed signal connection
points. It is the ideal addition to the familiar
family of CAN digital modules and is an optimum
»all-in-one« peripheral for small applications,
e. g. such as those based on the control terminals
CT300 / CT200 from Bachmann electronic.
The channel-specific programmable mode (on / off
or applied standard signal) enables the unit to be
adapted ideally to a wide range of applications
without any interface converter. The robust design
and processing quality, its outstanding technical
specifications, seldom available from the usual
fieldbus peripherals, are very impressive.

• Compact
 CAN slave I /O module
•8 analog inputs ±10 V, ±1 V, Pt100,
Pt1000, 0 (4) .. 20 mA
•4 analog outputs ±10 V or
0 (4) .. 20 mA configurable
• 16
 digital inputs
• 16
 digital inputs or outputs
(individually configurable)
•2 integrated counter inputs
• Digital
 outputs each with 0.5 A
continuous current
• Error
 detection for digital and analog channels
• Full
 wiring without additional backplanes
• Powerful
 32-bit processor for fast cycle times

Item Item no.

DA3284-C 00013597-00
DA3284-C 00017450-00

147
 CANopen

DA3284-C
Analog inputs
Quantity 8
Measuring ranges, selectable by channel ±10 V, ±1V
Pt100, Pt1000: -100 °C .. +500 °C
0 (4) .. 20 mA
Resolution 14 bit
Sampling rate < 1 ms for all channels (500 µs)
Input cutoff frequency 750 Hz (3 dB)
Basic accuracy at 25 °C voltage 0.05 %
current / Pt100 / Pt1000 0.1 %
Error at the entire temperature voltage 0.2 %
range current/Pt100/Pt1000 0.2 %
Error detection cable break (at voltage), current or temperature error
Analog outputs
Quantity 4
Measuring ranges, selectable by channel ±10 V, 0 (4) .. 20 mA configurable
Resolution 14 bit
Conversion time depends on CAN protocol
Basic accuracy at 25 °C voltage 0.05 %
current 0.2 %
Error at the entire temperature range voltage 0.1 %
current 0.4 %
Error detection Load error
Digital inputs
Quantity 16 (max. 32)
Input delay 500 µs default value, filter adjustable
Input current normally 3 mA at +24 V DC
Input type current consumption, type 1 in accordance with IEC61131
Status display green LED
Connection technology 3-wire (+ / - / signal)
Counter
Counting channels 2 (digital input channels 1 and 2)
Counter frequency max. 5 kHz
Counter functions counting, speed measurement (period duration, gate time)
measurement)
Counting modes - infinite up / down
- one-time up / down to / from reference value
- periodic up / down to / from reference value
Digital outputs
Quantity 16
Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
Isolated output blocks 1 .. 12, 13 .. 24
Nominal output voltage 0.5 A
Output current sum / block max. 8 A / 4 A per block
Switching frequency 500 Hz (with purely resistive load)
Short-circuit proof yes

148
 CANopen

DA3284-C
Digital outputs
Error detection short circuit / excess temperature by block
power supply per block ≤ 16.5 V
Status display green LED
Connection technology 3-wire (+ / - / signal)

CAN interface
CANopen DS 301 communication profile, DS 401 device profile
Status LEDs RUN (guarding), INIT, ERROR
Transfer rate (Kbaud) 10 .. 1000 (adjustable via rotary switch)
Connection 2x 9-pin D-Sub
Module ID 1 .. 127 (configurable via rotary switch or SW)
Galvanic isolation 500
Terminating resistance 123 ohm, external
Input / output connection technology
Connection for digital inputs / outputs Phoenix Contact MINICOMBICON connector RM 5.8 with flange
and supply
Connection technology for digital screw clamp, spring tension clamp, crimp
inputs / outputs and supply
Connection for analog inputs / outputs Phoenix Contact MINI COMBICON RM 3.5 connector with flange
Connection technology for analog screw clamp, spring tension clamp
inputs / outputs
Connection general plug codable, labeling by channels
Operating conditions
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption ≤ 270 mA at +24 VDC for module supply + load
Reverse polarity protection yes
Galvanic isolation CAN bus module 500 VRMS
Galvanic isolation I / O channels none
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Model variants
DA3284-C CAN slave universal input/output module; 16x DI; 16x DIO;
24V/0.5A; 4x AO +-10V 20mA; 8x AI +-10V +-1V 20mA
Pt100/1000; CAN/CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s
DA3284-C like DA3284-C; ColdClimate ( )

149
 CANopen

Temperature I/ O modules
TCO2xx-C

The temperature I / O modules, TCO204-C,

TCO208-C and TCO216-C are stand-alone
CAN slave modules with 8 or 16 thermo-
couple inputs and 12 or 24 digital outputs.

• Stand-alone,
 compact CAN slave module
• Thermocouple
 inputs for thermocouple
types J and K
• Measuring
 range 0 ..
+500 °C / +800 °C configurable
• Sensor
 break detection
• Digital
 outputs each with 1 A
• Supply
 voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
• Operating
 range 0 .. +60 °C
• Snappable on
EN 50022 backplanes
• CAN node ID can be set (hex switch)
• Baud rate is adjustable (hex switch)

Item Item no.

TCO208-C 00010850-00
TCO216-C 00008673-00

TCO2xx-C
Temperature sensor inputs
Quantity 8 / 16
Sensor types J or K, selectable per input
Measuring range 0 .. +500 °C / +800 °C configurable
Resolution 12 bit
Linearization Polynomial in accordance with DIN IEC 584
Cold junction compensation 0 .. +133 °C (K)
Sampling period 16 ms
Sensor break detection yes
Digital outputs
Quantity 12 / 24
Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
Output current per channel 0.5 A (max. 1 A)
Output current (sum) max. 12 A
Switching frequency max. 500 Hz at 1 kOhm ohmic load
Short-circuit proof yes
Status display green LEDs

150
 CANopen

TCO2xx-C
CAN interface
Transfer rate 10 k .. 1 Mbaud
Connection 2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Module ID 1 .. 254
Galvanic isolation via interfaces 500 V
Terminating resistance 123 ohm, external
Status LEDs RUN (guarding), INIT, ERROR
Communication profile CiA DS 301
Device profile CiA DS 401
External power supply
Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption (without I / O) normally 105 / 110 / 120 mA at 24 V DC
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Model variants
TCO208-C CAN slave temperature input/digital output module; 8x thermocou-
ple type J, K; 12x digital Out 24V / 0,5A; CAN/CANopen; 2x DSUB
9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated
TCO216-C CAN slave temperature input/digital output module; 16x thermo-
couple type J, K; 24x digital Out 24V / 0,5A; CAN/CANopen; 2x
DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated

151
 CANopen

CANopen configurator

The Bachmann SolutionCenter supports the

commissioning and diagnostics of CAN and
CANopen networks with integrated tools. With
a few mouse clicks a network can be configured
from standard EDS files and transferred to the
controller. Thanks to the easy interface to the
application and to the commissioning tools a
signal test can be executed immediately.

• Managing EDS files in the device catalog

• Online and offline configuration of networks
• Bus scan of online networks for convenient
creation of a configuration
• Graphic network presentation
• Graphic presentation of the PDO mapping
• Tabular editor for network parameters
• Editors for specific device parameters
• Tabular editor for the object directory
enables adding, changing, and
deleting of network variables
• Fast workflow for the creation of
standard configurations

The CAN monitor in the SolutionCenter enables

more extensive diagnostics. It offers dialogs for:
• Direct SDO access
• NMT and LSS commands
• PDO triggering
• Access to emergency lists

152
 Fieldbuses – DeviceNet

Proven basis, new view.

DeviceNet is based on the same physical and DeviceNet slave, as well as simultaneous
layer as CAN, however it has an object- operation in two networks in combined
oriented view of the process data and uses master/slave mode.
monitored point-to-point connections.
The bus system is standardized through The cyclic data is available to the application
the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor program via the process image. Acyclic
Association). accesses and status commands are possible
via libraries for M-PLC and C/C++. The
The DeviceNet master module and its configuration is executed via the Bachmann
software equipment enable operation of SolutionCenter.
the M1 controller as DeviceNet master

DeviceNet master DNM201

The DNM201 fieldbus master module allows

the M1 controller to be used as bus master in
DeviceNet networks. The DNM201 module is used
to connect drives and input / output interfaces. The
system bus of an M1 supports up to 8 separate
networks, each with a maximum of 64 nodes that
can be operated with different cycle times. Thus
the bus architecture allows up to 512 DeviceNet
stations (nodes) to be controlled individually.

•1 DeviceNet module for up to 64 nodes

•8 separate networks with max. 512 nodes
(requires 8 DNM201 modules in one M1 system)
• Support
 of »Multi-Master« mode
• 5-pin
 connector (in acc. with open
DeviceNet standard)
• Isolation
 voltage from DNM201 to case 100 V
Item Item no. • Isolation
 voltage from DeviceNet bus to
DNM201 00012696-00 system voltages of the controller 500 V
• Baud rates 125 / 250 / 500 kbit / s
• Extensive
 status LEDs
• Modes:
 Master (multi-master capable),
slave, master / slave
• Module
 and network status LEDs (MS / NS)
• Error
 detection: Duplicate MAC-ID check,
device heartbeat, device shutdown message
• Automatic
 resumption of communication after failure

153
 DeviceNet

DNM201
Technical data
Maximum number of stations 64 nodes
Number of independent DeviceNet lines up to 8 DNM201 modules per M1 system (equals 512 nodes)
Bus connection 5-pin DeviceNet connector
Galvanic isolation via interfaces 500 V
Baud rates 125 / 250 / 500 kbit / s
DPRAM size 4 or 8 kByte
Protocol conformity ODVA specification release 2.0
Access libraries for C or IEC 61131
Modes master (multi-master ability – multiple masters on the same
CAN bus possible), slave, master / slave
Supported communication services I / O communication bit-strobe, polling, change of state, cyclic
to 448 byte connection size, support of »Group2Server« as
slaves, no multicast polling, explicit message, fragmentation
protocol, UCMM, message forwarding
LEDs
RDY yellow off: Controller cannot initialize the DNM module
yellow on: Controller has successfully initialized the module
MS RUN (MS=Module State) green on: DNM ready
green flashing: DNM is being configured
MS ERR (MS=Module State) red on: DNM not ready
NS RUN (NS=Net State) green on: DNM online and connected
green flashing: DNM online, but not connected / not complete-
ly configured
NS ERR (NS=Net State) red on: no network connection possible
green flashing: Connection in timeout
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Model variants
DNM201 Device Net master module; 1x device net interface; 500
kbit/s; isolated

154
 Fieldbuses – EtherCAT

The fast communication path.

The EtherCAT bus system is outstandingly The configurator for EtherCAT networks
suited for the activation of servo- is integrated in the SolutionCenter and
electric drives. As a pure software generates an operable configuration on the
solution, the EtherCAT master from controller based on the XML description files
Bachmann electronic uses the available of the various slave manufacturers.
Ethernet ports on the controller CPU.

Possible topology: EtherCAT

SOLUTIONCENTER

M1-CPU FM

155
 EtherCAT

EtherCAT master

The EtherCAT master is a pure software solution

and uses an Ethernet port on the controller CPU.
The motion software packages from Bachmann
electronic and any other application programs
can be synchronized precisely to the timing of
the EtherCAT bus to ensure the synchronization
of setpoint calculation and transmission. The
SolutionCenter supports commissioning and
diagnostics through a configurator and monitor.

The Drive Middleware as the connecting

link between motion software and EtherCAT
drive directly operates the functions and the
status model of the drive so that the user
no longer needs to program out the specific
sequences in the application software.

• Software solution for operation on

standard controller CPUs
• Addressing the slaves via
autoincrement or alias address
• Allocating
 and checking alias addresses

• Supports optional nodes
• Supports
 slaves with distributed clock
• Synchronization
 of application
programs and fieldbus is possible
• Cyclic data exchange via PDO mapping
• Display of process values as logical I/O
modules and in the PLC process image
• Acyclic data exchange for application via
SDO function interface is available
• Function interface for network and slave status
• Extensive diagnostics via system variables
• Quality is ensured through regular
participation in ETG Plug Fests

156
 EtherCAT

ECS200 EtherCAT Slave Module

The EtherCAT slave module ECS200 allows

connecting a M1 controller system as slave
device to an external EtherCAT network. The
goal is to use the M1 to control an autonomous
intelligent subsystem within a complex system
or machine. The application programs (PLC, C/
C++) have full access to the incoming and
outgoing cyclic process data via the MIO and
SVI interfaces and via the process image.
The slave state and the connection state can
be recognized by the user programs. Thus,
emergency situations like network problems or
failures of the external EtherCAT Master can be
handled individually in dedicated emergency
routines. The application programs at the slave
station can be accurately synchronized to the
external EtherCAT bus for closed-loop control
operations. The execution cycle of the user
programs can be maintained also in emergency
situations. Distributed Clocks are supported.
Amount and size of the incoming and outgoing
cyclic data are confi gured on the slave station,
and then a dedicated ESI fi le is generated
to confi gure the master system. The PDO
mapping can be defi ned statically or can be
created by the EC Master dynamically. As
EtherCAT slave, the M1 is a module device
with a static object dictionary that does not
need to be further confi gured by the master.
Diagnostic is supported by several LED indications
on the module, by log messages and by a
monitor in the Bachmann SolutionCenter.

• 2 EtherCAT Ports IN, OUT

• Max. 700 Bytes cyclic data for Rx und Tx each
• Bus interval 125 μs to 10 ms
• Distributed Clock
• User programs can be synchronised to EtherCAT
• Connection- and network state
visible for user programs
• Behavior in case of network
problems confi gurable
• LED for display of slave state
• Error-LEDs for In- and Out-Port
• Galvanic isolation from the system
• Condensation-proof ColdClimate
design on request

Item Item no.

ECS200 00018548-00
ECS200 00019206-00
157
 EtherCAT

ECS200
EtherCAT data
EtherCAT Device Type Module device
Object dictionary statical (depends on configuration of the slave station)
PDO Mapping statical or dynamical
Distributed Clock available
EtherCAT data types BOOL, BIT, USINT, SINT, UINT, INT, UDINT, DINT, REAL, ULINT, LINT, LREAL
Number of cyclic data max. 700 Byte respectively in Tx and Rx
Cycle time ≥ 125 µs, depend on CPU and data volume, max. 10 ms
Interface to user program
Access of cyclic data process image, UFB channel view, SVI view
Slave Status readable, settable through functional interface
Connection quality to network view as module and channel state of UFB, request by user software
Time-base synchronization adapted to synchronization by user software of EC network
Behaviour in the event of further completion of the user software by intervall possible
­network break
Mailbox data on request
Diagnostic
LED Run Run (permanent light for operational, blinking codes for other slave state)
LEDs Parity Error 1, 2 failure in the physical receive layer of in or out ports
LEDs EtherCAT Ports standard LED‘s for activity (green) and data rate (orange)
Monitor in SolutionCenter value view of state information
Logbook entries Information host via debug level selectable
Configuration
SolutionCenter setting of object directories via UFB channel configurator
System requirements
M-Base V3.80 or higher
Processor module recommended MX207 or higher
Electrical data
Number EtherCAT Ports 2 (In/out)
Supply internal via bus rail BS2xx
Current consumption internal 270 mA
Galvanic isolation from the 500 V
system
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
ECS200 EtherCAT slave module; 2x Eth100 (In/Out); operation only with CPU
module
ECS200 like ECS200; ColdClimate ( )

158
 EtherCAT

EtherCAT configurator

The Device Manager includes an integrated

EtherCAT configurator that creates a complete
network configuration (ENI – EtherCAT
Network Information) from the standardized
slave description files (ESI - EtherCAT Slave
Information) and transfers it to the controller.
For access to the process data, in addition,
logical I/O modules are generated on the
master that enable an immediate diagnosis
and signal test in the Device Manager.

The configuration project will be automatically

stored on the controller, so that even without
manual transmission of project files, opening,
testing, and changing the existing configuration
is possible in the service PC.

• Managing
 the slaves in the catalog
• Online and offline creation of
network configurations
• Busscan of the online controller also in the
case of configuration errors with display of
the discrepancies for quick error detection
• Direct transfer of pre-configured PDOs
• Browser for object directory of the
slave (if supported by the slave)
• Automatic generation of logical I/O modules
for access to cyclic process data
• Immediate wiring test without
user software is possible
• Monitor for SDO read and write
access for the running network
• Monitor for setting and checking
the alias address

159
EtherCAT

160
 Fieldbuses – PROFIBUS

Widely used, esteemed everywhere.

PROFIBUS is a field bus that is widely PROFIBUS components in the future.

used, particularly in the area of Bachmann electronic offers a fieldbus
mechanical engineering and plant interface module for the backplane that
engineering and even today – in spite can be used both as master,
of all Ethernet-based fieldbuses – it as well as slave. The SolutionCenter
continues to show increasing quantities. contains a complete configurator that
A broad palette of peripheral components enables interfaces to the engineering
and an active user organization will also tools of other manufacturers through
ensure long-term availability of the consistent application of standards.

PROFIBUS DP master DPM200

Features
Fast ASIC technology
Transfer rate:
9.6 kbit / s .. 12 Mbit / s
Up to 3 masters per M1 controller
Maximum 125 slave stations (with repeater)

Features
Multiple networks (multiple networks per CPU)
Convenient integration of the GSD files
PROFIBUS DP class 1 master
Support of all baud rates (9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud)
defined in the standard
Transparent access to IO and process variables

161
 PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS DP master module

DPM200

The interface module for Profibus DP (Distributed

Peripherals) can be operated as DP master, DP slave
or as combined master/slave, which in a multi-master
network offers variables for another master. The
process data is available to the application program
as logical I/O module and thus can be reached via
the process image or via the function interface.

•  p to 3 DPM200 modules per M1 controller

U
• Transfer rate 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud
• 8 kByte shared memory for process data image
• Consistency lock for data blocks
is configurable
• Two
 internal bridged connections for
loop-through of the cable
• Galvanic
 isolation between fieldbus
and controller

Item Item no.

DPM200 00010555-00
DPM200 00018032-00

162
 PROFIBUS

DPM200
PROFIBUS DP master
Large process image 8 Kb x 16 DPM
Firmware update via SolutionCenter is possible
Max. number of masters 3 per M1 controller
Max. number of slaves 32 without repeater, 125 with repeater
PROFIBUS Standard V0
Data length in the DPM 732 bytes per slave
Current consumption 400 mA / 5 V DC
Interface
Transfer rate 9.6 k .. 12 Mbaud
Connection 2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Pin assignment in accordance with EN 50170
Signal level in accordance with RS485 standard
Galvanic isolation, 500 V
Interfaces to the system
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C -30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Model variants
DPM200 Profibus master/slave module; 12Mbit/s; Profibus V0; isolated
DPM200 like DPM200; ColdClimate ( )

163
 PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS configurator

The Device Manager contains a complete

configuration tool for creation of PROFIBUS
configurations for master and slave applications
of the M1 system. Devices from any manufacturer
can be added to the catalog via their standardized
device description file in GSD format, and
integrated in the configuration.

The PROFIBUS configurator enables creation of

networks with an M1 controller as master station
and multiple slave stations. Likewise, M1 DP slave
stations can either be configured together with
an M1 master, or a pure slave configuration can
be created for an M1.
In this regard the slaves can be additional M1
controllers or also standard-conformant slave devices
from other manufacturers. For an M1 controller
a pure slave configuration can also be created.
For this station a GSD file can be exported that
facilitates integration in a different configuration tool.

On the master and slave station the configurator

automatically generates logical I/O modules for
access to the process data that permit an immediate
diagnosis and signal test via the Device Manager
and enable easy integration into the process image.
Bit-coded values can in this manner be conveniently
split into the individual DI or DO signals and given
symbolic channel names, without the necessity of
masking out the bits in the application program.

•G raphic network configuration

• Catalog
 for managing device descriptions
files in GSD format
• Generates
 complete network configurations for
applications with M1 as master
• Generates reduced configuration for applications
with M1 as slave, if a master from a different
manufacturer is used
• Exports
 GSD files for configured M1 slaves
for use in other tools
• Flexible
 creation of access channels that organize
the byte stream of the PROFIBUS in handy process
values

164
 Fieldbuses – PROFINET

More flexibility, a more efficient network.

The Ethernet-based fieldbus system, in parallel for other traffic. Thanks to the
PROFINET IO RT, is the technical prioritized transmission of PROFINET, other
successor of PROFIBUS DP. The advantage protocols, such as FTP, HTML, visualization,
of Ethernet as a media is the flexibilty etc. can be operated on the same physical
of the network topology, as standard network.
Ethernet switches can be used. Moreover,
the network infrastructure can be used

Features
Mode controller (master) and device (slave)
Transmission of I/O channel values of the device
to and from the controller
Transmission of process values (SVI) of the device
to and from the controller via data blocks
Configuration data for I/O channels on the device
(measuring range, signal direction, etc.) are stored
on the controller and transmitted to the devices when
the system boots
Standardized GSDML file available for configuration
in other configuration tools
Minimum bus cycle 1 ms
Data rate 10/100 Mbit
Other TCP/IP data traffic on the same network is pos-
sible

165
 PROFINET

PROFINET IO (RT)

At Bachmann electronic PROFINET RT is a pure

software solution that can be started on the
available Ethernet ports of the controller. The
control system can be operated as PROFINET
controller (master) and as PROFINET device
(slave). The PROFINET device offers access to its
I/O channels to the PROFINET controller. Each
module on the device can be assigned to another
controller, or input values can be read by several
controllers (Shared Device). Moreover, the
PROFINET device offers also access to process
variables of its local application programs. Thus
it is not only possible to create I/O-Slaves but
also devices with local intelligence (I-Device).
An I-Device works directly on its I/O-Signals and
synchronizes itself with a superior controller.

• Transmission of I/O channel values

from and to the controller
• I -Device: Transmission of process variables
(SVI) for coupling between CPUs
(intelligent device)
•S  hared Device: Modules of a device can
be assigned to several controllers
•A  utomatic handling of transmission errors,
different switch-on sequences,
and network failures
•E  xtensive diagnostics
•P  arallel operation with other Ethernet
traffic in the same network
•C  ycle times >= 1 ms
•A  djustable reduction ratio for
individual process values that should
be transmitted less frequently,
e.g. for analog inputs

166
 PROFINET

PROFINET configurator

The grapical configurator for PROFINET

networks is part of the Device Manager
in the SolutionCenter. It enables the
design of the network topology, including
all switches and cables. The devices are
managed via the standardized GSDML
files in the PROFINET catalog.

On the devices, modules can be assigned to slots

according to the information in the GSDML files.
For configuration of I-Devices, the communication
of process variables between M1 PROFINET
devices and the PROFINET controller is organized
with data blocks. SVI variables of the application
software are assigned to the data blocks and can
then be exchanged with a PROFINET controller.

On the M1 PROFINET controller, the I/O

and process valuess of its devices are
represented as logical I/O modules which
enable convenient access to the process data
for application software and diagnostic tools.
Network parameters such as timeout limits,
optional stations, assignment of process
values to communication relations, and further
settings are available in parameter tables.

The controller- and device-configurations are

automatically distributed to all participtating M1
systems. Additionally, the configuration project
is stored on the controllers, so the configuration
can be directly opened for verification or change.
This grants that the maintenance engineer always
works on the current network configuration.

• Complete network configurations

for the PROFINET controller
•P  artial network configuratons
for M1 PROFINET devices
•D  evice catalog for managing
GSDML description files
•F  ree arrangement of the devices in the
graphical network layout editor
•A  ssignment of the modules to the slots
on the device
•C  onvenient processing of network
and device parameters in tables
•G  eneration of logical I/O modules
on the controller
•D  irect opening of the existing
configuration from the controller
167
PROFINET

168
 Fieldbus - M-BUS

Standardized basis, integrated solution.

Energy meters (gas, heat, output, An integrated solution is provided by a

water,..) are required in power plants, and rugged and easily installable M-Bus adapter
in combined heat and power generation and its convenient integration as a fieldbus in
in particular, for regulation, as well as software communication.
accounting. The M-Bus standardized in EN
61334-4-1 is highly prevalent in Europe
for the connection of these meters. The
OSI model, if M-Bus is the physical layer,
the data link according to IEC 870 and the
application layer according to EN 1434-3
are specified for this protocol.

MBUS201 master

The MBUS201 master enables easy connection of

a serial RS232 interface on M-Bus via an adapter.
The M-Bus is a widely used fieldbus in accordance
with EN 13757 for reading out consumption
data from meters (electricity, water, gas,
heat). Transmission is serial via voltage and
current modulation on a two-wire line that
is protected against polarity reversal.
The M-Bus protocol is integrated as an intuitively
configurable fieldbus, and is addressed via the
UFB (Unified FieldBus ) software interface.

• max. 4 MBUS201 masters per M1 controller

• M-Bus protocol implemented as fieldbus
• max. 5 meters (slaves) per master
• Adapter can be inserted directly
on the DSUB connector
• Integrated M-Bus power supply
• Interfaces M-Bus and RS232 are galvanic isolated
• LED display for collision detection
and power supply
• Data transmission at 300 to 9600 bps

Item Item no.

MBUS201 00019766-00

169
 M-BUS

MBUS201
Interfaces
M-Bus In accordance with DIN EN 13757-2
Connection Spring-force terminal in housing, shield support
Number of nodes max. 5 counters (slaves) per master
Data rate 300 to 9600 bps
RS232 In accordance with EIA-232, D-Sub 9-pin, socket, no hardware handshake
Power supply 24 V ( 20 .. 30 V DC)
Current consumption max. 0.25 A
Reverse polarity protection yes
Status displays
Power supply LED green
Collision detection- M-Bus LED yellow
Housing
Dimensions (W x H x D) 32 x 60 x 15 mm
Nickel-plated zinc die-cast
Mounting Hex socket (size 2.5) with ball head

Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C

Rel. humidity, operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. Humidity, storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Model variants
MBUS201 M-Bus master adapter; energy measurement fieldbus EN13757; M-Bus inter-
face to RS232 DSUB 9; 24V power supply; up to 9,6kbit/s

170
 Fieldbuses – MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU

Simply proven, proven simple.

Modbus is a very simple, but proven Thanks to its simplicity and its inter
fieldbus system. In principle it only knows operability, Modbus is widely used in older,
the two data types, bool and integer, and as well as in new applications.
a set of queries that are always posed by Bachmann electronic offers Modbus master
the master and answered by the slaves. and slave as a pure software solution. Special
Modbus RTU was originally developed for hardware is not required. Both the Ethernet
serial interfaces, later the principles were ports and COM ports of all controller CPUs,
then extended to Ethernet with Modbus as well as the ports of the corresponding bus
TCP and Modbus UPD. modules EM203 and RS204 can be used.

Modbus master / Modbus slave

Features
Modbus master and slave available
Supported protocols: Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP and
Modbus RTU
Multiple protocols can be used simultaneously
Uses existing interfaces of the controller, special
hardware is not required
Interfaces can be spatially distributed on FASTBUS
or BES substations.
Configuration via Device Manager

171
 MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU

Modbus master

With the Bachmann M1 Modbus master read/write

access to the data from any external standard-
conformant Modbus slave device is possible.
The registers, coils and discrete inputs of the
external device are mapped to logical hardware
modules of the control system per hardware
modules. The cyclic update is executed automati-
cally, the values remain available in the process
image. Queries to the slaves are summarized
automatically in this process to reduce the load.
In addition, the Modbus master offers a func-
tion interface via which any Modbus requests
can be sent to the slaves. The error messages
of the Modbus system (Modbus exceptions) are
passed through to the application software.
All Ethernet ports for Modbus TCP and UDP, as
well as all serial interfaces for Modbus TCP, are
available. These can also be distributed spa-
tially to substations of the control system.

• Supported protocols:
Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP and Modbus RTU
• Use of the onboard interfaces of the CPUs
• Possibility of spatial distribution of the
interfaces via FAST substations and EM203
or RS204 module
• Mapping of the contents of the »Modbus Primary
Tables« to virtual channel values
• Multiple networks parallel
(also for different modes)
• Gateway functionality
(also to other bus systems)
• Investment protection thanks to extremely
wide distribution
• Compatibility and openness
• Easy handling

172
 MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU

network,
Modbus connection UFB module 1
Modbus Channel 1
Slave
master Channel 2

Channel 3
Configuration
Channel 4
»Output Request
Registers«< Channel 5
»Input
1
Registers«> Channel 6
2
1
»Coils« < Channel 7
2 3
1 Cyclic Channel 8
3 4
»Input Discrete«>
2 Functions
1 ...
3 4 (Polling
2 n UFB module n
... engine)
4 Channel 1
3 n Response Data
... Channel 2
4 Modbus Mapping
n Channel 3
... protocol Interface & Channel 4
n engine trans- Channel 5
formation Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Modbus TCP master

RS232

Modbus
Network 3
Modbus
Network 2
Station 1 Station 1

Modbus slave Modbus slave

Ethernet 10 / 100 Mbit / s

Station 1 Station 2 Station 3 Station ... Station n

Modbus slave Modbus slave Modbus slave Modbus slave Modbus slave

173
 MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU

Protocol

Protocols Modbus RTU

Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP
Protocol version Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1a
Supported function codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 15, 16 (are used automatically purely through
configuration). Via a function interface any function codes
can be called directly from the application program.
Interfaces
Physical layer – Modbus RTU RS232, RS422, RS485
Interfaces – Modbus RTU serial interfaces to M1-CPUs, CT300 series, CT200 series
Distributability – Modbus RTU yes (FASTBUS or BEM  /  BES substation with RS204 module)*
Physical layer – Modbus TCP Ethernet 10  /  100 MBit in accordance with IEEE 802.b
Interfaces – Modbus TCP ETH0 and ETH1 to M1-CPUs, CT200 series
Distributability – Modbus TCP yes (FASTBUS or BEM  /  BES substation with EM203 module)*
Performance data
Multiple Modbus networks yes (up to 8 networks per CPU)
simultaneously
Nominal transfer rates 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bits / s (gross)
serial (RTU)
Nominal transfer rates 10  /  100 Mbit / s (gross)
Ethernet (TCP)
Parallel traffic to Modbus TCP yes (normal IP traffic via the same interface)
Word order configurable
Optimization automatic summary of requests
Diagnostics and safety
Log book support yes (with adjustable debug level)
Online diagnostics yes
Implementation
Form of delivery IO driver (modbus.m)
virtual modules in accordance with the »Unified Fieldbus Model«
Interface to the application
for access via MIO or process image
Configuration data format mconfig.ini (ASCII)
System prerequisites
Supported devices all controller CPUs

* Substation operation via RS204 at reduced data rate / overall performance depends on overall application

174
 MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU

Modbus slave

The Modbus slave can be installed as a software

module on every controller CPU. Controlled
through a mapping table, it reads variables
of the system and makes them available on
Modbus registers, where they can be read by
every standard-conformant Modbus master.
Write accesses of the master are appropriately
forwarded by the Modbus slave to the mapped
variables. In this manner process variables of
the user software, direct I/O signals, as well as
system variables, such as time of the controller,
can be transparently presented for the external
Modbus master.
All Ethernet ports for Modbus TCP and UDP, as
well as all serial interfaces for Modbus TCP, are
available. These can also be distributed spatially
to substations of the control system.

•S  upported protocols: Modbus TCP/UDP/RTU

• Use of the onboard interfaces of the CPUs
• Possibility of spatial distribution of the interfaces
via FASTBUS substations and EM203 or
RS204 module
•M  apping of any SVI variables in the
Modbus Primary Tables
•M  apping of any I  /  O channels in the
Modbus Primary Tables
• Easy data access through applications
(bidirectional)

SVI interface network,

Symbolic_Var_1 connection

Task 1 Symbolic_Var_2

Symbolic_Var_n
config.

Modbus
Request
SVI interface master
»Output Registers«<
Symbolic_Var_A
Data 1 Modbus
Task 2 Symbolic_Var_B »Input Registers«>
Mapping 2
Control
Symbolic_Var_Z 1
»Coils« <
Interface 2 3
engine
& 1
»Input Discrete«>4
SVI interface
2 3
Symbolic_Var_I Trans- 1 ...
3 4
Task n Symbolic_Var_II formation 2 ...
n Response
4
Symbolic_Var_X 3 n
...
4
n
SVI interface ...

I  /  O Symbolic_Var_1 n
Symbolic_Var_2
system Virtual Modbus data tables
Symbolic_Var_n

175
 MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU

Protocol

Protocols Modbus RTU, Modbus UDP, Modbus TCP

Protocol version Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1a
Data direction bidirectional
Supported function codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15, 16
Interfaces
Physical layer – Modbus RTU RS232, RS422, RS485
Interfaces – Modbus RTU serial interfaces on controller CPUs
Distributability – Modbus RTU yes (FASTBUS or BEM  /  BES substation with RS204 module)*
Physical layer – Modbus UDP Ethernet 10  /  100 MBit in accordance with IEEE 802.b
Interfaces – Modbus TCP all Ethernet interfaces of the controller CPUs
Distributability – Modbus TCP yes (FASTBUS or BEM  /  BES substation with EM203 module)*
TCP / IP Port adjustable, preset: 502
Performance data
Multiple slave instances yes up to 4 instances per CPU for concurrent operation
simultaneously in multiple Modbus networks.
Nominal transfer rates 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bits   /  s (gross)
serial (RTU)
Nominal transfer rates 10 / 100 Mbit / s (gross)
Ethernet (TCP)
Multiple master connections yes, for Modbus TCP configurable, number of simultaneous
simultaneously master connections (default 10). For UDP no limitation.
Parallel traffic to Modbus TCP yes (normal IP traffic via the same interface)
Diagnostics and safety
Log book support yes (with adjustable debug level)
Online diagnostics yes
Online connection statistics yes
Access limitation yes (configurable list of allowed IP addresses)
Implementation
Form of delivery Software module (modus.m)
Connection to process data SVI variables, flags and I/O signals
Configuration data format mconfig.ini (ASCII)

System prerequisites
Supported devices all controller CPUs

* Substation operation via RS204 at reduced data rate / overall performance depends on overall application

176
 Telecontrol/field level

Standard communication in energy plants/substation automation.

Facilities for energy generation, Time stamps and other meta data in
transmission and distribution require a addition to the actual values and special
particularly high level of availability and transmission types are often provided. The
are therefore critical infrastructures. M1 automation system offers telecontrol/
Communication systems for control substation protocols as ready-to-use,
facilities and substation automation installable software packages that can be
have therefore become established that combined as required. A key benefit is the
are specially adapted to the additional fact that available application logic that has
requirements involved. A high level of already been tested does not have to be
standardization as well as a particularly modified selectively for each protocol. It is
robust design are essential for worldwide only necessary to configure the variables
use in networks covering several regions. (SVI) to be exchanged.

MMS client
(IEC61850 / IEC61400-25)

Features
Communication in accordance with standards
IEC61400-25 or IEC61850
Pure software solution, special additional hardware
is unnecessary
Shared operation with other protocols on the same
Ethernet interface
Enables access from outside to variables of the
controller

177
 Telecontrol/field level

MMS client
(IEC61850 / IEC61400-25)
Manufacturing Message Specification client

Numerous switching, protective, and

measurement devices in the energy technology
area are equipped with an Ethernet interface
and offer communication in accordance with the
IEC61850 standard. Via this interface parameters
can be assigned for the devices, and the devices
can be diagnosed, and actual values can be
picked up through polling or received per report.
Previously this interface has been primarily
served by SCADA and control room systems.
Through the Bachmann MMS client the
control system is capable of directly using the
IEC61580 interface of such peripheral devices.
The MMS client behaves on the controller in a
manner similar to a fieldbus driver: It supplies
actual values and reports of the peripheral
devices directly into the application software.
Inversely, switch commands, setpoints and
parameters for the peripheral device can be
set directly from the application program.

• Pure software solution, special

additional hardware is unnecessary
• It is started as a stand-alone service
directly from the application software
• Common operation with other protocols on the
same Ethernet port and in the same network
• Configuration via SolutionCenter,
no external tools are required
• Operates devices in accordance with IEC 61850
and/or IEC61400-25 in the same network
• Operating interface for sequential
programs (IEC61131-3, C/C++) via
SMI for temporal decoupling
• Library for PLC programming in
accordance with IEC61131-3
• Header file for C/C++ programming
• Disclosed interface for tools and visualizations
• Report data is available via logical I/O
modules for application programs and tools
• Commissioning and diagnostics
monitor in the SolutionCenter

178
 Telecontrol/field level

MMS client (IEC61850 / IEC61400-25)

Usability
Implementation areas wind power in accordance with IEC61400-25
distributed energy resources: CHP, photovoltaic,
Heat accumulators in accordance with IEC61850-7-420
switchgear and protective devices in accordance
with IEC61850-7
Scope of delivery software components for the controller
PLC library and C-defines for operation of the API
test and diagnostics monitor in the SolutionCenter
user manual
sample configuration
PCS sample project
User interface Individual read and write commands via non-blocking
PLC modules (PLC) or non-blocking calls (C/C++).
Incoming report data on logical IO modules and in the
process image.
Capabilities in accordance with IEC 61400-25 / IEC 61850
Login/logout on the external server with
Associate, Abort, Release
or without password
Check connection status MMS status request
Read value from data attributes GetDataValues
Write value from data attributes GetDataValues
Write value from data attributes SetDataValues
Activation and configuration – buffered Get/SetBRCBValues, Get/SetURCBValues,
and unbuffered reports (BR, UR) BRCB…buffered report control block
Generating, deleting and reading of datasets CreateDataSet, DeleteDataSet, GetDataSetDirectory
Issuing of switch commands (operates) Select, Select with value, Operate,
Cancel, TimeActivatedOperate
Receipt of information reports as reaction to operates

M1 SOFTWAREMODULE

mconfig.ini
- SERVER
- REPORTS

MMS CLIENT
S MI SERVER 1
CALL XCBR1.Pos
PLC-MODUL 1

S MI AN-/ABMELDEN
CALL SERVER 2
PLC-MODUL 2 WERTE LESEN/ MMXU1.AvgWatts
SCHREIBEN
S MI S MI
OPERATE
CALL INTERFACE
C/C++ MODUL REPORTS SERVER 3
ANMELDEN LPHD.PhyHealth

REPORTS
AKTIV/INAKTIV

ETHERNET
REPORT
DATA
AUF MI0- REPORTS
MODUL

179
Telecontrol/field level

180
 Fieldbuses – SERCOS

Specialized for rigorous requirements.

SERCOS (SErial Realtime COmmunication via appropriate services, but it also makes
System) is a dedicated bus system for meta information, such as symbolic names,
activation of high-quality electric drives input limits and units, available. Via service
and servo amplifiers. Communication channel accesses, in addition to the cyclic
is configured on the controller and process data, acyclic parameters at runtime
distributed to the drives when the system from the application program can also be
boots. The process data of the drive is changed or transferred from a list of initial
available in standardized form and makes parameters at system start.
not only the numeric values available

Possible topology: SERCOS

ENGINEERING PC

ETHERNET

SERCOS DRIVE

NT250 MPC240 DI216 DO216 AIO288 SEM201

SERCOS DRIVE

181
 SERCOS

SERCOS master module SEM201

The SERCOS (Serial Real-time Communication

System) master module SEM201 is capable of
controlling up to 32 drives. The bus has a ring
structure and offers a high level of interference
immunity thanks to the fibre optic technology.

• 
SERCOS 2 Standard IEC 61491
• Fiber optic technology
• Bus with ring structure
• 2 Kb x 32 DPRAM
• Transfer rates: 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 Mbaud
• Cycle times: 62.5 µs .. 65 ms
• Multiple masters can be synchronized

Item Item no.

SEM201 00011756-00

SEM201
Description
Channels / drives fiber optic ring with max. 32 drives, 2 kB x 32 DPRAM
Modules per controller max. 12
Transfer rate 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 Mbaud
Cycle times 62.5 µs .. 65 ms
Synchronization multiple masters can be synchronized
Certified by SI – Sercos International (formerly IGS)
Galvanic isolation from system yes, via fiber optic cable
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation

Model variants
SEM201 Sercos master module; 2/4/8/16MBaud; SERCOS II; FO interface 2x
FSMA (In/Out)

182
 bluecom

The real-time communication solution for large projects

Renewable energy sources like solar and wind time connection to every separate power station.
power stations exist in ranges and dimensions Diagnostic and remote maintenance tasks, e.g state-
that vary considerably. Beginning with separate of-the-art condition monitoring analyses, should be
installations at a distance of a few hundred meters possible parallel to time-sensitive communications.
up to hundreds of participants spread across
several square kilometers, the installations have bluecom provides reliable real-time communication
to maintain contact among themselves and with technology for the highest performance requirements,
a monitoring and control center. Operators are specifically optimized for renewable energy systems'
placing ever higher demands on the controllability rapid exchange of information. Top reliability,
of such virtual power stations. In order to be easy maintenance and diagnosability, as well as
able to react positively to errors like LVRT and adaptability to existing networks, have been achieved.
FRT, there has to be a swift and reliable real- As a software-only solution absent with special

bluecom - energy park/virtual power station networking model

Park control center /

control station

M1 controller

Monitoring and maintenance from any

connection point possible with standard
PC

183
requirements for CPU and compatible to a broad Thanks to its compatibility with Ethernet standard
spectrum of network hardware, applications in IEEE 802.3, bluecom provides a sustainable
user-defined topologies can be put into effect, solution for the networking tasks of modern
having up to 500 participants and saves resources. power stations. bluecom at once predefines the
Library functions for cyclic and acyclic optimization of performance with lower CPU and
communication in IEC 61131-3, C and C++ network load for master-master communication
make for the greatest easy development. at the machine and plant level too.
The configuration, monitoring and diagnostic
analysis are executed via the SolutionCenter.

bluecom

Features
Networking of more than 500 subscribers in a free
network topology with bidirectional transmission of at
least 250 bytes in a real-time cycle of 20 ms.
Continuous additions of stations and entire network
segments during real-time operation
Optimization of speed and bandwidth utilization en-
sure high data throughput with low CPU and network
load
Monitoring and analysis of the state of the network
and the fastest location of errors possible with no
extra effort via integrated diagnostic and monitoring
interfaces
Standards-compliant implementation is the basis for
the influence-free coexistence of real-time communi-
cation parallel to other Ethernet-based protocols and
services

184
 bluecom

bluecom

bluecom defines an open real-time transmission

protocol optimized for the requirements of diverse
Ethernet based network structures that have grown
over time. Structures such as these can be found
in the networking of alternative energy plants, for
instance, the so-called virtual power stations.

bluecom connects hundreds of network devices

deterministically and is not assigned to proprietary
extensions of Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3. The
user is free to choose the topology, the transmission
medium and the transmission rate. As a result,
bluecom render the most cost-efficient real-time
networking of new and pre-existing systems possible.

• Real-time networking of more than 500 sub-

stations with cycle time of less than 20 ms at
250 bytes of bidirectional data transmission
• Compatible with every MX, MPC, MH
and MC series processor module
• Ethernet-based real-time protocol without
specific requirements for networking topology
• Optimized for speed and bandwidth utilization
• Efficiency by design (low CPU and
networking utilization)
• Hot-plug functionality when removing
and adding network stations

Item Item no.

bluecom CL License to operate the bluecom communication software on 00019331-61
any number of Bachmann controller CPUs (Redustribution
exclusively together with CPU modules).
bluecom CL AMT One year extension of product support and update delivery for 00019331-71
the bluecom Company License.
bluecom RT Runtime License to operate the bluecom communication 00019331-63
software on one controller CPU. Enables the communication with
one or several bluecom compliant devices. Extension of product
support and update delivery is covered by a valid M-Base Annual
Maintenance.
bluecom DL License to develop bluecom compatible products on third party 00020721-64
devices by any number of employees in one location (Porting
License).
bluecom DL AMT One year extension of product support and update delivery 00020721-74
for the bluecom Porting License.

185
 bluecom

• Parallel communication via the same interfaces • Multi-master functionality

and media, without impact on real-time • Integrated error detection and
capabilities (HTTP, FTP, video, VoIP, …) diagnostics functionality
• Priorization of Ethernet traffic acc. to IEEE 802.3q • Configurable I/O mapping of network variables
• Configurable bandwidth limit • Programming and diagnostic interface
• Subnet formation and cascading in IEC 61131-3 and C/C++

bluecom
Rationale / Type / Compatibility
Protocol type Ethernet-based real-time protocol
Ethernet compatibility yes, as per IEEE 802.3q (ISO/OSI layer 1+2)
Registered IEEE Ethertype 0x892D
Transmission medium independent of transmission medium
wireless communication (802.11) permissible once the jitter
requirements have been taken care of
Gateway functionality Interface of different network types on the application level
Fieldbus CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus UDP + TCP, EtherCAT
Control station level Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA, Modbus
TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
Topology / Networking
Topologies Star, bus, ring*, mesh network
Dimension in compliance with IEEE 802.3 - max. 2000 m per network
section via fiber optic connection (FCS214)
Transfer rates supported 100 Mbit/s, 1 Gbit/s
Time synchronization via PTP (IEEE 1588) **
Switches / infrastructure Standard Ethernet IEEE 802.3q
Parallel data traffic yes, possible
Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP(S), FTP(S),
SNTP, SMTP, video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS, ...

* employing appropriate network hardware

** accuracy achievable subject to CPU type used and master clock used

186
 bluecom

bluecom
Configuration / Programming
Configuration SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming IEC 61131-3, C/C++ user interfaces integrated,
Library functions
Software interfaces API for sending and receiving and for monitoring and che-
cking the full and proper delivery of packets, as well as the
management of I/O stations
Network variables yes (configuration of variables at the endpoints automatically
generates bluecom communication channel)
Adding/removing slaves yes, possible (hot plug)
Diagnostics / Monitoring
I/O live display yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
I/O network variables yes, for every I/O channel (status, value)
Channel status yes, for every bluecom channel
Error status yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
Diagnostics yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
Statistics yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
Network monitor SolutionCenter
Network analysis yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated
automatically on the controller)
Bandwidth limitation Monitoring and limitation of real-time communication
bandwidth use included
(adjustable, pre-configured: 35 Mbit/s)
Jitter monitoring yes
QoS yes (IEEE 802.3q)

Performance data
Number of I/O stations max. 500 *** (restricted by software)
Cycle time 200 µs .. 1 s *** (any intermediate values configurable)
Transmission frame cyclic 0 .. 1400 bytes per payload unit
Transmission frame acyclic 32000 bytes per payload unit
Capacity under test conditions Master CPU: MPC293, slave CPU: MX213, 10 ms cycle, 96
slaves, 50-byte cyclic data exchange bidirectional to each I/O
station, transmission medium copper
CPU load only Protocol Master: 17%, slave: 1,7%
CPU load (Protocol, GetData + Master: 27%, slave: 3%
SetData)
Network load Master: 9 Mbit/s, slave: 0.082 Mbit/s

*** Limit value is subject to the power of the controller and the network, as well as the
controller capacity utilization and the network topology/load
187
 bluecom

bluecom
Installation
Installation medium CD ROM or network
Installation tool SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems by software possible / licence required
System prerequisites
Automation equipment M1 CPUs of the MX200 series or better (application licence)
Porting information is available for implementation on
external equipment (developer licence)
Software MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher
Network industrial standard managed switch (unmanaged switch with
appropriate configuration)

188
 Communication – Control room networking

A suitable system for every industry.

Machines and plants usually work as a electronic has a suitable communication

composite and are coupled to a central system for every industry in its product
data acquisition system, a control room, line. A powerful, laboratory-certified OPC
or a PDA/MES system. Regardless of server is available in two variants, as well
whether this involves aggregates of as an MMS server tailored to the energy
a wind park, or production machines industry for communication in accordance
of a manufacturing shop – Bachmann with IEC61850 and IEC61400-25.

OPC UA Server

Features
Operation on the controller without additional
­Windows PC
OPC UA data access (DA) for accessing process
­variables
Read and write access to process variables can
be controlled via user groups
Login can be requested by configuration
Signing by TLS certificate can be requested
by ­configuration
Communication encryption can be requested
by TLS up to 256 bits

M1 OPC M1 OPC
standard server enterprise server

Features Features
OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04, 2.05, 3.0 OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04, 2.05, 3.0
Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
Secure SSL connection to the Secure SSL connection to the
controllers controllers
Up to 5 automation devices per No limitation of connected M1
server systems
Up to 10,000 information points No restriction of data quantity
Operation under Microsoft Windows Simulation of clients
7, Vista, XP Operation under Microsoft Windows
7, Vista, XP, Server 2003, Server
2008

189
The telecontrol protocol, according of these sub-components ranges from
to IEC60870-5-104, is widely used in circuit breakers, converters, and energy
power generation, power distribution meters to cogeneration units up to
and infrastructure areas. It allows the complete power plants.
control and monitoring of intelligent sub-
components and sub-stations through a
superordinate control center. The palette

MMS Server
(IEC61850 / IEC61400-25)

Features
Communication in accordance with standards IEC
61400-25 or IEC 61850
Pure software solution, special additional hardware
is unnecessary
Shared operation with other protocols on the same
Ethernet interface
Enables access from outside to variables
of the controller

IEC60870-5 Server (Slave)

Features
Standard compliant implementation of
IEC60870-5-101, -103, -104 Server
Service/software solution that can be
subsequently installed
No changes to the application logic required
Fully configurable/no application-specific processing
via PLC libraries required
Configurator for commissioning and ­diagnostic
monitor in the SolutionCenter
Import/export in CSV format for ­exchange with other
manufacturers
Reducing the amount of data via ­configurable
threshold filters

190
 Communication – Control room networking

OPC UA Server
(Openness, Productivity and
Connectivity)

The OPC UA Server is a pure software solution

and can be executed directly on the controller
CPU without additional hardware. It offers
full and transparent access to the process
values of the control application. Systems for
visualization, Scada or data logging can use
OPC UA as manufacturer independent interface.
An additional Windows® PC for execution of the
OPC server software is no longer required.
More benefits from the direct execution on
the controller are the automatic recognition
of process data without the need to create a
configuration, and the accurate source time
stamps. If requested, the communication is
encrypted, and the communication partners can
be identified unambiguously by TLS certificates.
Plain communication without login data and the
certification check are of course still possible.

• Data Access according to OPC UA specification

• Is installed as additional service on the controller
• Displays the process values of the controller in
its address space without additional configuration
steps
• Considers access permissions on variables at
reading and writing
• Write access can be logged
• Quality is granted by participation at Interop
workshops and conformance tests

Item Item no.

OPC UA Server (installation DVD) 00022170-00
OPC UA Server (Lizence) 00022170-63

191
 Communication – Control room networking

PC
• Configuring atvise® scada Arbitrarily
• Parametrizing visualization OPC UA Client
• Monitoring

OPC UA SMI

M1 controller

OPC UA Server

SVI SVI SVI

Software Module Software Module Software Module
PLC, C/C++ PLC, C/C++ PLC, C/C++

Functionality of OPC UA server

192
 Communication – Control room networking

OPC UA Server
Supported OPC UA Profiles
Security Profile Security Policy - None
Security Policy - Basic128Rsa15
Security Policy - Basic 256
Transport Profile UA-TCP UA-SC UA Binary
Server Profiles Base Server Behaviour Facet
Basic DataChange Subscription Server Facet
Core Server Facet
Embedded UA Server
Enhanced DataChange Subscription Server Facet
Low End Embedded Device Driver Facet
Supported OPC UA Information Models
Information models Data Access (DA)
Supported OPC UA Service Sets
Discovery Service Set FindServers
GetEndpoints
SecureChannel Service Set OpenSecureChannel
CloseSecureChannel
Session Service Set CreateSession
ActivateSession
CloseSession
Cancel
View Service Set Browse
BrowseNext
TranslateBrowsePathToNodeIds
RegisterNodes
UnregisterNodes
Attribute Service Set Read
Write
MonitoredItem Service Set CreateMonitoredItems
ModifyMonitoredItems
SetMonitoringMode
SetTriggering
DeleteMonitoredItems
Subscription Service Set CreateSubscription
ModifySubscription
SetPublishingMode
Publish
Republish
DeleteSubscriptions

193
 Communication – Control room networking

OPC UA Server
Security features
Encryption see Security Profile
Protection against overload (DoS) CPU overload caused by clients can be avoided by limiting the mini-
mum sample rate
Public Key Infrastructure file based on the controller
Access logging connections and write operations are stored in the security log of the
controller
Diagnose
State variables number of active sessions
number of active subscriptions
number of items monitored by subscription
Show functions list of sessions
list of all software modules in the address space
list of all items in subscriptions
Logbook messages amount and type of messages can be selected by debug levels
Installation
Shipping as DVD oder by download
Installation via SolutionCenter; Can be installed separately as service on the
controller
License needs a runtime license for each controller CPU,
independant of number of items or clients
License protection license file depending on hardware
System requirements
CPU Hardware all M1 CPU types except ME203 (MH2xx, MC2xx, MPC2xx, MX2xx)
Memory minimum 64 MB, recommended 128 MB
System software version M-Base 3.85 or better
Order information
OPC UA Server (DVD) OPC UA Server installation DVD. Contains executable software for
installation on the controller and the user documentation.
OPC UA Server (Licence) licence for operating one installation of the OPC UA Server on one M1
controller system

194
 Communication – Control room networking

M1 OPC standard server

(Openness, Productivity and
Connectivity)

OPC defines a number of manufacturer-neutral

software interfaces for automation
(www.opcfoundation.org). With OPC data
access actual states and values (online data)
can be exchanged between controllers and
software applications, such as visualizations,
control systems or production data acquisition.
As a pure software interface OPC runs on a PC
or IPC under Windows and communicates with
the M1 automation systems via Ethernet. Any
standard-conformant OPC clients will then either
be operated on the PC of the server, or
in the network and permit data exchange in both
directions.

The integrated configuration tool supports the

selective disclosure of any variables from the
control system under a freely selectable item
name for the clients. Configurations can either
be created directly in the graphic interface, or
transferred from other tools via the import/
export function. Inversely a test client that is also
integrated in the »OPC Configurator« configuration
tool allows checking of the data exchange with
underlying controllers without a completely
set-up OPC client application.

• OPC conformant data server –

manufacturer-neutral interface
• Specifications – OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04,
2.05 and 3.0
• Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
• Secure SSL connection to the controllers
• Up to 5 automation devices per server
• Up to 10,000 information points
(items / field elements)
• Multi-processor support (depending on
operating system)
• Graphic configuration tool
• Flat and hierarchical browsing
• Integrated test client (configuration tool)
• Operation under Microsoft Windows Vista,
XP, 2000

195
 Communication – Control room networking

PC (Windows)

Application 1
(SCADA, HMI,
alarm system,
Historian, ..)

OPC client

OPC server
M1 OPC enterprise server284

Ethernet

Bachmann M1
Automation device

VHD

SVI

PLC 1 Motion PLC x

#1 #2 #n
IEC61131 C/C++ IEC61131

Bachmann MSys, MCore

VxWorks
I/O fieldbus

OPC standard server

Server
Protocol for client application OPC data access
Supported specifications V1.0, 2.04, 2.05a, 3.0
Data exchange direction bidirectional
Supported data types basis types UINT1, UINT8, SINT8, UINT16, SINT16, UINT32,
SINT32, REAL32, BOOL8, CHAR8, CHAR16, MIXED,
REAL64, UINT64, SINT64
block types all basis types; basis type BLK
(e.g. CHAR8 + BLK = STRING)
Data type mapping SVI on OPC (automatic)
Number of variables (items) 10,000 (individual variables or field elements)
Time stamp on the server yes
Time stamp from controller yes (per group one time item possible)
Quality attribute on the server yes
Quality attribute from controller yes (per group one quality item possible)

196
 Communication – Control room networking

M1 OPC standard server

Server
Display of connection loss yes (affected items show quality=BAD)
Server type OUT_PROCESS
Operation without GUI yes
Flat browsing yes
Hierarchical browsing yes
Refresh rates dynamically adjustable per group (from 50 ms)*
Multi-processor support yes
Interfaces to the controller
Physical interface to the M1 Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex)
Basis protocols TCP/IP
UDP/IP
QSOAP
Protocol SMI / VHD
Multiple connections per controller yes
Simultaneous queries yes
Number of connected controllers 5 (maximum)
Access protection yes, configurable
Supported security levels 0 to 4
Encryption SSL (configurable)
Configuration
Graphic interface yes (OPC configurator)
Browsing of controllers yes
Browsing of controller variables yes
(SVI)
Import/export yes (CSV)
Templates yes
Clones (with enumeration) yes
Restricted access yes (only on configured items)
Item names OPC-side can be freely configured (»renaming«)
Item access rights OPC side can be freely restricted
Integrated test client yes
Configurations can be saved yes
Access protection on configuration yes (different user levels)
Diagnostics
Error logging yes (log file)
Debug mode yes (several can be set)
Diagnosis on items yes (static items)
Statistics on items yes (static items)

* Refresh rates depend on the data volume and the computer performance,
(Free) controller performance and network topology/network load.

197
 Communication – Control room networking

M1 OPC standard server

Installation
Installation medium CD ROM or network
(See standard package M-Base and M-COM)
Installation can be automated yes
(»silent«)
System prerequisites – server
Computer IBM-compatible PC (Intel x86 architecture)
Processor minimum: Intel Pentium 500 MHz or comparable (Windows 2000)
recommended: Intel Core2Duo or Core2Quad with >2 GHz
RAM minimum: 256 MB RAM (Windows 2000)
recommended: >1 GB RAM
Network card at least 1x Ethernet 802.3
Hard disk >300 MB free
Graphic 1024 x 768 or better (only for configuration)
Input devices keyboard, 2-button mouse (only for configuration)
Operating system (OPC Server) Windows Vista
Windows XP
Windows 2000
Other software Text editor or MS Excel recommended for external configuration
System prerequisites M1
M1 automation devices families ME, MX, MPC, MPE, as well as CT/WT200 , CT/WT300
(achievable performance is type-dependent)
System software MSys V2.11 or higher (for full function scope)

198
 Communication – Control room networking

M1 OPC enterprise server

(Openness, Productivity and
Connectivity)

OPC defines a number of manufacturer-neutral

software interfaces for automation
(www.opcfoundation.org). With OPC data access,
actual states and values (online data) can be
exchanged between controllers and software
applications, such as visualizations, control
systems or production data acquisition. As a
pure software interface OPC runs on a PC or IPC
under Windows and communicates with the M1
automation systems via Ethernet. Any standard-
conformant OPC clients will then either be
operated on the PC of the server, or in the network
and permit data exchange in both directions.

The integrated configuration tool supports the

selective disclosure of any variables from the
control system under a freely selectable item
name for the clients. Configurations can either
be created directly in the graphic interface, or
transferred from other tools via the import/export
function. Convenient copy functions accelerate
TM the configuration or management even for large
SELF-TESTED installations with many connected controllers.

The integrated simulation enables communication

FO

CE

CO
M P LIA
tests with client applications even without
N
R

® connected M1 systems. Inversely a test client that

is likewise integrated in the »OPC Configurator«
configuration tool allows checking of the data
exchange with underlying controllers without
a completely set-up OPC client application.
The Bachmann M1 OPC enterprise server has been
specially developed for large installations with a
variety of automation devices, i.e. for large data
volumes. In addition to the possibility of handling
multiple network connections simultaneously,
here the parallelization of queries and the multi-
processor support have a particular effect.

Item Item no.

OPC Enterprise Server (Installation-DVD) 00015632-xx
OPC Enterprise Server (Runtime license) 00015632-63

199
 Communication – Control room networking

• OPC-conformant data server –

manufacturer-neutral interface
• Specifications: OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04,
2.05 and 3.0
• Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
• Secure SSL connection to the controllers
• No restriction of the connected
M1 systems*
• No restriction of data quantity (items)*
• Multi-processor support (depending on
operating system)
• Powerful configuration tool
• Flat and hierarchical browsing
• Simulation for clients (configuration tool)
• Integrated test client (configuration tool)
• Operation under Microsoft Windows 7, Vista,
XP, 2000, Server 2003 and Server 2008

P C 1 (W indow s) P C 2 (W indow s)

A pplication 1 A pplication 2
(S C A D A , H M I, (S C A D A , H M I,
Alarm-System, Alarm-System,
Historian, ..) Historian, ..)

O P C C lient O P C C lient

O P C S erver
M 1 O P C E nterprise S erver

Ethernet

VHD VHD VHD VHD

SVI SVI SVI SVI

M 1 C ontroller 1 M 1 C ontroller 2 M 1 C ontroller 3 M 1 C ontroller n

* However there is restriction due to computer performance, network capacity and communication load
on the M1 system. The actual achievable throughput depends on the application case.

200
 Communication – Control room networking

M1 OPC enterprise server

Server
Protocol for client application OPC data access
Supported specifications V1.0, 2.04, 2.05a, 3.0
Data exchange direction bidirectional
Supported data types basis types UINT1, UINT8, SINT8, UINT16, SINT16, UINT32,
SINT32, REAL32, BOOL8, CHAR8, CHAR16, MIXED,
REAL64, UINT64, SINT64
block types all basis types; basis type + BLK
(e.g. CHAR8 + BLK = STRING)
Data type mapping SVI on OPC (automatic)
Number of variables (items) user-defined**
Time stamp on the server yes
Time stamp from controller yes (per group one time item possible)
Quality attribute on the server yes
Quality attribute from controller yes (per group one quality item possible)
Display of connection loss yes (affected items show quality=BAD)
Server type OUT_PROCESS or SERVICE (configurable)
Operation without GUI yes
Flat browsing yes
Hierarchical browsing yes
Refresh rates dynamically adjustable per group (from 50 ms)**
Multi-processor support yes
Simulation mode yes
Interfaces to the controller
Physical interface to the M1 Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex)
Basis protocols TCP/IP
UDP/IP
QSOAP
Protocol SMI / VHD
Multiple connections per controller yes
Simultaneous queries yes
Number of connected controllers user-defined**
Access protection yes, configurable
Supported security levels 0 to 4
Encryption SSL (configurable)
Configuration
Graphic interface yes (OPC configurator)
Browsing of controllers yes
Browsing of controller variables yes
(SVI)

** Refresh rates depend on the data volume and the computer performance,
(Free) controller performance and network topology/network load.
*** No program-technical restriction. Limit value depends on performance
of the computer, the network and the capacity utilization of the controllers.

201
 Communication – Control room networking

M1 OPC enterprise server

Configuration
Import/export yes (CSV)
Templates yes
Clones (with enumeration) yes
Restricted access yes (only on configured items)
Item names OPC-side can be freely configured (»renaming«)
Item access rights OPC side can be freely restricted
Integrated test client yes
Configurations can be saved yes
Access protection on configuration yes (different user levels)
Diagnostics
Error logging yes (log file)
Debug mode yes (several can be set)
Diagnosis on items yes (static items)
Statistics on items yes (static items)
Installation
Installation medium CD ROM or network
Installation can be automated yes
(»silent«)
License basis per installation (single-license obligation)
License protection hardware-dependent software key
Configured installation yes (items/controller configuration, as well as configuration users
can be preset)
System prerequisites – server
Computer IBM-compatible PC (Intel x86 architecture)
Processor minimum: Intel Pentium 500 MHz or comparable (Windows 2000)
recommended: Intel Core2Duo or Core2Quad with >2 GHz
RAM minimum: 256 MB RAM (Windows 2000)
recommended: >1 GB RAM
Network card at least 1x Ethernet 802.3
Hard disk >300 MB free
Graphic 1024 x 768 or better (only for configuration)
Input devices keyboard, 2-button mouse (only for configuration)
Operating system (OPC Server) Windows 7
Windows Vista
Windows XP
Windows 2000
Windows Server 2003
Windows Server 2008
Other software Text editor or MS Excel recommended for external configuration
System prerequisites M1
M1 automation devices families ME, MX, MPC, MPE, as well as CT/WT200 , CT/WT300
(achievable performance is type-dependent)
System software MSys V2.11 or higher (for full function scope)

202
 Communication – Control room networking

MMS server
Manufacturing Message Specification Server

The MMS server equips the M1 controller with the

capability of communicating in accordance with
the standards IEC 61400-25 or IEC 61850. These
are two communication standards that have been
created to correspond to the needs of the energy
industry and the grid operators.
The standardization makes it possible to
seamlessly integrate an ever-increasing number
of heterogeneous plants, such as wind turbines
or CHPs, in a control room or in a mixed network.

The standards, IEC61400-25 and IEC61850,

extend far beyond pure data communication.
They also define the data modeling and thus
offer an object-oriented view of the system.
Objects, such as generator, circuit breaker,
transformer, rotor, etc. are defined. For each of
these objects the additional characteristics, their
designations, the data types and the associated
services are specified.
The MMS server from Bachmann electronic depicts
the variables that are available from the plant
control programs (e.  g. PLC) in the SVI (Standard
Variable Interface) on an IEC conformant
communication. The user of the MMS server
determines the standardized ICD file (ICD
= Intelligent Electronic Device Capability
Description), what information of the plant is
represented, and is therefore visible to the client
(e. g. the control station). This enables individual
adaptation to different plants or modular
expansion stages.

Item Item no.

MMS server RT License to operate the MMS Server on one controller CPU. Allows 00014547-63
communication over the ethernet interface with standards-
compliant client software using the IEC61850 or IEC61400-25
protocol in accordance with the documentation.
MMS server DVD Software and documentation for the MMS Server. Provides com- 00014547-xx
munication over the ethernet interface according to the standards
IEC61850 or IEC61400-25. Without a valid Runtime License the
MMS Server runs only temporarily for 2h in demo mode.

203
 Communication – Control room networking

Features Capabilities in accordance with

IEC61400-25 / IEC61850
• It is started as a stand-alone software module 
• No special hardware required, pure software • Unterstützt Ed. 1 und Ed. 2 der IEC61850
solution for all M1 CPU types except ME203 • The object definition decides between
•  Configuration of the variable set via IEC61850 or IEC61400-25
standardized ICD file (XML format) • Transport layer MMS (Manufacturing Message
•  Mapping of the SVI variables to IEC variables in Specification) in accordance with ISO 9506
a readable ASCII file, that can be automatically •  Browsing of variables  /  objects with presentation
generated of structures and elements in plain
• Automatic deadband calculation (db, text (self-describing system)
­zeroDb) for analog values (MV, CMV) • Reading and writing of values
• Integrated into the access control (Get  /  Set Data Values)
­features of the controller system • Summarizing of data (datasets)
•  Optional entry points for additional preprocess- •  Generation of reports, e. g. if
ing and post-processing of values, e. g. logging there is a value change
of write accesses • Command issue with command preselect
•  Can be operated together with other pro- (Select – Operate)
tocols (OPC, QSOAP, Telnet, etc.) on the • File transfer
same Ethernet interface of the M1
• Number of clients, reports, etc. can be limited
• Automatic limitation of CPU load

PC
Scada, Scada,
• Configuring SolutionCenter
Control Client Control Client
• Parametrizing Configurator
station station
• Monitoring
Monitor direction

Control direction
Ethernet TCP/IP

M1 controller

Configuration
Object model MMS server
Data mapping

SVI
Software module MIO
PLC, C/C++

Process Sensor
Sensor
Actor

204
 Communication – Control room networking

MMS server – Available services

IEC 61400-
Functional group Description Services IEC 61850
25
Server Represents the visible outwards ServerDirectory M O
appearance of a device. All other
functional groups are part of the
server.
Application Service for connection with a client. Associate M M
­association Allows restricted access to informa- Abort M O
tion and functions of the server.
Release M O
Logical device Represents a group of functions GetLogical­ M O
with each function defined as DeviceDirectory
­logical node.
Logical node Represents a certain function, LogicalNode­ M O
e.g. the overvoltage protection. Directory
GetAllData­Values M X
Data Allows specification of typified GetDataValues M M
i­nformation, such as the position SetDataValues O M
of a switch with quality information
GetDataDefinition M O
and timestamp.
GetDataDirectory M O
Data set Allows grouping of different data. GetDataSetValues M M
CreateDataSet O O
DeleteDataSet O O
GetDataSet­ O O
Directory
Reporting Describes the conditions for Report (BRCB)
r­ eporting based on client-defined GetBRCBValues
parameters. SetBRCBValues
Reporting can be triggered by Report (URCB)
change of process data (e.g. data GetURCBValues
change) or by quality changes. C O
SetURCBValues
The reports can be sent immedi-
ately or delayed. The reports con-
tain information on status changes
and events, data update excepted.

Control Describes the service for the con- Select

trol of devices or groups for para­ SelectWithValue O O
meter specification, for instance.
Cancel
Operate M M
Command­
O O
Termination

205
 Communication – Control room networking

MMS server – Available services

IEC 61400-
Functional group Description Services IEC 61850
25
File Defines the exchange of files. GetFile O O
SetFile M
DeleteFile O
X
GetFileAttribute­ M
Values

M = mandatory
O = optional
C = conditional, at least one of them should be supported (BRCB or URCB)
X = not part of the standard

206
 Communication – Control room networking

IEC60870-5 Server (Slave)

For communication in accordance
with IEC60870-5-101, -103 and -104

Application areas
The telecontrol protocol, according to standards
IEC60870-5-101 IEC60870-5-104, is widely
used in power generation, power distribution and
infrastructure areas. They enable the control and
monitoring of intelligent sub-components and sub-
stations through a superordinate control center.
The palette of these sub-components ranges from
circuit breakers, converters, and energy meters to
cogeneration units up to complete power plants.
The IEC60870-5-103 standard was defined espe-
cially for communication with protective devices.

Product features
The IEC60870-5 Server is installed purely as a
software component on the controller and requires
no special hardware. It uses the serial interfaces
(-101, 103) or the Ethernet ports (-104) avail-
able on the controller. Through configuration of
multiple instances, simultaneous operation of
Control station

-101, -103, and/or -104 is possible; multiple

masters can communicate simultaneously with the
controller. The information objects that the server
Plant / field level
offers in the control and monitoring direction, are
SolutionCenter
Process
created and linked to the controller’s existing
process variables via the configuration.
db
us Different data models can be created for d ­ ifferent
iel
,F
I/O masters. The login of masters can be restrict-
IEC 60870-5-101, -103:
Serial RS232, 422, 485 ed by specifying a permitted IP ­address, and
IEC 60870-5-104: Ethernet the number of simultaneous connections can
M1-CPU FM also be limited. Write accesses can be cap-
tured in the security log of the controller.

Item Item no.

IEC60870-5-Server RT License to operate the IEC 60870-5 server on one controller 00022127-63
CPU. Provides communication over the ethernet or serial
interfaces with standards-compliant clients using the
IEC60875-5-101, -103 and -104 protocol in accordance with
the compatibility documentation.
IEC60870-5-Server DVD Software and documentation for the IEC60870-5 server. 00022127-xx
­Provides access to process data according to the standards
IEC 60870-5-101 and 103 - 104. Without a valid Runtime
License the IEC60870-5 server runs only temporarily for 2h
in demo mode.

207
 Communication – Control room networking

To save bandwidth, a threshold filter can

be enabled. Values that are outside of de-
fined Min/Max limits are marked as invalid
and will only be transferred again when they
return to the valid range. No implementa-
tion by the user is necessary for this.

Engineering
For the generation of externally visible informa-
tion objects, a convenient tool is available in
the SolutionCenter that supports the user with
dialogs and wizards, and validates the entries
immediately. Thus, inconsistent or incorrect
configurations can be avoided. The link to the
process data takes place by selecting the corre-
sponding SVI variables from a variable browser.
To exchange the configuration with other manu-
facturers, import and export in a generic CSV
format is available. A monitor in the Solution­
Center shows the current configuration of
­information objects used in the server, and the
value most recently transmitted to the client.

PC
SolutionCenter PC, Visu,
• Configuring 60870 60870 60870
Configurator/ control
• Parametrizing Master Master Master
Control direction

Monitor station etc.

• Monitoring
Monitor direction

Ethernet TCP/IP

M1 controller Ethernet
Serial COM ports
TCP/IP

Configuration IEC60870-5 Server

Object model Communication according to
Data mapping -101, -103, -104

SVI
Software Module
MIO
PLC, C/C++

Process Sensor
Sensor
Actor

208
 Communication – Control room networking

Advantage Technical data

Existing software for sequence control and regula- • Standard compliant implementation of
tion does not need to be changed and will not be IEC60870-5-101, -103, -104 Server
affected in its run time. This therefore enables a • Service/software solution
more flexible response to end customer require- that can be subsequently installed
ments without having to change the existing • No changes to the application logic required
tested software for controlling and regulating of • Fully configurable/no application-specific
the substation. Through realization as a finished processing via PLC libraries required
server with integrated update- and threshold logic, • Configurator for commissioning and
tedious replication of the protocol functions via ­diagnostic monitor in the SolutionCenter
limiting PLC-libraries, and the associated train- • Import/export in CSV format for
ing efforts in the standard, is eliminated. Thus ­exchange with other manufacturers
engineering and testing time can be reduced. The • Reducing the amount of data via
integrated diagnostics shorten troubleshooting ­configurable threshold filters
if there are malfunctions in running operation. • Number and IP addresses of
The diverse communication possibilities via ­authorized clients can be limited
field busses and real-time Ethernet, the broad • Logging of write accesses in the security
range of signal interfaces to grid measure- log of the controller
ment, as well as powerful mass storage, pre-
destine the M1 system in conjunction with the
telecontrol protocols according to IEC60870-5
for use as a control device, central control,
data concentrator, datalogger, and gateway.

209
 Communication – Control room networking

IEC60870-5 server
General product features
Supported protocols IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-103, IEC60870-5-104 as slave (server)
Type Licensable service for Bachmann M1 controls (software-only solution,
subsequently installable) with configuration interface.
Requires a valid license file for operation.
Parallel operation Multiple independent server instances on one controller
Message types (ASDUs) Comprehensive implementation of the essential application data
service units, for example: single point information; single command;
double-point information; double command; step position informa-
tion; regulating step command; measured value, normalized; time
synchronization; reset and many more.
(See interoperability documents for details)
Data mapping Per configuration each server instance is separately defined.
Access to:
- SVI variables of application programs (software modules)
implementation-independent (IEC61131-3, C, C++)
- Physical inputs/outputs direct (MIO)
- Data from fieldbus/Ethernet protocols via UFB
Data type mapping Implicit in the server (mapping SVI data types on IEC data types)
Query groups Yes, information can be assigned to query groups 1 to 16 per
­configuration
Source time stamping Implicitly possible through server, explicitly possible via application.
Resolution in ms
Quality labeling Implicitly possible through server, explicitly possible via application.
Values outside of the configured Min/Max range are automatically
marked as invalid.
Designation of the transmission Implicitly through server
cause (COT)
Cyclic transmission Can be configured with individual cycle time per information object
Background scan Can be configured with individual cycle time per server instance
Update rates Configurable monitoring cycle for detection of spontaneous value
changes. Additional triggering possible through software. Automatic
protection against system overload. Minimum cycle limited through
free capacity of the CPU
Threshold filters With -101 and -104 one threshold value can be configured per
­information object, filtration is either absolute or integrating
Connection monitoring Connection status can be detected via diagnostics variables for
­customer software
Access control and logging Limiting of the number of clients, IP address specification for client,
integration with M1 Access Control: Logging of connections and write
accesses

210
 Communication – Control room networking

IEC60870-5 server
Configuration
Configuration interface Integrated in Bachmann SolutionCenter
Data configuration/mapping Via configuration interface (with variable browser and consistency check)
- open configuration format (ASCII) for automated creation
Exchange with other Import and export of CSV format
­manufac-turers
Diagnostics
Monitor for information objects Bachmann SolutionCenter shows all information objects with the last
transmitted value and time stamp
Connection statistics Visible in the monitor and diagnostics variables
Status variables Yes (server publishes essential operating characteristics and diagnostic
information also as SVI variables – visible for all applications and via
module "Scope" loggable over time)
Debugging Yes (runtime shiftable levels of information output)
Logbook Yes (essential operational information is displayed in the central
­logbook)
Write accesses Yes (logging in the M1 security log)

Installation
Delivery form Separately installable product (service); delivery on CD-ROM or as
download
Installation Via SolutionCenter
Licensing Subject to individual license per CPU (regardless of number of servers,
client connections or points of information)
License protection Hardware-dependent license file

System prerequisites – controller

Device All M1 CPU families (MH200, MC200, MPC200, MX200) except ME203
System version Msys from version 3.85, Mcore from version 3.80

System prerequisites – configuration

SolutionCenter SolutionCenter from version 1.85 (M-Base 3.85) – see SolutionCenter
product data sheets
IEC60870-5-101
Physical interface Serial ports of the M1 CPU or of RS204 modules in operating modes
RS232, RS422 and RS485. Parallel operation of multiple protocols on
the same port is not possible
Operating mode of the Link Layer Either symmetric or asymmetric
Addressing Device via address of the connection layer (Link Layer) and station
address (Common Address). Information object address (IOA) either
structured (28.7.16) or flat (1836816), can be freely assigned in the
configuration.
Baud rates No restriction through the IEC server

211
 Communication – Control room networking

IEC60870-5 server
IEC60870-5-103
Physical interface Same as for -101
Addressing Device: Common station address. Information object:
Via FUN, INF or via GIN
IEC60870-5-104
Physical interface Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (interfaces of the M1 CPUs and EM2131) Parallel
operation with other TCP/IP based communication on the same inter-
face is possible.
Addressing Device: Via selection of the Ethernet interface, as well as assignment
of the IP port (default 2404). IOA same as for -101
Variants
IEC60870-5-Server RT License to operate the IEC 60870-5 server on one controller CPU.
Provides communication over the ethernet or serial interfaces with
standards-compliant clients using the IEC60875-5-101, -103 and -104
protocol in accordance with the compatibility documentation.
IEC60870-5-Server DVD Software and documentation for the IEC60870-5 server. Provides
access to process data according to the standards IEC 60870-5-101
and 103 - 104. Without a valid Runtime License the IEC60870-5 server
runs only temporarily for 2h in demo mode.

212
 Know-how protection
Manipulation protection
Cryptographic functions

Security log
Monitoring of variables

Access control
Communication security
SSL/TLS
Simple. Efficient. Secure.

Security

Modern machines and production plants are deeply integrated in IT environ­

ments, whether this is in corporate networks or in public communication
networks, for example for remote maintenance. This results in information
security requirements that often present plant builders and operators with
new challenges.

Faced with the constantly increasing pressure from international competi­

tion, machine and plant builders are increasingly concentrating their unique
selling points in the software. The build quality of different vendors is simi­
lar, and thus also the resulting production speed. Experience and knowledge
about the process are what makes the difference between vendors. Know-
how is increasingly being integrated in applications and data, for e ­ xample,
in the form of algorithms, closed-loop control parameters and recipes. New
chances arising from the offering of new services such as online m ­ onitoring
and maintenance require secure communication routes, separated access
areas and manipulation-proof logging. Ultimately, the operator must protect
his intellectual property from unauthorized modifications or misuse by third
parties if he wants to ensure the responsible use of his own plant.

For some time now, the requirements of regulations and standards have
forced application sectors, such as the energy and water supply and func­
tional safety sectors, into taking concrete measures. Particularly in these
critical areas, the devices and software from Bachmann electronic are the
preferred solution. Different protective measures such as secured network
connections, user and access control and security logging have been inte­
gral elements of every Bachmann controller for several years. The existing
security concept is constantly being examined according to the latest stan­
dards and regulations and further developed jointly with our customers, not
just since Stuxnet or Duqu.

214
 Security

With Bachmann one decisive step ahead.

Machines and production plants are con­ With an extensive security package
nected with private and public commu­ for machines and plants, ­Bachmann
nication networks in many cases today. protects its units from unauthorized
Applications in the energy and w­ ater supply access and logs every write access
sector belong to the s­ o-called critical in­ up to variable level if necessary.
frastructures and place particular demands Quite incidentally, the security measures
on information security stipulated by law. increase the robustness against commu­
nication problems that are caused, for
Bachmann controllers are used world­ example, by faulty network devices.
wide especially in cases where maximum
availability, robustness and communi­
cation skills are called for. Many years
of experience in critical applications
offer each user the assuredness that
he is working with proven functions
that are being developed constantly.

Features
Layer-based protection concept
Ethernet load limitation
Securing of network services and logging by means
of authentication and end-to-end encryption (SSL)
Access control and logging
Protection functions at system level
Open interfaces for access control and cryptographic
functions in user applications
Continuous, independent security log
Predefined security levels for basic protection
Integrated component of the M-Base

215
 Security

Communication and
information security

The direct consequences of targeted, destructive

access to a machine controller or an unintentional
operating error are the same: standstill or even de­
struction of a machine or plant and thus production
stoppage, loss of reputation and money. Therefore,
the main objective is to ensure robustness against
disturbances. Protection of data and communica­
tion as well as the logging of access are preventive
measures which make unauthorized access more
difficult and bring irregularities to light.

Targeted access
Exposed machines and plants are not subject to the
same perimeter protection as enclosed industrial
plants. Hence, wind power plants or biogas plants
are relatively easy to access and the response
times in the event of a detected break-in are high.
High risk in production plants mainly emanates
from legitimized persons. Service staff from the
external service provider or a dismissed employee
who in frustration succumbs to the temptation of a
targeted act of damage to property are two classi­
cal examples.
The targets here are switches, routers and control­
lers with free ports. These can be used for incon-
spicuous disruption or for targeted interception of
communications.

Ethernet

SolutionCenter
Engineering

Secure network services and logs

Device Viewer Access control

System security measures

SCADA
Server / Client User applications

Security Security
HMI / SCADA

Web browser
library log
C, C++, 61131
MES-System

Remote
maintenance

The layer-based security architecture forms multiple security walls around user applications. Each level ­includes
specific security measures that can also be used in user-specific applications.

216
 Security

Control components of Bachmann have various matters of security and are obligated to protect
measures for counteracting targeted access. E ­ ffective their plants accordingly. Comprehensive measu­
­mechanisms are in place for protecting against res embedded in detailed security concepts at all
network overload which ensure stability of the organizational levels have long been established.
­application in the event of denial of service attacks. Protective fencing, own surveillance staff and
Vigorous implementation of end-to-end encryption continuous access controls have been found in
of the communication by SSL renders eavesdropping critical parts of these plants. Control networks
ineffective. User programs use interfaces to current and operating panels were strictly sealed off
cryptographic procedures to encrypt data. ­previously. In the meantime, modern business and
service models require targeted access of other
Critical infrastructures organizational components via Intranet and even
Guided by national and international regulations, externally via Internet.
public utility companies are particularly sensitized in

Access Control includes a powerful module for user and access control. Users and groups can be created by
simple Copy&Paste as well as by integrated inheritance logic thus saving a great deal of time. The clear assign­
ment of system rights allows the specific assignment of rights for each user.

217
 Security

1
3

3 4 1

Management of file and variable rights:

(1) Individual files and variables or entire folders are selectable for the rights management using a browser.
(2) These are presented in a clear tree structure.
(3) Finely grained read and write permissions can be assigned user-related directly in the list using the Inline-
Editing function.
(4) Additionally variables can be limited in the value range.

Defects and operating errors Bachmann provides its controllers with functions
Targeted security management only helps in the case for limiting the bandwidth of the ethernet ports in
of undesirable and potentially destructive access. In­ order to increase the robustness against intentio­
advertent changes to machine parameters, failures of nal and unintentional network disturbances. Real­
network components or misconfigurations of the ma­ time processes are not disturbed by overloading of
chine network are far more frequent, particularly in the network interface.
the protected environment of production plants, but
pose the same security threats in terms of symptoms It is advisable to set up a user and access
and effects. For example, a broadcast storm as a ­ anagement system for each user via Access
m
­result of a faulty network switch, overloads connected Control. This limits any possibilities of manipu­
network clients in the same way as a targeted denial lation centrally according to the least privilege
of service attack. principle, and independent security logging allows
changes to be allocated to individual users. Ope­
Unlike other security measures, the added value of rating errors can thus be detected and warranty
revealing defects can only be achieved if appro­priate cases processed speedily.
protective measures directly affect the controller.

218
 Security

Safety and Security The central part is composed of four predefined

Functional safety requires a high degree of security security levels that can be selected in the security
measures to prevent operating errors. Unnoticed configurator. Behind this are templates which set
changes to the safety programming as well as dan­ the settings within the controller so that certain
gerous interferences during safe operation must be logs and functions are activated or even forbidden
prevented and logged. Safety Control of Bachmann depending on the level.
already warns about any malicious, manipulated
code on the configuration computer and protects Basic protection is gainable in three steps:
against inadvertent changes by means of functions
for pinning software versions. A separate login
Safeguarding the system and network
system on each safety controller allows individually
• setting the security level
restrictable access. The continual logging is tamper- 1 • deactivating unnecessary services
proof and imple-mented redundantly, so that even
• activating logging
in the case of partial destruction of the module, it
will be possible to reproduce the chain of events up
to the f­ailure with a high degree of probability. Limiting access
• defining group rights
Simply secure
2 • creating users
Security measures are only effective if they are also • setting file rights
applied. Bachmann sees it as its task to promote
the total application and dissemination of security Securing user programs
functions even when no comprehensive security • Implementing applications while
concepts exist and the staff are still not security ex­ 3 taking general security aspects into
perts. Simple activation and operation of the exten­ account
sive protective measures ensures that the dangers
of careless operation and simple attacks are already Recommended procedure for safeguarding
minimized even at this early stage. the control

219
 Security

The online security monitor gives comfortable overview:

(1) Details according to logged in users and the token status
(2) Security log entries show details to connections and communication status, e.g. login/logout (3) or assign­
ment of new values to variables (4)

220
 Security

Security
Ethernet
Load limitation Separately adjustable limitation of the read and write workload for each
Ethernet interface;
Protect the machine application against DDoS attacks (Distributed Denial of
Service), Broadcast Storms and defects in the network infrastructure.
Network services and logs
SSL/TLS based network Security standard for the establishment of a secured communication
­communication ­channel at IP-level.
Support (selection):
Bachmann products: Configuration and programming tool SolutionCenter,
WebMI Pro, M1COM, MJCOM
Manufacturer neutral: OPC UA, webserver, file transfer
Server and client The M1 controller can be an SSL server as well as a client.
­authentication The client authentication is also supported in server mode. This is used for
certificate-based authentication of computers, services and users on the M1.
Secured and deactivatable Unnecessary protocols can be deactivated by configuration. This ensures
­services (webserver, OPC- that only used ports are accessible thus reducing the area for attack.
server, FTP, NTP, SMTP …)
Access Control
User Administration Password protected restrictions are configured on a group and user basis for
system access and application rights. Time-restricted access is provided.
Token-based write access The special mechanism guarantees that the token owner is granted
protection ­exclusive write permission. Additionally, prioritization can be assigned based
on the user role. Various degrees of priority can be assigned at user and
group level.
File access File access, i.e. authorization for the read or write operation as well as the
visibility for browse requests can be set at group level. The configuration
allows individual assignment of rights at directory and file level and facilita­
tes this by means of the available inheritance logic.
Variable protection The visibility, read and write access of online available process variables can
be allocated to access rights of the individual user. Mechanism and configu­
ration as with file permissions.
User specific extensions User and access management system as well as the token mechanism
provided can be replaced by user-specific applications. Thus, special policies and
­functions can be implemented and the controls can be integrated smoothly
into existing systems.

221
 Security

Security
System
Enable/disable application Protection against installation of unauthorized programs.
development
Memory protection Application programs are protected at memory level against
write access from other applications.
Protection against malware that want to eavesdrop and manipulate data at
operating system level. Protection against buffer overflows.
Null pointer protection Special protection to prevent manipulations via null pointer exception
­handling.
Security log with archiving Login and logout of users as well as each write access are logged at variable
function level, security-relevant modifications are noted. Timestamp, user, group, old
and new value as well as further details are stored in continuously genera­
ted file archives.
Access is offline, e.g. via a central archiving system, but online is also
­possible via application programs or SCADA systems.
Predefined security levels Four templates for simplifying and shortening the security configuration.

User Application
Access Control The information for logged in users, their session status and security proto­
cols can be accessed from user programs.
Security Library Symmetric, asymmetric encryption procedures, signature and authentication
procedures, block and stream ciphers, SSL/TLS are available to the applica­
tion programs by means of openSSL library.
These functions can be used in PLC in the form of library functions.
Examples of important Symmetric encryption: AES, 3DES
­cryptographic procedures Asymmetric encryption: RSA
and secure methods for net­ hash functions: SHA, RIPEMD, MD5
work communication MAC functions: CBC-MAC, HMAC
Signature algorithms: RSA-PSS, ECDSA
Key transfer process: SSL/TLS (TLS 1.2, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.0,
SSL 3.0)
Certificate variants, data encoding: PKS7, PKS12, x509
Standards, regulations and recommendations
Security in Control Systems The security measures were implemented while taking the following stan­
dards, regulations and recommendations into account:
IEC 62351, IEC 62443, ISA 99, VDI/VDE 2182, FIPS 140, NIST 800 series
Publisher BSI, BDEW, NERC
System prerequisites
Automation equipment M1 CPUs of the MX200 series or better
Engineering PC For system prerequisites see SolutionCenter
Runtime software M-Sys / MxCCore ≥ V3.80
Engineering software M-Base ≥ 3.80
Installation medium Included in M-Base (runtime and engineering components)

222
Integrated. Intuitive. Safe.

Safety technology

Safety – for man as well as machine – plays an increasingly important role

in the world of automation: Machines and plants are becoming ever more
complex and the requirements imposed on functional safety continuously
increase.

Bachmann electronic offers a safety package that is consistently integrated

in the M1 automation system that is designed for the most rigorous safety
requirements. It consists of the programmable SLC284 safety module,
digital I/O modules, and the Safety Developer, and it can be
extended to meet individual needs in accordance with the latest safety
standards (PL e, SIL3, Cat 4). And best of all: In addition to safety,
efficiency is also increased; the intelligent safety technology helps
to significantly lower engineering costs. Through specific diagnostic
possibilities and the fastest possible intervention, availability of the
machine/system is increased and downtimes are reduced.

224
 Safety module & Safety Developer

Integrated safety.

With the safety modules for realization The new programmable safety module,
of functional safety, Bachmann electronic SLC284, and the digital I/O safety
is setting a clear signal for a holistic modules, SDI208 or SDO204, make
and integrated automation solution. The it possible to set up a solution that is
systems presented here not only offer the integrated in the M1 Automation System.
best-possible safety, they also guarantee This solution can be adapted to the
continuity and investment protection. individual requirements and satisfies
the latest safety standards.

Safety processor module

SLC284

Features
16 digital inputs / 8 digital outputs – can be used
redundantly in pairs (PL e / SIL3 / Cat 4)
Programmable in function block language
in accordance with IEC 61131-3
Programming, configuration, monitoring
and debugging per SolutionCenter
Manipulation protection thanks to configurable user
schemes with access and function restrictions
1x RS232 for on-site maintenance access without
developer tools

Digital input module SDI208

Features
Digital input module with two galvanically
separated input groups
16 digital input channels – can be used redundantly
in pairs (PL e / SIL3 / Cat 4)
Each channel can be optionally tested
per test clocking
Cross-circuit detection
Autonomously safe – robust against network
breakdowns

225
For the subsequent safety-relevant safety
engineering steps the SolutionCenter
contains the Safety Developer, which
includes all the required tools for safety-
oriented programming in accordance with
FBD acc. to IEC61131-3 and PLCopen, and
has been developed and certified in close
cooperation with TÜV.

Digital output signal SDO204

Features
Digital output module with two galvanically
separated output groups
8 digital output channels – can be used
redundantly in pairs (PL e / SIL3 / Cat 4)
Autonomously safe – robust against network
breakdowns
Output voltage range +18 .. 34 V DC
2 A per channel

Safety Developer
Engineering tool

Features
Integrated in the SolutionCenter all-in-one engineer-
ing tool
Full-graphic function plan editor
with autorouting
Certified safety modules
in accordance with PLCopen Safety
Standard modules for logical links, timers and
arithmetic operations in accordancen with
EN61131-3
Integrated debugger and monitor - online monitoring
in safe operation

226
 Safety modules

Safety processor module

SLC284
The programmable safety controller SCL284
– ideally integrated in the M1 controller – is
presented as an independent, safe, and modern
safety controller. The Safety Logic Controller is
approved in accordance with the latest safety
norm, IEC61508.
No additional cabling is needed for communication
between the Safety Logic Controller SLC284 and
the safety I/O modules SDI208 and SDO204.
The modules can be separated by several hundred
meters and operated in a distributed manner via
the bus expansion or a FASTBUS.

• 16 digital inputs / 8 digital outputs – can be

used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
• Each output with emergency delay is
configurable in the event of communication lost
• Safety Controller with two independent 32-bit
microcontrollers
• Fastest program cycle 5 ms
• Decentralized I/O via FASTBUS or bus expansion
with SDI208 or SDO204
• All safety I/O states can be used by the M1
controller
• Safety programming via SolutionCenter
• Galvanic isolation between the groups
• Galvanic isolation from the system bus
• Operating mode selector switch
• Operating status display »SAFE«, »PROG«,
»TEST«, »ERROR«
• Status display for each channel via LED
• Programming via independent serial interface or
via controller

Item Item no.

SLC284 00014273-00
SLC284 00017465-00

227
 Safety modules

SLC284
Processor
CPU 2x LPC2468, 72 MHz, 32 bit
Controller
Programming via controller (I/O bus) or serial interface (COM)
Number of independent safety 1
programs per SLC
Program cycle minimal 5 ms
I/O expansion via SDI208 or SDO204 modules
Digital inputs
Quantity 16 digital inputs - can be used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
Input voltage range (H) 15 .. 34 V DC
Input voltage range (L) -34 .. +5 V DC
Input delay (normally) HW 300 µs
Input delay (normally) SW 1 ms with deactivated test clocking
Input type according to type 1
IEC61131-2 input current 3.5 mA at 24 V DC
at least
Status display (LED) green
Error monitoring internal function monitoring
external test clocking optional
Digital outputs
Quantity 8 digital outputs - can be used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
Output voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Output current per channel 0.5 A nominal
(max.)
Total current per group (max.) 2A
Delay 0 to 1 max. 35 µs at full load
Delay 1 to 0 max. 155 µs at full load
Output groups 2, electronic fuse
Status display (LED) green
Switching frequency 500 Hz
(max., ohmic load)
Error monitoring short circuit, overload, inadequate or excess voltage
of the power supply
Time-delayed emergency shut- each output individual from 0 .. 1800 s configurable
off (resolution 100 ms);
Emergency shut-off is activated in the event of communication lost e.g.
cable break or failure in the supply voltage

228
 Safety modules

SLC284
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from the 500 V
system
Galvanic isolation between 500 V
groups
Internal power supply Backplanes BS2xx
Current consumption internal 5 V / 600 mA via backplane
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection yes
Input voltage 24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Current consumption normally 95 mA at +24 VDC + Σ current consumption
of the encoders and sensors
Connection technology
Connection technology screw or spring terminal,
writable and codable plug
Standards
Machine safety IEC61508: Functional safety – draft of complex E/E/PE
safety components
Approved for ISO13849: Safety of Machinery
IEC62061: Functional safety machine-related E/E/PE systems
IEC61511: Functional safety equipment and process industry
EN954
Product standard IEC61131-2
UL508
Additional features
Status display via LEDs
Operating mode adjustable via hex switch
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -20 .. +60 °C fanless -30 .. +60 °C fanless
Relative humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C -40 .. +85 °C
Relative humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
SLC284 Safety CPU module; integrated digital input/output; SIL3/PLe: 8x DI
24V; 4x DO 24V / 0.5A; (SIL2/PLd: 16x DI, 8x DO); 6ms cycle time;
RS232; operating standalone or with CPU modul
SLC284 like SLC284; ColdClimate ( )

229
 Safety modules

Safety input modules

SDI208

The safety input module SDI208 adds an

additional 8 input channels to the safety logic
controller SLC284. A homogeneous total system
is created through independent and safe
integration in the M1 controller. Through the
free choice of the slot – either directly beside
the safety controller, through bus expansion,
or several hundred meters away through the
FASTBUS – the safety system can be optimally
adapted to the distributed requirements and
existing infrastructure of the system.
The input module, SDI208, is approved under
the latest safety standard IEC61508. The input
module can be easily integrated in the safety
application, comparable with a standard I/O
module – as the proven »SolutionCenter«
development platform offers the easiest
configuration, most flexible type of programming,
and a safe simulation via easily combinable
PLC-Open function modules. All variables,
and states of the SDI208 safety input
module are accessible in all other machine
program languages (PLC, C/C++, Java);
visualization is also available and makes
cumbersome parallel wiring unnecessary.

• 16 digital inputs – can be used redundantly

in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
• Safe monitoring of the inputs with redundant
32-bit microcontrollers
• Several SDI208 modules per controller possible
• All safety I/O states can be used
by M1 controller
• Safety programming via SolutionCenter
• Galvanic isolation between the groups
• Galvanic isolation from the system
• Operating state display »SAFE«
• Status display for each channel via LED

Item Item no.

SDI208 00014544-00
SDI208 00017459-00

230
 Safety modules

SDI208
Digital inputs
Quantity 16 digital inputs - can be used redundantly in pairs
(PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
Input voltage range (H) 15 .. 34 V DC
Input voltage range (L) -34 .. +5 V DC
Input delay (normally) HW 300 µs
Input delay (normally) SW 1 ms with deactivated test clocking
Input type according type 1
to IEC61131-2
Input current at least 3.5 mA at 24 V DC
Status display (LED) green
Error monitoring internal function monitoring
external test clocking optional
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from the system 500 V
Galvanic isolation between groups 500 V
Internal power supply Backplanes BS2xx
Current consumption internal 5 V / 600 mA via backplane
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection yes
Input voltage 24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Current consumption normally 65 mA at 24 VDC + Σ current consumption
of the encoders and sensors
Connection technology
Connection technology screw or spring terminal
writable and codable plug
Standards
Machine safety IEC61508 Functional safety draft of complex E/E/PE
safety components
Approved for ISO13849: Safety of Machinery
IEC62061: Functional safety machine-related E/E/PE systems
IEC61511: Functional safety equipment and process industry
EN954
Product standard IEC 61131-2 ... UL508
Additional features
Status display via LEDs
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -20 .. +60 °C fanless -30 .. +60 °C fanless
Relative humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C -40 .. +85 °C
Relative humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Model variants
SDI208 Safety digital input module; SIL3/PLe: 8x DI 24V; (SIL2/PLd: 16x DI)
SDI208 like SDI208; ColdClimate ( )

231
 Safety modules

Safety output modules

SDO204

The safety output module, SDO204, adds an

additional 4 output channels to the safety logic
controller, SLC284, and a homogeneous overall
system is created through the independent and
safe inclusion in the M1 controller. Through the
free choice of the slot – either directly beside
the safety controller, through bus expansion,
or several hundred meters away through the
FASTBUS – the safety system can be optimally
adapted to the distributed requirements and
existing infrastructure of the system.
The input module, SDO204, is approved
under the latest safety standard IEC61508.
The input module can be easily integrated
in the overall safety application, comparable
with a standard I/O module – as the proven
»SolutionCenter« development platform offers
the easiest configuration, most flexible type
of programming, and a safe simulation via
easily combinable PLC-Open function modules.
All variables and states of the SDO204 safety
output module are accessible in other machine
program languages (PLC, C/C++, Java), however
the visualization is also available and makes
bothersome parallel wiring unnecessary.

• 8 digital outputs – can be used redundantly

in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
• Each output with emergency delay is
configurable in the event of communication lost
• Safe monitoring of the inputs with redundant
32-bit microcontrollers
• Several SDO208 units per controller possible
• All safety I/O states can be used
by M1 controller
• Safety programming via SolutionCenter
• Galvanic isolation between the groups
• Galvanic isolation from the system
• Operating state display »SAFE«
• Status display for each channel via LED

Item Item no.

SDO204 00014545-00
SDO204 00017462-00

232
 Safety modules

SDO204
Digital outputs
Quantity 8 digital outputs - can be used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
Output voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Output current per channel 2 A nominal
Total current per group (max.) 8 A (derating from 40 °C ambient temperature)
Delay 0 to 1 max. 35 µs at full load
Delay 1 to 0 max. 155 µs at full load
Output groups 2, electronic fuse
Status display (LED) green
Switching frequency 500 Hz
(max., ohmic load)
Error monitoring short circuit, overload, inadequate or excess voltage of the power supply
Time-delayed emergency shut- each output individual from 0 .. 1800 s configurable
off (resolution 100 ms);
Emergency shut-off is activated in the event of communication lost e.g.
cable break or failure in the supply voltage
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from 500 V
the system
Galvanic isolation 500 V
between groups
Internal power supply Backplanes BS2xx
Current consumption internal 5 V / 250 mA via backplane
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection yes
Input voltage 24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption normally 70 mA at +24 VDC + Σ current consumption of the encoders
Connection technology
Connection technology screw or spring terminal
writable and codable plug
Standards
Machine safety IEC61508 Functional safety draft of complex E/E/PE
safety components
Approved for ISO13849: Safety of Machinery
IEC62061: Functional safety machine-related E/E/PE systems
IEC61511: Functional safety equipment and process industry
EN954
Product standard IEC 61131-2
UL508

233
 Safety modules

SDO204
Additional features
Status display via LEDs
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -20 .. +60 °C fanless -30 .. +60 °C fanless
Relative humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C -40 .. +85 °C
Relative humidity storage 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Elevation limit 2000 m above sea level (use), 3000 m above sea level
(storage & transport)
Model variants
SDO204 Safety digital output module; SIL3/PLe: 4x DO 24V / 2A; (SIL2/PLd:
8x DO)
SDO204 like SDO204; ColdClimate ( )

* Derating of 40oC ambient temperature

I [A]

0 T [°C]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

234
 Safety Developer

Safety Developer
Engineering tool

For the more safety-relevant, engineering steps

the SolutionCenter contains the Safety Developer
that includes all tools required for safety-
conformant programming in accordance with
EN61508 andb PLCopen. Safety Developer has
been developed and certified in close collaboration
with TÜV. All methods required for logging
and the verification obligation of the machine
manufacturer are integral components: password
management, fail-safe program transmission,
tamper-proof logging on the target device,
documentation of the safety program, and all
software components used, unique identification
of the safety modules, and the programming itself.

• Integrated in the SolutionCenter all-in-one engi- •B  idirectional exchange of values

neering tool between secure and non-secure controller
• Full-graphic function plan editor • Unique identification of the safe hardware
with autorouting • Configuration of the clocked
• Certified safety modules self-monitoring of inputs/outputs
in accordance with PLCopen Safety • Communication to safe hardware
• Standard modules for logical links, timers and via Ethernet (M1) or serial
arithmetic operations • Certified redundant program download
in accordancen with EN61131-3 • Logging of the acceptance state in PDF format
• Color coding of secure and unsecure signal flow • Direct connection to version management
• Grouping of circuitry parts for repeat use • Online monitorning of all I/Os also
(compound) in safe operating mode
• Adjustable test depth for the project translation
• Variable monitoring, value simulation and break
points
• Open programming interfaces (PLC, C, C++) for
e.g. online monitoring

235
 Safety Developer

Programming in accordance project via a browser. The execution sequence of

with PLCopen Safety the modules is presented graphically and can be
corrected by the user. Redundant hardware inputs
The safety application is programmed in a free- are summarized via equivalence or antivalence
graphic function plan editor (Safety Editor) in blocks and subsequently presented as a safe
accordance with EN61131-3. The module set signal in the program. The data types, bool,
includes a library of safety modules that have integer, and time, are supported.
been strictly implemented, tested, and certified in
accordance with the PLCopen safety standard.
For the logic, additionally required standard
modules, such as timers, arithmetic, and logical
operations are available. The application can
be organized in multiple separated functional
units and sub programs in order to structure the
program. Unsafe input and output signals from
the control system can be added to the safety

236
 Safety Developer

Visibility in the standard program User-specific templates

The transparent exchange of signals functions A logical circuit that is structured from a group of
in both directions. In the Safety Developer you basic modules can be put together and given an
configure which values – irrespective of the interface in the project for a function group. Thus
states of the safe I/Os – should also be visible separate user-specific function blocks (templates) can
in the unsafe world. Thus intermediate results be created and used in the project multiple times.
in networks and the status of modules can be These groups or even complete networks can also by
presented in a visualization, recorded with the transferrred from one project into the next project.
Scope, or evaluated in a PLC program. Thus there
are extensive diagnostic possibilities and a high
level of operating convenience.

Safe and unsafe paths

Signals from the standard sequential program and
from the I/O modules of the control system can
be used in the safety program as unsafe input and
output signals. The classification of a signal as
safe or unsafe is presented with color coding.

237
 Safety Developer

Tracking changes Logging

In the Safety Developer version management is an
integral component – regardless of the logging and The verification obligation is supported in different
verification obligation. The version management ways. For logging of acceptance, a project report
database is operated directly from the project can be generated that also presents the entire
navigator. A local history is always kept automatically, program code graphically. The tamper-proof log
which enables reversal of changes even without a book of the safety controller logs each safety-rele-
genuine version management system. Naturally vant change in the system, such as the download
Undo/Redo functions are also available. of a changed program. Thus any manipulation can
be traced with user name, date, and time.

Program verification Optionally the safety program can be stored on

The program for execution on the target system is not the safety controller and can be opened and
compiled, but rather is translated into a script that is further processed from the controller. Additional
checked and executed redundantly by the firmware of user-specific information, such as author, version
the target system. Nevertheless the Safety Developer history, and additional comments can be stored
can detect and display possible error sources in the for each network.
code when the script is generated.
Hardware configuration

Modularity In addition to the tools for variable selection,

programming, and logging, the safe hardware
can also be directly configured in the Safety
Developer. This includes not only assignment
of unique channel names, but particularly also
allocation of the controller to the project, the
adding of additional safe I/O modules, and
specification of test intervals for clocked lines,
which then are tested automatically by the
hardware for short circuit, cross-connection, and
interference voltage.
Safety-relevant, required unique module
identification that excludes the possibility of
swapping modules after a service deployment is
also executed directly in the Safety Developer.
The Safety Developer takes the flexible requirements Communication between Safety Developer and the
in today's industry into account through its modular control system for program download, diagnosis
project management. FBD networks, and also and configuration is executed conveniently and
additional safe I/O modules of the project, can be in broadband via the Ethernet Interface of the
activated depending on the expansion stage, signals M1 control system. Alternatively, communication
can be connected to different sources and potentially can also be executed directly with the Safety
susceptible equipment, thus a project for maximum Controller via a serial RS232 interface, which also
machine expansion can be created and tested. enables use of the Safety Controller as a stand-
Adaptation to the real degree of expansion is achieved alone solution without a surrounding control
through the bringing together of the desired parts. system.
Commissioning of individual machine parts is also
possible in this manner.

238
239
Failure-free. Flexible. Economical.

Redundancy – maximum availability

ensures productivity

Automation devices from plant, transport and mechanical engineering are

no longer unthinkable. They control and regulate mission critical systems -
often entirely stand-alone or with requirements that manual operation can
no longer perform. Maximum reliability and ranges of solutions for high-
availability applications call for increasingly higher demands on productivity
right up to 27/7 availability.
Proven ruggedness and exceptional service life data are are often insufficient
here. Effective measures against network, sensor and wiring outages, as well
as statistically rare component part failure, are required.

Bachmann electronic with its scalable redundancy products for the

proven M1 automation system always provides the right solution. The
redundancy product series upgrades the significant ruggedness and
availability of the hardware modules universal fault tolerance. The software-
only implementation based on redundant Ethernet real-time networking
guarantees compatibility without special and expensive redundancy hardware
and makes upgrading of existing applications possible.

240
 Redundancy

The right solution for each application

Hot-standby redundancy Network redundancy

Maximum reliability thanks to fully Using the basic redundancy version, critical
automatic variable exchange and bumpless transmission links are protected against
application switchover. Ideal where outages interruptions due to mechanical damage
are economically unacceptable and for and network equipment outages.
technical challenges like in rapid control
applications.

Warm-standby redundancy
Values interchange is supported by
network redundancy. Adjusts to redundant
data recording and for simple and less
critical redundancy applications.

Common features
Redundancy cycles up to 1 ms possible*
Automatic switchover between variables and process
value sources within one PLC cycle
Support of fully autonomous, dual communication
guarantees maximum reliability with freely selectable
transmission medium (copper/optical fiber)
Integration of configuration, monitoring and
programming in the engineering tool SolutionCenter
Redundancy networking on Ethernet basis, full
support of TCP/IP-based parallel communication
Networking topology freely selectable: star, bus,
ring and combinations  easily adaptable to existing
network
Master CPUs: all processor modules from the MPC,
MC, MH series
Retrofitable and upgradable without CPU exchange,
application of standard components
Support of standard applications in addition to
redundancy applications, even with diverse cycle
times
Standard operating range of -30°C … +60°C, with
short-term Temperature peaks of -40°C … +70°C
with condensation present when using cold climate
modules

* tested with CPUs of the MPC series; limit value

subject to CPU type, memory available, application
size, number of exchangeable variables, network
bandwidth available, network and CPU load via non-
redundant applications

241
 Redundancy

Hot-standby redundancy

Master Master Features

CPU A CPU B
Two master CPUs
Automatic matching of the master CPUs
Slave Bumpless switchover
Station 1
Chronological synchronization of all stations
Configuration and monitoring in the SolutionCenter
Slave
Station 2 Expanded diagnostic and programming interfaces for
monitoring and analysis of redundancy status
Operator Network redundancy included
Terminal
Freely adjustable switchover time, automatic
switchover in case of error

Warm-standby redundancy

Master Master Features

CPU A CPU B
Two master CPUs
Diagnostic interface for monitoring and analyzing the
Slave
redundancy status
Station 1 Slaves decide from which CPU the data packet is
applied (voter)
Slave
Station 2 Switching time configurable
Matching of the master CPUs not integrated
Operator
Terminal

Network redundancy

Features
Master
CPU
One master CPU
Redundant communication (cyclic and non-cyclic
Slave communication)
Station 1
Easy configuration in development environment,
Slave integrated diagnostics (status, quality)
Station 2
Programming interface, libraries and system
variables for easy creation of applications
Operator
Terminal Slaves work as smart substations
Network switchover in the same PLC cycle

242
 Redundancy

Hot-standby redundancy

Master Master Mission-critical systems, applications in harsh

CPU A CPU B
environments and facilities where even short
outages, e.g. owing to cost restraints, are
Slave not tolerated are hot-standby redundancy's
Station 1
main fields of activity. In addition, control
engineering applications with their requirement
Slave
Station 2 of smooth switchover, i.e. no deviation between
values when switching the master CPU, are
Operator executable in this redundancy version too.
Terminal

With redundancy on all system levels (i.e. hardware,

system software, application programming and
maintenance, monitoring interfaces) hot-standby
redundancy provides maximum reliability with
outstanding convenience at the same time.

The full integration of configuration, programming

and monitoring in Bachmann tools shortens
application creation and minimizes deviations with
respect to everyday standard operating sequences.
At the same time, risks in the course of maintenance
operations, error corrections and application
updates decrease during the process in operation.

Hot-standby redundancy combines the

highest redundancy technology and the best
performance possible with the customary
ruggedness of every Bachmann module.

Hot-standby redundancy enhances

network redundancy by the following
attributes, among others:
• Fully automatic matching of process variables
• Automatic failover upon detecting internal errors
• Integrated self-tests for checking system status
• Automatic system matching (system
software, configuration, applications)
• Automatic application synchronization
(variance < 200 µs)

Item Item no.

M-HS-REDU RT License to operate a hot-standby redundancy on two controller 00019829-63
CPUs as redundant main controllers (includes 2 licenses). Allows
any number of IO stations (slaves) to connect redundantly to
both main controllers (includes network redundancy).

243
 Redundancy

• Millisecond-precise synchronization of all stations

• Network switching time freely
configurable (0 … 10 PLC cycles)
• Blumpless switchover
• Redundancy programming support
in M-PLC (IEC 61131-3)
• Debugging and forcing of variables in
redundant applications (M-PLC)
• Resistant to single-fault events, additionally many
multi-fault scenarios are overridden on a continuous
basis

Integration in the SolutionCenter

• Applying, monitoring and deleting
redundancy devices
• Extra support in Solution Navigator and
Device Manager for configuring, monitoring
and logging redundant applications
• Textual and graphical redundancy status displays
• Virtual redundancy devices with the option
of applying and manipulating redundancy
configurations and applications
• Redundancy master status information
• Device designation
• Current redundancy status of the entire system
• CPU information
• System software information
• Network information
• Redundancy application status information
• Current redundancy status
(REDUNDANT/SINGLE/ERROR)
• Runtime state (RUN/STOP/ERROR)
• Error status codes
• Synchronization status
• Cycle time
• Maintenance interface for redundancy
systems integrated (execution of commands
on both master CPUs at the same time)
• All commands and monitoring mechanisms
are available to the operator as open user
interfaces and/or as system variables.

244
 Redundancy

Hot-standby redundancy
Rationale/Characteristic
High availability system type Hot-standby redundancy with local I/O stations (1oo2 voting
integrated)
CPU redundancy yes (synchronization and self-monitoring automatic)
Network redundancy included
I/O redundancy possible
Sensor redundancy possible
Switchover bumpless
Continuous dual-channel ability yes
Communication redundancy yes
Processing units (recommendation) Master: M1 standard CPUs of the MPC, MC, MH families or better
Slave: M1 standard CPUs of the MX, MPC, MC, MH families or better
I/O peripheral via MX CPU all from M1 standard module portfolio
Use of special hardware no (straight software solution and standard Ethernet)
Topology/Networking
Protocol basis Ethernet IEEE 802.3q, Ethertype 0x892D
Communication protocol bluecom with redundancy enhancement (100% IEEE 802.3q
compatible)
Media redundancy yes (2-channel, galvanically separated Ethernet networks)
Switches industrial standard managed switch (or unmanaged switch with
­ ppropriate configuration)
a
Topologies Star, bus, ring, mesh
Ring redundancy possible via parallel application of MRP, STP and RSTP
Dimension in compliance with IEEE 802.3 - max. 2000 m per network section
with fiber optic connection via FCS214 module
CPUs spatially separable yes (see Dimension)
Time synchronization integrated in network protocol
Number of I/O stations more than 100
Smart substations yes, for example, I/O stations can execute local applications for:
emergency operation, load separation or local logging
Parallel data traffic yes, possible (Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP, FTP,
video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS, ...)
Interfaces
I/O peripheral M1 standard module portfolio
Redundancy network bluecom network variables
Field buses Gateway function for CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus, EtherCAT
via application possible
SCADA / control station & PDA Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA,
Modbus TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
IT protocols see M1 software (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, SMTP, … and security versions)
Configuration/Programming
Configuration SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming M-PLC: IEC 61131-3 (IL, LD, FBD, ST, AS, SFC)

245
 Redundancy

Hot-standby redundancy
Configuration/Programming
Editor CoDeSys
Redundancy download Automatic
Redundancy debugging yes
Redundancy synchronization automatic (process variables, system software)
Manual switchover yes
Switchover: triggering by user
Failover: automatic via software
Multitasking yes (one redundant task permissible per PLC application, total up to
three independent redundancy tasks)
Mixed operation yes (non-redundant, non-synchronized applications can run parallel
to redundancy applications)
Diagnostics/Monitoring
I/O live display SolutionCenter
Redundancy status yes
Error status yes
Diagnostic user interface (API) yes, integrated
Statistic user interface (API) yes, integrated
Network monitor SolutionCenter
Network analysis yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated
automatically on the controller)
Distributed logging yes (synchronized, granularity 1 ms)
Performance data
Master cycle time 1 … 1000 ms*
I/O cycle time Minimum 200 µs for non-redundant applications
1 ms… 1000 ms for redundant applications*
I/O frame works more than 100 stations*
Number of channels unrestricted (*, **) - typically 400 .. 600
channels per station (1/3 analog, 2/3 digital)
Synchronization volume max 120*1400 byte
Switching time adjustable from 0 .. 10 cycles
Time precision < 1ms *
Installation
Installation medium CD ROM or network
Installation tool SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems possible via software / new CF card required
License protection Data CF of the master CPUs is integrated dongle
System prerequisites
Controller equipment M1 CPUs of the MX200 family or better (minimum 2 Ethernet
interfaces onboard)
Network 2x Ethernet 100 MBit/s or Gbit/s, managed switch
Software MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher

* Limit value subject to CPU type, memory available, application size, number of exchangeable
variables, network bandwidth available and network and CPU load via non-redundant
applications
** No program-technical restriction. 246
 Redundancy

Warm-standby redundancy

Master Master For applications where reliable recording of critical

CPU A CPU B
data has priority, warm-standby redundancy is the
preferred solution. Good support when configuring
Slave and monitoring the actual CPU redundancies helps
Station 1
during the rapid development of applications for
Slave which bumpless switchover is not required.
Station 2 Continuous operation during maintenance,
system updating and application changes
Operator
Terminal is also possible in this version.
If a master CPU for maintenance work
is disconnected from the network, real-
time processing is only affected to a
minimum. The data transmission continues
seamlessly and from the perspective of the
receiving stations no packets are lost.
The matching of process variables in the
master CPU has to be resolved on the
application level, which means extra effort
and expense and increased complexity vis-à-
vis hot-standby redundancy (see Fig. 1).

Warm-standby redundancy provides the

qualities of network redundancy and
the following advantages as well:

• CPU redundancy
• Switching time freely configurable
(0 … 10 PLC cycles)
• Selection of the data master integrated
in end points (voter), the fastest
switching times possible as a result
• Diagnostic interface for monitoring and analyzing
the redundancy status in the SolutionCenter
• Automatic matching of the master CPUs not
integrated  switchover not bumpless

Item Item no.

M-NW-REDU RT License to operate a network redundancy communication ma- 00019828-63
ster on one controller CPU. Allows any number of IO stations
(slaves) to connect redundantly over the network.
Two network redundancy licenses are necessary for warm-
standby operation (for each master-cpu one license).

247
 Redundancy

Master CPU A Master CPU B Master CPU A Master CPU B

Network 1 A B A B A B Network 1 B B B

Network 2 A B A B Network 2 B B B

B B B B B B B B
A A A A

Slave Station 1 Slave Station 2 Slave Station 1 Slave Station 2

Fig.1 Switchover of the active CPU within a PLC cycle, e.g. cycle time 1 ms – switchover ≤ 1 ms

Warm-standby redundancy
Rationale/Characteristic
High availability system type Warm-standby redundancy with decentral I/O (1oo2 voting
integrated)
CPU redundancy yes (no automatic synchronization and self-monitoring)
Network redundancy included
I/O redundancy possible
Sensor redundancy possible
Switchover not bumpless
Continuous dual-channel ability yes
Communication redundancy yes
Processing units (recommendation) Master: M1 standard CPUs of the MPC, MC, MH families or better
Slave: M1 standard CPUs of the MX, MPC, MC, MH families or better
I/O peripheral via MX CPU all from M1 standard module portfolio
Use of special hardware no (straight software solution and standard Ethernet)
Topology/Networking
Protocol basis Ethernet IEEE 802.3q, Ethertype 0x892D
Communication protocol bluecom with redundancy enhancement (100% IEEE 802.3q
compatible)
Media redundancy yes (2-channel, galvanically separated Ethernet networks)
Switches industrial standard managed switch (or unmanaged switch with
­ ppropriate configuration)
a
Topologies Star, bus, ring, mesh
Ring redundancy possible via parallel application of MRP, STP and RSTP
Dimension in compliance with IEEE 802.3 - max. 2000 m per network section
with fiber optic connection via FCS214 module
CPUs spatially separable yes (see Dimension)
Time synchronization integrated in network protocol
Number of I/O stations more than 100
Smart substations yes, for example I/O stations can execute local applications for:
emergency operation or load separation or local logging
Parallel data traffic yes, possible (Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP, FTP,
video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS, ...)

248
 Redundancy

Warm-standby redundancy
Interfaces
I/O peripheral M1 standard module portfolio
Redundancy network bluecom network variables
Field buses Gateway function for CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus, EtherCAT
via application possible
SCADA / control station & PDA Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA,
Modbus TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
IT protocols see M1 software (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, SMTP, … and security versions)
Configuration/Programming
Configuration SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming M-PLC: IEC 61131-3 (IL, LD, FBD, ST, AS, SFC)
Editor CoDeSys
Redundancy download Automatic
Redundancy debugging yes
Redundancy synchronization manual
Manual switchover to integrate by user
Multitasking to integrate by user
Mixed operation yes (non-redundant, non-synchronized applications can run parallel
to redundancy applications)
Diagnostics/Monitoring
I/O live display SolutionCenter
Redundancy status yes (restricted to network redundancy)
Error status yes
Diagnostic user interface (API) yes, integrated
Statistic user interface (API) yes, integrated
Network monitor SolutionCenter
Network analysis yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated automati-
cally on the controller)
Performance data
Master cycle time 1…1000 ms*
I/O cycle time Minimum 200 µs for non-redundant applications
1 ms… 1000 ms for redundant applications*
I/O frame works more than 100 stations*
Number of channels unrestricted (*, **) - typically 400 .. 600 chan-
nels per station (1/3 analog, 2/3 digital)
Switching time adjustable from 0 .. 10 cycles

* Limit value subject to CPU type, memory available, application size, number of exchangeable
variables, network bandwidth available and network and CPU load via non-redundant
applications
** No program-technical restriction.
249
 Redundancy

Warm-standby redundancy
Installation
Installation medium CD ROM or network
Installation tool SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems possible via software / new CF card required
License protection Data CF of the master CPUs is integrated dongle
System prerequisites
Controller equipment M1 CPUs of the MX200 series or better (min. 2 Ethernet interfaces
onboard)
Network 2x Ethernet 100 MBit/s or Gbit/s, managed switch
Software MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher

250
 Redundancy

Network redundancy

Cable break and outage or misconfiguration

Master
CPU of network equipment are frequent causes of
failure in the daily automation routine. Searching
Slave for errors in the process often proves to be
Station 1
expensive and difficult. In doing so, however, little
Slave
carelessnesses hide the risk of longer production
Station 2 stoppages and economically relevant outages.
The introduction of redundant real-time
Operator
networking makes separate cable routes
Terminal
possible. In conjunction with the simultaneous
transmission of all data packets on both network
lines, single failures on the transmission
line no longer have the effect of disrupting
communication and therefore automation.

The product „network redundancy“ fulfills these

qualities precisely by means of a combination
of media and communication redundancies.
Even in the case of an error, no data packets
to the receiving stations (master or slave) are
lost in the process (see Fig. 1). Integrated
self-monitoring and diagnostic interfaces
draw attention to transmission errors and
make finding their location easier.

The network redundancy is optimized

for real-time capabilities, compatibility,
ruggedness and performance. Conformity
with Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3 guarantees
the cost-effective networking of more than
one hundred redundancy stations*.

• Switch-over time ≤ 1 PLC cycle

• Real-time network fully Ethernet
compatible (IEEE 802.3q)
• Monitoring and diagnostics of
errors via SolutionCenter

Item Item no.

M-NW-REDU RT License to operate a network redundancy communication ma- 00019828-63
ster on one controller CPU. Allows any number of IO stations
(slaves) to connect redundantly over the network.

251
 Redundancy

Master CPU A
• Programming interfaces, libraries and
system variables for data transmission and
communication monitoring in IEC 61131-3
• Prioritized redundancy data transmission Network 1

makes parallel communication via Network 2

IP-based protocols possible
• Bandwidth limit integrated
• Connection of terminals via TCP/IP

Slave Station

Fig. 1 In case of an error, no data packets to the receiving

stations are lost.

Network redundancy
Rationale/Characteristics
High availability system type Communication and media redundancy (1oo2 voting integrated)
CPU redundancy no
Network redundancy yes
Switchover 0 ms
Continuous dual-channel ability yes
Communication redundancy yes
Processing units (recommendation) Master: M1 standard CPUs of the MPC, MC, MH families or better
Slave: M1 standard CPUs of the MX, MPC, MC, MH families or better
I/O peripheral via MX CPU all from M1 standard module portfolio
Use of special hardware no (straight software solution and standard Ethernet)
Topology/Networking
Protocol basis Ethernet IEEE 802.3q, Ethertype 0x892D
Communication protocol bluecom with redundancy enhancement (100% IEEE 802.3q
compatible)
Media redundancy yes (2-channel, galvanically separated Ethernet networks)
Switches industrial standard managed switch (or unmanaged switch with
­appropriate configuration)
Topologies Star, bus, ring, mesh
Ring redundancy possible via parallel application of MRP, STP and RSTP
Dimension in compliance with IEEE 802.3 - max. 2000 m per network section
with fiber optic connection via FCS214 module
CPUs spatially separable yes (see Dimension)
Time synchronization integrated in network protocol
Number of I/O stations more than 100
Smart substations yes, I/O stations can execute local applications for:
emergency operation, load separation or local logging
Parallel data traffic yes, possible (Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP, FTP,
video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS, ...)

252
 Redundancy

Network redundancy
Interfaces
I/O peripheral M1 standard module portfolio
Redundancy network bluecom network variables
Field buses Gateway function for CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus, EtherCAT
via application possible
SCADA / control station & PDA Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA,
Modbus TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
IT protocols see M1 software (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, SMTP, … and security versions)
Configuration/Programming
Configuration SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming M-PLC: IEC 61131-3 (IL, LD, FBD, ST, AS, SFC)
Editor CoDeSys
Diagnostics/Monitoring
Redundancy status yes
Error status yes
Diagnostic user interface (API) yes, integrated
Statistic user interface (API) yes, integrated
Network monitor SolutionCenter
Network analysis yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated
automatically on the controller)
Performance data
Master cycle time 1…1000 ms*
I/O cycle time Minimum 200 µs for non-redundant applications
1 ms… 1000 ms for redundant applications*
I/O frame works more than 100 stations*
Number of channels unrestricted (*, **) -
typically 400 .. 600 channels per station (1/3 analog, 2/3 digital)
Installation
Installation medium CD ROM or network
Installation tool SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems possible via software / new CF card required
License protection Data CF of the master CPUs is integrated dongle
System prerequisites
Automation equipment M1 CPUs of the MX200 family or better (minimum 2 Ethernet
interfaces onboard)
Network 2x Ethernet 100 MBit/s or Gbit/s, managed switch
Software MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher

* Limit value subject to CPU type, memory available, application size, number of exchangeable
variables, network bandwidth available and network and CPU load via non-redundant
applications
** No program-technical restriction
253
Redundancy

254
255
Individual. Attractive. Ergonomic.

HMI devices

We have devoted 20 years of, what is now, our 40-year company history
to the areas of »Human Machine Interfaces«, abbreviated as HMIs.
Always oriented to the specific needs of our business partners and the
target industries, Bachmann electronic offers a complete product line
of visualization systems in different performance classes and for a wide
variety of implementation areas.

All HMIs are developed and manufactured in our main facility in Feldkirch
in Austria. In order to offer our customers the highest level of investment
protection possible, all components are selected by our development team
according to the premises of long-term availability and stablity.
To acheive this, the experienced engineers use industrial-grade components
exclusively. In addition, every visualization device is subjected to a 48-hour
run-in test in the climate chamber prior to delivery, and the specified
operating temperature range is run through several times.

With M1 webMI pro Bachmann is offering a state-of-the-art visualization

solution that supplements the HMIs. All compatible HMIs come as standard
with the necessary interfaces and software components.

256
 Operator terminals

The optimal operator terminal for every application.

With the series OT100, OT200 and gets a »self-contained«, i.e. full-fledged
OT1300 operator terminals, Bachmann 5.7" terminal based on PC technology
electronic offers operator terminals with embedded Linux as the operating
in different performance classes. The system. The brand new Advanced class
devices of the Essential class, OT100, OT1300 series with the Intel’s latest
are display devices that are primarily processors and integrated solid state
designed for simple text-based disk (SSD) or alternatively with AMD
presentation in conjunction with G-T40E Dualcore processor – is the
a powerful M1 CPU. With the devices of ideal application for requirements where
the Inter­mediate class, OT200, the user high performance capability paired with

Operator terminal
OT100 series

Features
Display: 4.2” STN Bluemode
Processor: 72 MHz 32 bit
RAM: 64 kB internal
Interfaces: RS232/422
Project planning: Vis Designer, PLC blocks

Operator terminal
OT200 series

Features
Display: 5.7” QVGA, 5.7” VGA, color TFT,
opt. touch screen
Processor: AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM: 512 MB
Compact Flash: ≥ UDMA 2 GB
Operating system: embedded Linux
Interfaces: Ethernet, USB, RS232
Project planning: Vis Designer, Java programming

257
shallow mounting depth and different typical marine features, such as internal
screen diagonals are demanded. signal encoders, a floating relay output,
For visualization under extreme etc. In conjunction with Bachmann's
climatic conditions, condensation-proof own project planning tool, Vis Designer,
»ColdClimate« devices are available visualizations can be quickly and easily
in all performance classes. Devices for implemented with all device series.
use in marine applications (indicated in Consistent application of industrial-
the product designation with »M«) have grade components guarantees long-term
a galvanically isolated supply voltage availability and thus investment security.
and, depending on the model, they have

Operator terminal
OT1300 series

Features
Display: 10.4" VGA / 12.1" SVGA / 15" XGA / 19"
SXGA color TFT, opt. touch screen
Processor: Intel i7 2x 1.7 GHz
Intel Celeron 847E 2x 1.1 GHz
AMD G-T40E 2x 1.0 GHz
RAM: 2 GB DDR3 or 4 GB DDR3
Ultrafast CFast mass memory
Interfaces: 1x GBit Ethernet, 2x or 4x USB 2.0
Standard operating temperature: 0 ... 60 °C, fanless
Operating system: Linux embedded
Windows 7 embedded
Project management: M1 webMI pro, custom

258
 Operator terminals

Operator terminal OT100 series

The devices are equipped with a full graphic

4.2" STN display. With use of UTF-8 character
coding many lines of Asiatic and Cryillic
characters can be displayed. The brightness
of the LED backlighting can be controlled with
the PLC program or via the input elements.
With the ability to operate at temperatures
from -30° to +60 °C, these terminals
are predestined for use under extreme
conditions where dependability is a must.
Communication with the M1 controller
occurs through an integrated interface
that can be programmed to either
the RS232 or RS422 standard.
The arrangement and design of the control
elements, including an alphanumeric multi-click
keyboard are oriented to the familiar operating
philosophy of mobile phones. For better tactile
feel the keys are embossed and have integrated
snap disks. The aluminum front panel with
inlayed front foil underlines the sophisticated
and robust character of the terminal.

• Full-graphic 4.2" STN Bluemode display with

240 x 64 pixels
• Model-dependent operating/display elements:
5x softkeys, alphanumeric multi-click keyboard,
1x Exit key, 1x Shift key, 1x keyboard entry
lock/unlock key, 1x Backspace key, cursor
directional pad with Enter key and 3 LEDs
• Convenient project planning via Vis Designer
• Character coding with UTF-8
• Operating temperature range
from -30 .. +60 °C

Item Item no.

OT115/R/BE1 00014569-00
OT115/R/BE2 00014570-00
OT115/R/BE2/CC 00017593-00

CC ... ColdClimate ( ) variant

259
 Operator terminals

OT100 series OT115/R/BE1 OT115/R/BE2 OT115/R/BE2/CC

Display
Diagonal/resolution 4.2” STN Bluemode (240 x 64 pixels)
Display brightness 450 cd/m2
Backlight LED: dimmable via keyboard / PLC program
Processor/RAM
Processor 72 MHz 32 bit
RAM 64 kB internal
Control/display elements
Front keyboard
Softkeys 5x 5x
Enter 1x 1x
Cursor keys 4x 4x
Multi-click keyboard - alphanumeric
Exit - 1x
Shift - 1x
Keyboard entry - 1x lock/unlock
Backspace - 1x
Display elements - 1x red LED
2x yellow LEDs
Interface
RS232 / 422 (switchable) 1x

* In the case of OTs for marine applications the supply voltage is galvanically isolated.
Power supply* 24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V), 10 ms buffering
Certifications CE, UL, GL; pending: ABS, BV, DNV, LR
Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature -20 .. +60 °C fanless -30 .. +60 °C fanless
Storage temperature -30 .. +80 °C -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage / 5 .. 95 % 5 .. 95 %
operation without condensation with condensation
Certifications CE, UL, GL; pending: ABS, BV, DNV, LR
Degree of protection
Front / Rear IP65 / IP20
Software
Visualization project planning: Vis Designer / programming: Java, C, PLC environment
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions (W x H x D) 170 x 128 x 50 mm 170 x 160 x 50 mm 170 x 160 x 50 mm
Weight approx. 1 kg approx. 1 kg approx. 1 kg
Variants
OT115/R/BE1 4.2“ STN-Bluemode display (240x64 Pixel), 1x RS232, front panel with cross
elements, operating temp. -20°C .. +60°C, storage temperature -30 °C ..
+80 °C, rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT115/R/BE2 4.2“ STN-Bluemode display (240x64 Pixel), 1x RS232, front panel with Al-
phaNum key, operating temp. -20°C .. +60°C, storage temperature -30 °C ..
+80 °C, rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT115/R/BE2/CC 4.2“ STN-Bluemode display (240x64 Pixel), 1x RS232, front panel with Al-
phaNum key, operating temp. -30°C .. +60°C, storage temperature -40 °C ..
+85 °C, rel. humidity operation5 .. 95 % with condensation

260
 Operator terminals

Operator terminal OT200 series

The OT200 operator terminal series offers an

inexpensive entry into the world of visualization
devices. Smaller visualization applications in
the renewable energies, industry, and marine
areas are the ideal implementation area of the
operator terminals. The system is connected
to the automation via Ethernet, in addition the
device has two USB2.0 interfaces. The system
is ideally designed for Java visualizations.

The operator terminal comes with a color TFT

display and dimmable LED backlight in various
screen resolutions. The operator terminal is
operated via a touch screen and / or a keyboard
integrated in the front panel. In the marine version,
OT205V/M, the device has an internal signal
encoder, as well as a floating relay output.

• Extremely compact and powerful

• Fanless operation up to +60 °C
• Visualization with Bachmann Vis Designer
• 5.7" color TFT monitor with QVGA or VGA resolution
• Optionally with keyboard integrated in the front panel
• Marine approval and marine-typical special functions

Item Item no.

OT205/BE1 00018216-00
OT205/V/BE1 00018218-00
OT205/V/BE2 00018221-00
OT205/M/BE1 00018217-00
OT205/V/BE1/CC 00018219-00

V ... VGA resolution

M ... maritime variant
CC ... ColdClimate ( ) variant

261
 Operator terminals

OT205/V/ OT205/M/ OT205/V/ OT205/V/

OT200 series OT205/BE1
BE1 BE1 BE2 BE1/CC
Display
Diagonal/resolution 5.7" QVGA 5.7” VGA
(320 x 240) (640 x 480)
Display type Color TFT
Display brightness 700 cd / m²
Half-brightness min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM 512 MB

Mass storage
CF card ≥ UDMA 2 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type analog resistive
Front keyboard
Softkeys - 11x -
Enter - 1x -
Cursor keys - 4x -
Multi-click keyboard - alpha- -
numeric
Exit - 1x -
Shift - 1x -
System LED optional 5x 2 -
Status LED Run, Init, Error
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100 1x
USB 2.0 2x
RS232 1x
Buzzer - 1x
Floating relay output - 1x

Power supply* 24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)

Certifications CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC, GL, ABS, BV, DNV, LR
Ambient conditions Standard Marine Standard ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature 0 .. +60°C fanless** -15 .. +50°C 0 .. +60°C -30 .. +60°C
fanless**
Storage temperature -20 .. +85°C -40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage / 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 %
­operation with
condensation

262
 Operator terminals

OT205/V/ OT205/M/ OT205/V/ OT205/V/

OT200 series OT205/BE1
BE1 BE1 BE2 BE1/CC
Software
Operating system Linux embedded
Visualization Vis Designer / Java

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions (W x H x D) 212 x 156 x 49 mm
Weight approx. 2 kg

Variants
OT205/BE1 Display: 5,7"; QVGA (320x240); Touch; CPU: LX800@500 MHz; RAM:
512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232;
operating temp. 0°C.. +60 °C; storage temp. -20°C..+85°C, rel. humidity
5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT205/V/BE1 Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: LX800@500 MHz;
RAM:512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232;
operating temp. 0°C.. +60 °C; storage temp. -20°C..+85°C, rel. humidity
5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT205/V/BE2 Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); AlphaNumKB;
CPU: LX800@500 MHz; RAM: 512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth
10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232; operating temp. 0°C.. +60°C;
storage temp. -20°C..+85 °C, rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
OT205/M/BE1 Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: LX800@500 MHz; RAM:
512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1x Buzzer;
1x potential free relay output; 1xRS232; operating temp -15°C.. +50 °C;
storage temp. -20°C..+85 °C, rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
OT205/V/BE1/CC Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: LX800@500 MHz; RAM:
512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232;
operating temp. -30°C.. +60°C; rel. humitdity operation 5 .. 95 % with
condensation; storage temp. -40°C..+85°C, 5 .. 95 % short-term
condensation (≤60 min)

* In the case of OTs for marine applications the supply voltage is galvanically isolated.
** For details regarding the maximum permissible ambient temperatures for different install positions
and install types, see section, »Device dimensions and ambient temperatures«

263
 Operator terminals

Operator terminal OT1300 series

The new OT1300 series combines the latest

technology, performance and durability with an
attractive and slim-line design. The OT1300 series
is the ideal choice for visualization applications
in the renewable energy and industrial sectors.
Condensation-proof ColdClimate modules guarantee
maximum availability, even in very demanding
environments. The consistent use of industry
standard components moreover guarantees long-
term availability and thus investment protection.
The large range of available systems in the OT1300
series ensures an optimum price performance ratio.

• Processor/RAM:
AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz) / 2 GB DDR3 RAM
Intel Celeron 847E (2x 1,1 GHz) / 2 GB DDR3 RAM
Intel Core i7 (2x 1,7 GHz) / 4 GB DDR3 RAM
• Ultrafast CFast mass memory
• SATA HDD or SSD options for large volume storage
• Interfaces (standard device): 1x or 2x GBit
Ethernet, 4x USB2.0, 1x RS232
• Standard operating temperature: 0 ... +60 °C,
fanless
• Enhanced temperature range (ColdClimate):
-30 .. +60 °C
• Operating systems: Linux Embedded,
Windows Embedded Standard 7

Item Item no.

OT1310/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX 00022647-00
OT1312/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX 00022646-00
OT1315/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX 00022645-00
OT1319/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX 00022644-00
OT1310/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/WES7E 00023273-00
OT1312/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/WES7E 00022882-00
OT1315/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/WES7E 00023275-00
OT1319/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/WES7E 00023276-00
OT1312/BE1/CE1G1/2G/SSD64/WES7P 00023501-00
OT1315/BE1/CE1G1/2G/SSD64/WES7P 00023502-00
OT1319/BE1/CE1G1/2G/SSD64/WES7P 00024295-00
OT1312/BE1/CO1G7/4G/SSD64/WES7P 00024293-00
OT1315/BE1/CO1G7/4G/SSD64/WES7P 00024294-00
OT1319/BE1/CO1G7/4G/SSD64/WES7P 00023870-00

CC ... ColdClimate ( )

other models on request

264
 Operator terminals

OT1310/BE1/ OT1312/BE1/ OT1315/BE1/ OT1319/BE1/

OT1300 series
GT1G0 GT1G0 GT1G0 GT1G0
Display
Diagonal 10.4“ VGA 12.1“ SVGA 15“ XGA 19“ SXGA
(640x480) (800x600) (1024x768) (1280x1024)
Display type Color TFT
Display brightness 450 cd /m² 450 cd/m² 400 cd/m² 350 cd/m²
Half-brightness min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz)
RAM 2 GB
Mass storage
SSD -
CFast card ≥ 4 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type* analog resistive, membrane front
System LEDs Power, Diag, Act
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100 / 1000 1x
MBit
USB 2.0 4x

Power supply 24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V), galvanically isolated

Certifications CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems** Linux Embedded
Windows Embedded Standard 7
Visualization*** atvise scada / M1 webMI pro
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C fanless
Storage temperature -20 .. +80 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
5 .. 95 % without condensation
storage
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) 310 x 234 x 68 mm 341 x 253 x 68 mm 406 x 308 x 75 mm 471 x 375 x 76 mm
Weight approx. 2.5 kg approx. 3.0 kg approx. 4.5 kg approx. 6.0 kg

* Customer-specific front panel on request

** Windows Embedded Standard 8 on request
*** not included

265
 Operator terminals

OT1310/BE1/CC OT1312/BE1/CC
OT1300 series
GT1G0 GT1G0
Display
Diagonal 10.4“ VGA (640x480) 12.1“ SVGA (800x600)
Display type Color TFT
Display brightness 450 cd /m² 450 cd/m²
Half-brightness min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz)
RAM 2 GB
Mass storage
SSD -
CFast card ≥ 4 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type* analog resistive, membrane front
System LEDs Power, Diag, Act
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100 / 1000 MBit 1x
USB 2.0 4x

Power supply 24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V), galvanically isolated

Certifications CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems** Linux Embedded
Windows Embedded Standard 7
Visualization*** atvise scada / M1 webMI pro
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C fanless
Storage temperature -30 .. +80 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
5 .. 95 % without condensation
storage
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) 310 x 234 x 68 mm 341 x 253 x 68 mm
Weight approx. 2.5 kg approx. 3.0 kg

* Customer-specific front panel on request

** Windows Embedded Standard 8 on request
*** not included

266
 Operator terminals

OT1312/BE1/ OT1315/BE1/ OT1319/BE1/

OT1300 series CE1G1 CE1G1 CE1G1
CO1G7 CO1G7 CO1G7
Display
Diagonal 12.1“ SVGA (800x600) 15“ XGA (1024x768) 19“ SXGA (1280x1024)
Display type Farb-TFT
Display brightness 450 cd/m² 400 cd/m² 350 cd/m²
Half-brightness min. 50.000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor Celeron 847E (2x 1,1 GHz) or Intel Core i7 (2x 1,7 GHz)
RAM 2 GB 4 GB
Mass storage
SSD ≥ 64 GB
CFast card ≥ 4 GB
ontrol/display elements
Touch screen type* analog resistiv, Folienfront
System LEDs Power, Diag, Act
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100 / 1000 MBit 2x
USB 2.0 4x
RS232 1x

Power supply 24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V), galvanically isolated

Certifications CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems** Windows Embedded Standard 7
Visualization*** atvise scada / M1 webMI pro
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature 0 .. +60 °C fanless
Storage temperature -20 .. +80 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
5 .. 95 % without condensation
storage
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) 341 x 253 x 74 mm 406 x 308 x 81 mm 471 x 375 x 82 mm
Weight approx. 3.5 kg approx. 5.0 kg approx. 6.5 kg

* Customer-specific front panel on request

** Windows Embedded Standard 8 on request
*** not included

267
 Operator terminals

OT1300 series
Variants
OT1310/BE1/GT1G0 Operator Terminal: 10,4“; VGA (640x480); Resistive Touch; AMD G-T40E
(2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 1x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0;
CFast-Card 4 GB; operating temp. 0 .. +60 °C; storage temp. -20 .. +80 °C;
rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1312/BE1/GT1G0 Operator Terminal: 12,1“; SVGA (800x600); Resistive Touch; AMD G-T40E
(2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 1x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0;
CFast-Card 4 GB; operating temp. 0 .. +60 °C; storage temp. -20 .. +80 °C;
rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1315/BE1/GT1G0 Operator Terminal: 15“; XGA (1024x768); Resistive Touch; AMD G-T40E
(2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 1x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0;
CFast-Card 4 GB; operating temp. 0 .. +60 °C; storage temp. -20 .. +80 °C;
rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1319/BE1/GT1G0 Operator Terminal: 19“; SXGA (1280x1024); Resistive Touch; AMD G-T40E
(2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 1x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0;
CFast-Card 4 GB; operating temp. 0 .. +60 °C; storage temp. -20 .. +80 °C;
rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1312/BE1/CE1G1 Operator Terminal: 12,1“; SVGA (800x600); Resistive Touch; Intel Celeron
847E (2x 1,1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x
RS232; SSD 60/64 GB 2,5’’ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; operating temp. 0 .. +60 °C;
storage temp. -20 .. +80 °C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1315/BE1/CE1G1 Operator Terminal: 15“; XGA (1024x768); Resistive Touch; Intel Celeron 847E
(2x 1,1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232;
SSD 60/64 GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; operating temp. 0 .. +60 °C;
storage temp. -20 .. +80 °C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1319/BE1/CE1G1 Operator Terminal: 19“; SXGA (1280x1024); Resistive Touch; Intel Celeron 847E
(2x 1,1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232;
SSD 60/64 GB 2,5'' SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; operating temp. 0 .. +60 °C;
storage temp. -20 .. +80 °C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1312/BE1/CO1G7 Operator Terminal: 12,1“; SVGA (800x600); Resistive Touch; Intel Core i7
(2x 1,7 GHz); 4 GB DDR3 RAM; 2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232;
SSD 60/64 GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; operating temp. 0 .. +60 °C;
­storage temp. -20 .. +80 °C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1315/BE1/CO1G7 Operator Terminal: 15“; XGA (1024x768); Resistive Touch; Intel Core i7
(2x 1,7 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232;
SSD 60/64 GB 2,5'' SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; operating temp. 0 .. +60 °C;
torage temp. -20 .. +80 °C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1319/BE1/CO1G7 Operator Terminal: 19“; SXGA (1280x1024); Resistive Touch; Intel Core i7
(2x 1,7 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232;
SSD 60/64 GB 2,5'' SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; operating temp. 0 .. +60 °C;
storage temp. -20 .. +80 °C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1310/BE1/CC/GT1G0 Operator Terminal: 10,4“; VGA (640x480); Resistive Touch; AMD G-T40E
(2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 1x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0;
CFast-Card-Slot; operating temp. -30 .. +60 °C; storage temp. -30 .. +80 °C;
rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % with condensation
OT1312/BE1/CC/GT1G0 Operator Terminal: 12,1“; SVGA (800x600); Resistive Touch; AMD G-T40E
(2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 1x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0;
­ Fast-Card-Slot; operating temp. -30 .. +60 °C; storage temp. -30 .. +80 °C;
C
rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % with condensation

268
269
Robust. Spacious. In conformance with standards.

Industrial PCs

Robust industrial PCs are used in the automation sector for controlling
machines, networking plant components as well as for data acquisition and
image processing. Bachmann electronic's passively cooled IPC1400 panel
PCs offer the ideal industrial PC for every task. The remote displays of
the Dx900 series allow visualization to be implemented up to 100 m away
from the central computer unit IPM1400. The front panels of the operator
units are made from aluminum and their function, color and design can be
adapted to customer requirements. The operating elements required can be
implemented as real machine pushbuttons, with a foil keyboard or as touch
screens. Whether complete standard system or customer-specific solution
Bachmann electronic always delivers 100 % quality: precisely like the HMI
devices all Bachman industrial PCs are subjected to a 48-hour run-in test in
the climate chamber, in which the specified operating temperatures are run
through multiple times. Naturally compliance with the applicable industrial/
product standards, as well as the legally prescribed standards is ensured.

270
 Industrial PC

Customized PC-based visualization devices – compact or modular.

The display diagonals, operating elements In order to ensure the lowest possible
and design of the modular IPC1400 series failure rate and maximum investment
devices can be adapted to the customer's security, Bachmann electronic places
needs and offers scalable processing considerable importance on the selection of
performance. It can be factory fitted with a the components used in terms of availability,
number of different interfaces or retrofitted mechanical resistance and suitability for
quickly in the field. industrial use.

Maximum flexibility for applications

requiring a spatial separation between the
controller and the display / operator unit
is offered by the combination of IPM1400
with digital serial remote installation (DSA)
and the remote display of the Dx900
series. The Dx900's display diagonals,
operating elements and design can be
adapted to individual requirements.

Industrial PC IPC1400 series

Features
Display: 10.4" VGA / 12.1" SVGA / 15" XGA /
19" SXGA, color TFT, touch screen, customer-specific
front panel*
Processor: Celeron M processor ULV 423 1.06 GHz
Core Duo processor L2400 2x 1.66 GHz
RAM: 1 GB / 2GB
Compact Flash: 4GB / 8GB
Operating system: Windows XP Embedded,
Windows 7
Slot system: PCI, HDD*
Interfaces: Ethernet, USB, PS/2, RS232,
CF slot
*o
 n request

271
 Industrial PC

Industrial PC IPC1400 series

The highly modular and compact IPC1400-

series is suitable for demanding visualizations.
The family relies on modularity,
Performance scalability and service friendly. The
system with TFT screens is available with different
diagonals to meet specific customer requirements.
The modular slot system enables the implementa-
tion of a wide range of slots such as PCI and PICe,
as well as the simultaneous use of different mass
storage technologies.

• Scalable industrial PC based on a Celeron M or

Core Duo processor
• Maximum reliability and maintenance friendly
• Modular slot system
• Customer-specific configuration and front panel
design
• Compact unit or computer with remote display
up to 100 m

Item Item no.

IPC1410/CM 00016898-00
IPC1410/CD 00016902-00
IPC1412/CM 00016899-00
IPC1412/CD 00016903-00
IPC1415/CM 00016900-00
IPC1415/CD 00016904-00
IPC1419/CD 00016905-00

CM processor Celeron M ULV 423 1.06GHz

CD processor Core Duo L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz

272
 Industrial PC

IPC1400 series IPC1410 IPC1412

Display
Diagonal/resolution 10.4" VGA (640x480) 12.1" SVGA (800x600)
Display type color TFT
Display brightness 450 cd / m² 350 cd / m²
Half-brightness min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor Celeron M ULV 423 1.06 GHz
Core Duo L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz
RAM 1 GB / 2 GB
Mass storage
CF card type I+II 4 GB / 8 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type analog resistive
Front keyboard / Number on request / max. 128, 2-fold programmable
of keys
System LEDs Power, Diag, HDD
Interfaces
Network 2x Ethernet 10 / 100 MBit
USB 3x USB 2.0 + 1x powered USB 2.0
Serial 2x RS232 / 422 / (also configurable as full RS232)
Mouse / keyboard 1x combined PS/2 connection
Audio AC97, 1x Line-In, 1x Line-Out, 1x MIC
External monitor 1x RGB, 1x DVI
Expansion modules
2.5" hard disk (slot) (optional) ≥ 160 GB or RAID1: 80 GB (24/7), other on request
Slots* (module) max. 2x PCI, max. 2x PCIexpress (on request)

Power supply 24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)

Certifications CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems Windows XP Embedded, Windows 7
Visualization Vis Designer / Java, other visualizations at customer's request
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature**
Fanless 0 .. 50 °C,
with fan 0 .. 50 °C***
Storage temperature -20 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation / 5 .. 95 % without condensation
storage
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions (W x H x D) 314 x 237 x 110 mm**** 337 x 256 x 110 mm****
Weight approx. 5 kg approx. 5 kg

* in conjunction with RAID1 max. 1x PCI or 1x PCIe slot possible

** other temperature ranges on request
*** for details regarding the maximum permissible ambient temperatures for different install positions
and install types, see section, »Device dimensions and ambient temperatures«
**** without expansion / attachments (per expansion: +30 mm -> max. 2 expansions = +60 mm)

273
 Industrial PC

IPC1400 series IPC1415 IPC1419

Diagonal/resolution 15" XGA (1024x768) 19" SXGA (1240x1024)

Display type color TFT
Display brightness 250 cd / m² 300 cd/m³
Half-brightness min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor Celeron M ULV 423 1.06 GHz Core Duo L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz
Core Duo L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz
RAM 1 GB / 2 GB
Mass storage
CF card type I+II 4 GB / 8 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type analog resistive
Front keyboard / Number on request / max. 128, 2-fold programmable
of keys
System LEDs Power, Diag, HDD
Status LEDs optional: max. 64
Interfaces
Network 2x Ethernet 10 / 100 MBit
USB 3x USB 2.0 + 1x powered USB 2.0
Serial 2x RS232 / 422 / 485 (also configurable as full RS232)
Mouse / keyboard 1x combined PS/2 connection
Audio AC97, 1x Line-In, 1x Line-Out, 1x MIC
External monitor 1x RGB, 1x DVI
Expansion modules
2.5" hard disk (slot) (optional) ≥ 40 GB or RAID1: 80 GB (24/7), on request
Slots* (module) max. 2x PCI, max. 2x PCIexpress (on request)

Power supply 24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)

Certifications CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems**** Windows XP Embedded, Windows 7
Visualization Vis Designer / Java, other visualizations at customer's request
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature**
Fanless 0 .. 40 °C
with fan 0 .. 50 °C***
Storage temperature -20 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation / 5 .. 95 % without condensation
storage
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions (W x H x D) 405 x 308 x 124 mm***** 470 (19") x 374.6 (9 U) x 121 mm*****
Weight approx. 6 kg approx. 12 kg

* in conjunction with RAID1 max. 1x PCI or 1x PCIe slot possible

** other temperature ranges on request
*** for details regarding the maximum permissible ambient temperatures for different install positions
and install types, see section, »Device dimensions and ambient temperatures«
**** other operating systems on request
***** without expansion / attachments (per expansion: +30 mm -> max. 2 expansions = +60 mm)
274
 Industrial PC

IPC1400 series
Variants
IPC1410/BE1/CM1G1 Industrial PC: Display: 10,4"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: Celeron M ULV
423 (1M Cache, 1.06 GHz, 533 MHz FSB); RAM:1GB-DDR2; CF-Card: 4GB-
WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2;
1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA; operating temp. 0 °C .. +50
°C; storage temp. -20 °C .. +60 °C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensa-
tion
IPC1410/BE1/CD1G6 Industrial PC: Display: 10,4"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: Core Duo Proces-
sor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66 GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2; CF-
Card: 8GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0;
2x RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA;
operating temp. 0 °C .. +50 °C; storage temp. -20 °C .. +60 °C; rel. humidity
5 .. 95 % without condensation
IPC1412/BE1/CM1G1 Industrial PC: Display: 12,1"; SVGA (800x600); Touch; CPU: Celeron M
ULV 423 (1M Cache, 1.06 GHz, 533 MHz FSB); RAM:1GB-DDR2; CF-Card:
4GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0; 2x
RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA;
operating temp. 0 °C .. +50 °C; storage temp. -20 °C ..+60 °C; rel. humidity
5 .. 95 % without condensation
IPC1412/BE1/CD1G6 Industrial PC: Display: 12,1"; SVGA (800x600); Touch; CPU: Core Duo Pro-
cessor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66 GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2; CF-
Card: 8GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0;
2x RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA;
operating temp. 0 °C .. +50 °C; storage temp. -20 °C .. +60 °C; rel. humidity
5 .. 95 % without condensation
IPC1415/BE1/CM1G1 Industrial PC: Display: 15,1"; XGA (1024x768); Touch; CPU: Celeron M
ULV 423 (1M Cache, 1.06 GHz, 533 MHz FSB); RAM:1GB-DDR2; CF-Card:
4GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0; 2x
RS232/422; 1xPS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA;
operating temp. 0 °C .. +50 °C; storage temp. -20 °C .. +60 °C; rel. humidity
5 .. 95 % without condensation
IPC1415/BE1/CD1G6 Industrial PC: Display: 15,1"; XGA (1024x768); Touch; CPU: Core Duo
Processor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66 GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2;
CF-Card: 8GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered
USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x
VGA; operating temp. 0 °C .. +50 °C; storage temp. -20 °C .. +60 °C; rel.
humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
IPC1419/BE1/CD1G6 Industrial PC: Display: 19"; SXGA (1240x1024); Touch; CPU: Core Duo
Prozessor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66 GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2;
CF-Card: 8GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit;3x USB2.0; 1x powered
USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x
VGA; operating temp. 0 °C .. +50 °C; storage temp. -20 °C .. +60 °C; rel.
humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation

275
Industrial PC

276
 Headless IPCs and remote displays

Displays with USB and CAN connectivity.

The Dx900 display series from Bachmann of video, USB and CAN signals from the cen-
electronic enables the spatial separation tral unit to the Dx900 series display. USB ter-
between the display and operator unit and minals on the display enable a wide range of
the controller. The remote display and the peripheral devices to be operated directly at
IPM1400 are connected via a 100 meter the interface between the user and machine.
cable using the serial remote installation CAN enables operating elements on the dis-
(DSA). The DSA itself is implemented as play to be connected directly with the control-
a module of the IPM1400 cassette system ler hardware. A customized cable can be sup-
and ensures the interference free transfer plied on request.

Remote displays DD900 series

Features
Display: 15" XGA / 19" SXGA, color TFT, touch
screen, customer spec. front panel*
Remote: 100 m, video, USB, CAN
Protection: front IP65 / rear IP54
Housing: stand-alone, aluminum housing,
Support arm connection

* on request

Remote displays DF900 series

Features
Display: 15" XGA / 19" SXGA, color TFT, touch
screen, customer specific front panel*
Remote: 100 m, video, USB, CAN
Protection: front IP65 / rear IP20
Housing: control cabinet mounting

* on request

277
The display diagonals, operating elements IP54 at the rear. The DF900 devices are
and design of the 900 series can also be designed with a mounting depth less than
adapted to individual requirements. 60 millimeters for control cabinet mount-
ing. Aluminum frontpanels with a decora-
The control panels of the 900 series are tive film and an all-round seal also ensure
available in two variants to meet different protection to IP65 (front).
mounting requirements: the DD900 series
comes with a modern aluminum housing
with protection to IP65 at the front and

Cabinet PC IPM1400

Features
Processor: C
 eleron M processor ULV 423 1.06 GHz
Core Duo processor L2400 2x 1.66 GHz
RAM: 1 GB / 2GB
Operating system: Windows XP Embedded
Slot system: PCI, HDD*
Interfaces: Ethernet, USB, PS/2, RS232,
CF slot

* on request

278
 Headless IPCs and remote displays

Remote displays
DD900 series
The DD900 remote display is an industrial control
panel in a modern aluminum housing. The design and
operating elements can be adapted to the customer's
requirements.

The integrated USB interface enables a wide range

of peripherals to be connected directly on the termi-
nal. CAN enables operating elements on the remote
display to be connected directly with the controller
hardware without requiring any additional wiring.

• Remote installation between control panel and

IPM up to 100 m
• Mounting on support arm
• Transfer of video, USB and CAN signals via one cable

Item Item No.

DD915 on request
DD919 on request

279
 Headless IPCs and remote displays

DD900 series DD915 DD919

Display
Diagonal/resolution 15" XGA (1024x768) 19" SXGA (1280x1024)
Display type color TFT
Display brightness 300 cd / m²
Half-brightness min. 50,000 h
Control/display elements
Touch screen type analog resistive
Front keyboard / Number of optional / max. 128, 2-fold programmable
keys

Interfaces 1x USB (rear)

CAN (rear)

Power supply 24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)

Operating temperature 0 °C .. 40 °C, fan-free
Certifications CE, UL, CUL

Housing aluminum
Degree of protection (front) IP65
Degree of protection (rear) IP54

280
 Headless IPCs and remote displays

Remote displays
DF900 series

The remote display DF900 is an industrial terminal in

flat design. Design and control elements of the front
panel can be adapted to the customer's requirements.

The integrated USB interface enables a wide range

of peripherals to be connected directly on the termi-
nal. CAN enables operating elements on the remote
display to be connected directly with the controller
hardware without requiring any additional wiring.

• Remote installation between control panel and IPM

up to 100 m
• Mounting in the cabinet
• Transfer of video, USB and CAN signals via one cable
• Slimline remote terminal

Item Item No.

DF915 on request
DF919 on request

281
 Headless IPCs and remote displays

DF900 series DF915 DF919

Display
Diagonal/resolution 15" XGA (1024x768) 19" SXGA (1280x1024)
Display type color TFT
Display brightness 300 cd / m²
Half-brightness min. 50,000 h
Control/display elements
Touch screen type analog resistive
Front keyboard / Number of optional / max. 128, 2-fold programmable
keys
System LEDs Power, DIAG

Interfaces 2x USB (rear)

1x CAN (rear)

Power supply 24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)

Operating temperature 0 °C .. +50 °C, fan-free 0 °C .. +45 °C, fan-free
Certifications CE, UL, CUL

Housing aluminum
Degree of protection (front) IP65
Degree of protection (rear) IP20

282
 Headless IPCs and remote displays

Cabinet PC
IPM1400

The IPM1400 cabinet PC while inconspicuous is the

powerful and reliable brain of the well-designed
Dx900 series terminals. The configuration varies
depending on the application, and most I/Os as
well as additional cards are individually arranged.

• Powerful and scalable cabinet PC based on

Celeron M and Core Duo processors
• Individual configuration of the PC using
expansion units

Item Item No.

IPM1400/CM1G1/A on request
IPM1400/CD1G6/X on request
IPM1400/CD1G6/AX on request

CM ... processor Celeron M ULV 423 1.06GHz

CD ... processor Core Duo L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz

Interfaces

Remote displays
DD900, DF900 RGB External displays

DVI TFT monitor

USB devices
Serial devices
Ext. hard disk
Modem / mouse
Modem
Emergency supply
Printer DSA (optional) COM1-2
(UPS)
USB hub max. 100 m Networking
Keyboard Cabinet PC
USB1-4 Barcode reader
Mouse IPM1400A, IPM1400R, IMP1400RA
Web cam Audio devices
AC97 Loudspeaker
RAID slot
PS/2 Headset
RAID 1 Microphone

Ethernet 1-2 Input device

Slot system Keyboard
Wide slot Narrow slot Mouse
(max.) (max. 2)
Networking
Control
Expansion modules S-ATA devices
Control room
PCI Hard disk 2.5" *
PCI express
Video
* on request Remote installation up
283 to 100 m*
 Headless IPCs and remote displays

IPM1400 series IPM1400/CM1G1/A IPM1400/CD1G6/X IPM1400/CD1G6/AX

Processor/RAM
Processor system* Celeron-M processor Core Duo processor L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz
ULV 423 1.06 GHz
RAM 1 GB 2 GB
Mass storage
2.5" Flash disk -
CF card type I+II 4 GB -
Interfaces
Network 2x Ethernet 10/100
USB 3x USB 2.0 + 1x powered USB 2.0
Serial 2x RS232 / 422 / (also configurable as full RS232)
Mouse / keyboard 1x combined PS/2 connection
Audio AC97, 1x Line-In, 1x Line-Out, 1x MIC
System LEDs Power, Diag, HDD
External monitor 1x VGA, 1x DVI, 1x DSA 1x VGA, 1x DVI 1x VGA, 1x DVI, 1x DSA
Expansion modules
2.5" hard disk - ≥ 80 GB (24/7), RAID 1
Slots***** max. 2x PCI or 2x PCIexpress

Power supply 24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)

Tested acc. to CE, UL, CUL, CSA, CC
Software
Operating systems*** Windows XP Professional (FES), Windows Embedded Standard 2009
Visualization Vis Designer / Java, other visualizations at customer's request
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature** 0 °C .. 50 °C fan-free
Storage temperature -20 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation / 5 .. 95 % without condensation
storage
Dimensions and devices
Dimensions (W x H x D) 256 x 288 x 126 mm 256 x 288 x 156 mm
(incl. mounting plate, (incl. mounting plate
without expansion unit) and expansion unit)

* other processors on request *** other operating systems on request

** other temperature ranges on request **** optional, IPM1400R / IPM1400RA, max. 1x
PCI or 1x PCIe slot possible 284
 Headless IPCs and remote displays

IPM1400 series
Variants
IPM1400/CM1G1/A Industrial PC: Headless; CPU: Celeron M ULV 423 (1M Cache, 1.06 GHz,
533 MHz FSB); RAM:1GB-DDR2; CF-Card: 4GB - WXPe; 2x Eth 10/100MBit;
3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-
Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA; 1x DSA; operating temp. 0 °C .. +50 °C;
storage temp. -20 °C .. +60 °C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
IPM1400/CD1G6/X Industrial PC: Headless; CPU: Core Duo Processor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66
GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2; HDD: RAID1-2x160GB WXPP-FES;
2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2;
1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA;
operating temp. 0 °C.. +50 °C; storage temp. -20 °C .. +60 °C; rel. humidity
5 .. 95 % without condensation
IPM1400/CD1G6/AX Industrial PC: Headless; CPU: Core Duo Processor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66
GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2; HDD: RAID1-2x160GB WXPP-FES;
2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2;
1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA; 1x DSA
operating temp. 0 °C .. +50 °C; storage temp. -20 °C .. +60 °C; rel. humidity
5 .. 95 % without condensation

285
Headless IPCs and remote displays

286
287
Intuitive. Intelligent. Platform-independent.

Engineering software

In the automation of plants and machines software has become an essential

component. As an innovative provider Bachmann electronic also establishes
the state of the technology in this area as well and enables groundbreaking
future solutions, such as the Bachmann SolutionCenter. With a series of
the latest software engineering and diagnostic tools we support rapid and
convenient realization of programs for machine sequence, process control,
visualization, and not least, communication with the outside world.
»Time-to-market« is no longer just a buzz word,
rather it is a principle that is lived.

With engineering software from Bachmann electronic you rely

on complete solutions that have been thought-through in the
details; solutions that increase the productivity and sovreignty of
your applications, that free-up resources for your core business,
and that can also be used reliably in the distant future.

288
 Project engineering made easy: SolutionCenter

A milestone in the reduction of engineering costs.

As part of a unique, complete software Matched in the best manner possible to the
solution, the Bachmann SolutionCenter devices and systems of the manufacturer,
covers all aspects of the engineering it provides time savings, brings synergies,
process – configuration, programming, and increases usability. Users benefit from
controlling/regulation, communication, the cohesive operating concept and avoid
Motion, visualization, as well as test and redundant entry or unnecessary manual
commissioning. Thanks to the highly entry. A close linking to the automation
modular Eclipse plug-in concept, the systems of Bachmann electronic enables
tool can be easily expanded, even for simplifications in virtually all processes.
integrated user-specific requirements.

Prog
uring ram
fig m
on i
ng
C
t & diagnostics

Visualization
Tes

ng

To

ti
ol
&

la g s
u /
reg ollin Ad
tr d-O
Con ns

289
 Configuring Controlling & regulation

• Controller design offline • M

 otion Control:
• Configuration of the hardware modules • Softmotion (M-SMC)
• Management and use of predefined hard- • Shaft (M-SHAFT)
ware and software modules • Three-dimensional motion (M-CNC)
• Assignment of signal designations • Temperature controller (M-TEMP)
• Archiving, export and import of subsystems •  -Target for Simulink®
M
or complete controller systems • Libraries for IEC61131-3 and C
• Configuration of the fieldbuses, telecontrol:
• CANopen, DeviceNet
• PROFIBUS DP
• PROFINET IO RT/IRT Testing and diagnostics
• EtherCAT, SERCOS
• Modbus TCP, UDP, RTU • Software oscilloscope
• IEC61850/IEC61400-25 (MMS) • Variable browser / Watch view
• IEC60870-5-101, -103, -104 • Logbooks
• OPC UA/DA • Task lists with runtime measurement
• Error lists in the Error Handler
• P
 rintout of PLC report
Programming • Direct access to I/O signals
• Remote monitoring
• IEC61131-3 (CoDeSys, PLCopen Safety) • Internet-enabled communication
• C/C++
• MATLAB® / Simulink®
• Extensive libraries Tools/Add-Ons
• Repository with SVN
• Access control
• Time synchronization (SNTP, IEEE1588)
Visualizing • SVN repository (source code & configuration
management)
• Configurations for M1 webMI pro web • Configuration history/ comparison
­visualizations • Eclipse plugins
• VisDesigner project designs
• Communication libraries for developing user-
defined visualizations (Java, C, .NET)
• OPC server
290
 Engineering Software

M-Base

The complete product range of the engineering

software from Bachmann electronic is delivered
in a software package. For different applications,
derivatives are made available which are tailored
to the needs of individual users.

• Device configuration & system settings

• Fieldbus configuration
• Right of accesses
• Programming in C/C++, IEC61131
• Safe programming
• Visualization project
• Comprehensive system diagnostics
• Many monitoring functions
• Project and diagnostic reports

Items Item Nr.

M-Base One-time License 00015629-60
M-Base Annual Maintenance 00015629-70
M-Base COM One-time License 00015778-60
M-Base COM Annual Maintenance 00015778-70
M-Base SC One-time License 00018914-60
M-Base SC Annual Maintenance 00018914-70
M-Base SC Light One-time License 00018888-60
M-Base SC Light Annual Maintenance 00018888-70
M-Base Device Viewer One-time
License 00015845-60
M-Base Device Viewer Annual
Maintenance 00015845-70

291
 Engineering Software

Delivery variants

M-Base

M-Base One-time License Complete engineering package for configuration, programming

and modeling for the Bachmann M1. The product support and the
updates of one year are included in the license.
M-Base Annual Maintenance extension of the product support and updates for one year longer
M-Base SC One-time License SolutionCenter for configuration and diagnostic, programming
in C/C++, visualization tool and Safety Developer. The product
support and updates within one year are included in the license.
M-Base SC Annual Maintenance extension of the product support and updates for one year longer.
M-Base SC Light One-time License SolutionCenter with Device Manager for pure configuration and
diagnostic for the M1 controller system. The product support and
the updates of one year are included in the license.
M-Base SC Light Annual Maintenance extension of the product support and updates for one year longer
M-Base Device Viewer One-time Device Viewer for pure monitoring of the M1 controller system.
License The product support and the updates of one year are included in
the license.
M-Base Device Viewer Annual extension of the product support and updates for one year longer
Maintenance
M-Base COM One-time License communication library for MVIS visualizations. The product
support and the updates of one year are included in the license.
M-Base COM Annual Maintenance extension of the product support and updates for one year longer

292
 Configuration

Merging hardware, fieldbuses, and software into a unit.

The expenses for design, wiring, and and to installation of software modules,
commissioning of a machine represent one tool can be used that permits flexible
a considerable share of the engineering adaptation to a wide variety of tasks
costs. Bachmann electronic supports the with its consistent operating concept.
user on all levels with convenient and The Device Manager as part of the
innovative tools. From the planning of SolutionCenter is the central point for
the control topology and the configur­ all configuration and diagnostics tasks.
ation of fieldbuses to the wiring test

Device Manager

The Device Manager is the integrated tool for

configuration and commissioning of all automation
devices from Bachmann electronic. The entire
M1 controller family, the panel PLCs from the
CT series, the terminals of the WT series, but
also standard-conformant fieldbus nodes from
third-party suppliers are supported by this
tool. Through the capability for complete offline
engineering work can start before the hardware is
available. The flowing alternation between offline
and online configuration in both directions is not
only possible for the complete controller, it is
also possible for the exchange and archiving of
individual hardware and software modules, as well
as for complex fieldbus configurations.
The work area is consistently organized for all
topics in a configurator window and a monitor
window. The Configurator shows the saved target
status that will be valid after the next system
startup, the monitor shows the actual status and
allows manual change of values and settings.
The hardware structure is presented in the real
topology. The type of networking via proprietary
and standardized bus systems is presented
through the organization of a tree structure;
the I / O modules can be uniquely detected
and directly operated through the graphic
presentation. Thus the wiring test can be executed
immediately after switching on the system.
The software for the controller is also managed
in the Device Manager. The system packages
from Bachmann electronic are summarized in a
catalog. All the software is updated conveniently

293
 Configuration

via a wizard that guides the user through the • One interface for all Bachmann devices
procedure. In addition to the provided system • M
 anaging devices
packages, the user can also put together and • B
 ackup of existing devices
manage his own, machine-specific packages and • O
 ffline configuration of entire control systems
transfer them to other PCs. Thus unique software or individual HW / SW modules
states can be assured on all systems and on all • O
 ffline and online configuration of fieldbuses
service PCs. (CAN, PROFINET RT and IRT, PROFIBUS DP,
The variable set of all participating controllers is EtherCAT)
presented in a structured manner in a separate • T
 he same mode of operation for online and
view. Searching for values is facilitated through an offline devices
automatic full-text search; a selection of relevant • C
 onsistent concept: Monitor (actual status)
values can be summarized, saved, and reloaded in and configurator (target status)
an additional window. Through a trend display the • G
 raphic presentation of the I / O modules
temporal progression of values can be graphically •  onfiguration and diagnostics in one tool
C
presented. •  oftware is managed in catalogs, user-specific
S
catalogs
•  lexible compilation of functional window areas
F
(perspectives)

294
 Testing and diagnostics

Monitoring and debugging for every field of application.

Bachmann M1 automation systems are every field of application, from the

designed for a broad user spectrum. signal test of the control cabinet
More extensive than is the case with builder to section identification of
the conventional solutions for industrial the control system engineer, shorten
automation, the support for experts commissioning times and increase the
was considered right from the start. transparency of the overall system.
Monitoring and debugging tools for

Scope 3 – Overview in real-time

Signal analytics and diagnostics directly with the
­controller

In the initial project design and also for commission-

ing or troubleshooting, transparent information con-
cerning states and sequences of an automatic system
is essential for success. For many dynamic processes
seeing a physical variable as only a numeric value
is insufficient. The software oscilloscope »Scope 3«
makes the temporal progression of processes visible
and places this progression in relation to other pro-
cess variables. »Scope 3« is an indispensable tool for
optimization of a controller setting, for troubleshoot-
ing in a sequential program, or for ongoing verifica-
tion of the manufacturing process on the machine. It
permits specific and stand-alone recording, archiving
of the relevant data in a database and subsequent

Item Item no.

SCOPE 3 Pro RT Software package to install on Windows PCs and M1 control- 00024212-63
lers for the diagnostics of signal waveforms (IO- and process
variables). Stand-alone task for recording and archiving of
records on the controller, trigger and pretrigger, multiple re-
cordings. Comprehensive graphical representation (chart) and
evaluation functions, data export on the PC, SolutionCenter
integration. License bound to target device.
SCOPE 3 DVD Installation medium for Scope 3 (DVD). Software module for 00024212-00
the M1 controller and Scope 3 tool for displaying recordings
and data analysis. A Scope software module without a valid
runtime license can be used for up to two hours for recor-
dings. After that, the recording is stopped, but it is possible
to restart after a period of 10 minutes. Without a runtime
­license, archiving functions on the M1 controller are disabled.

295
 Testing and diagnostics

measurement or evaluation of a great number of • High resolution / variable sampling priority

values in parallel. Different trigger conditions as well • Versatile trigger possibilities / pre-triggers and
as pre-trigger and post-trigger functionalities enable post-triggers
acquisition of all relevant data, such as in the case • Graphic evaluation / curve display on the PC
of sporadically occurring errors. • Measurement of curves
• Scaling / shifting of curves and calculated curves
Calculation of additional curves from the recording • Overlay of reference curves
values facilitates retrospective analysis. A special • Archiving / export on the PC
exchange format enables saving and sending of
the recording configuration and entered values in
one and the same file. Thus, for example, Scope
recordings can be forwarded by email and further
processed by the recipient to their full extent (zoom,
measurement with cursors, calculated curves, etc.).
»Scope 3« is also the right tool for the long-term
archiving of measured values directly on the con-
troller. The maximum storage space available is
configured and the recording started by means of
archiving limits.

Thus, millions of data points can also be archived

directly on the controller. Backup and export func-
tions then allow further processing of the collected
data.

• Recording of analog and digital values

• Real-time acquisition directly on the controller
• Long-term recordings per database
• Large number of signals (multiple acquisition
tasks possible)

296
 Testing and diagnostics

Engineering PC

Scope 3 tool
Configuration Presentation • Transforming
• Measuring
• Analysing

CSV

Data base
Data exports

TCP/UDP/QSOAP/SSL

M1 controller

Scope 3 Software module

Data base
Data
Management recorder

APP modules

APP1 APP2 CSV

Data exports

HW modules

Digital I/O Analog I/O Technology

modules

The central aspect of Scope 3 is the portable database on the Engineering PC and M1
controller. This enables very simple data exchange and collaboration – also using copies of
a single file, if necessary.

297
 Testing and diagnostics

Scope 3
General
Recording module Stand-alone real-time recorder on the controller
Configuration Graphic configuration interface in the SolutionCenter or standalone-tool
Presentation interface Diagram display with dynamic legend in the SolutionCenter
or standalone tool
Recording module
Recordable data sources Channel values direct (MIO), SVI variables
Data Types All analog and digital formats up to 64-bit
Recordable tasks SVI variables of any number of software modules simultaneously
Sampling modes • Continuous
• Triggered once
• Triggered cyclically
Sampling rate • Cyclical, min. 100 microseconds, max. 60 minutes
• Coupled with hardware interrupts
Time base • System-tick
• Hardware-sync-signal
• Auxiliary clock
• Real-time clock
Trigger • Any combination of start- and stop-triggers
• Recording conditions as additional limitation of the recorded data
• Edge, level and distance triggering
• Pre-trigger and post-trigger of any length (max. length of recording)
Data quantities No technical limitation, dependent on the free resources on the M1 controller
Interface C-library for using the data recorder in an application:
• Executing commands (Start, Stop, etc.)
• Changing the recording configuration
Scaling Several recordings executable in parallel with different sampling rates and
different priorities
Auto-run Yes, automatic start after reboot possible
Write protection Yes, definable warning text on changes
Data buffer Configurable ring buffer for loss-free transfer of data
from the controller to the PC
Data archiving on controller*
System Embedded database, optionally activatable, database file can be copied freely
to different controllers or PCs and used
Archiving interval Freely configurable in seconds, fast recorded data is buffered and stored in
the database in the archiving interval
Configurable limits • Length in seconds
• Number of recorded points
• Number of recordings
Caching of the data-base Cache size in the working memory freely configurable
Interface C-library for using the database in an application:
• Addition of reference channels or entire recordings
• Export of data or hot backup

* Functions are only available in the Professional Version

298
 Testing and diagnostics

Scope 3
Management / Configuration
Project Management Configurations can be created flexibly in workspace and managed there in
projects
Management of Recordings installed on the M1 can be managed directly via their own view
recordings
Configuration of All configuration methods can be selected via masks. Errors in the configu-
recordings ration are validated immediately.
Delivery of configuration A recording configuration can be delivered to a controller via a single action.
Backup of data Data on an M1 can be saved on the PC by drag and drop.

Presentation/analysis system
Presentation forms Value-over-time [x(t)], value-over-value [x(y)]
Time formats Milliseconds [ms] or date/time formats (freely configurable)
Number of value axes User-defined
Number of curves User-defined, selective showing/hiding for maintaining clarity
Axis reference Each curve can be allocated to any axis
Auto-scaling Yes, linear or logarithmic scaling possible
Fixed scaling Yes, adjustable
Scale arrangement Yes, adjustable
Measurement cursors 2 (can be offset separately and together)
Measurement cursor Value display in legend, time display, differential display
­functions
Stacked Plot Yes, a separate diagram per signal, selective full-screen mode per curve
Array of curves Up to 10 older recordings can additionally be displayed faded into the back-
ground for comparison
Grid Yes, configurable
Presentation options Curve, axis, grid colors, all line thicknesses, orientation, axis label, axis
­arrangement (left/right), flooded curves on reference value or other curves
Raw value transformation Factor and offset per signal
Reference curves Yes, can be imported from CSV or integrated via application
Highlighting ranges Curves can be flooded against a configurable reference value or against
­another curve, configurable via color and transparency value
Curve calculation • Measured curve values or calculated curve values are the basis
• The calculation methods are addition, subtraction, multiplication, division,
integration, differentiation, Fast Fourier Transformation (FFT)
• Users can add their own calculation methods
Possibilities for making Yes, comparison of recordings from different time ranges as well as different
comparisons recordings
Interfaces Extendible with regard to specific calculation operations for curves and e
­ xport
functions for individual formats

299
 Testing and diagnostics

Scope 3
Data retention
Recording configuration Can be exported/imported as a file
Value storage On the controller or PC
Exchange formats A database for configuration and data can be exported/imported
Excel interface CSV export
System requirements
PC software (minimum) Processor 2 GHz, working memory 1024 MB RAM, hard disk drive with 250 MB
of free storage space, screen resolution 1024x768 pixels, Microsoft Windows XP
or higher
M1 software module M1 controller system (except for ME2xx) with M-Base 3.75 or higher
Design variants
SCOPE 3 Pro RT Software package to install on Windows PCs and M1 controllers for the
­diagnostics of signal waveforms (IO- and process variables). Stand-alone
task for recording and archiving of records on the controller, trigger and pre­
trigger, multiple recordings. Comprehensive graphical representation (chart)
and evaluation functions, data export on the PC, SolutionCenter integration.
License bound to target device.
SCOPE 3 DVD Installation medium for Scope 3 (DVD). Software module for the M1 controller
and Scope 3 tool for displaying recordings and data analysis. A Scope soft-
ware module without a valid runtime license can be used for up to two hours
for r­ ecordings. After that, the recording is stopped, but it is possible to restart
after a period of 10 minutes. Without a runtime license, archiving functions on
the M1 controller are disabled.

300
 Programming

Maximum performance for maximum stability.

Any automation platform is only as Also the model-based development via

good as the software that is available UML-Design /  coding or integration in
for it. The stability, real-time capability the function block editors of MATLAB®  /
and performance of the runtime Simulink® are unique in the industrial
system have the highest priorities. environment. Comprehensive, complete
The M1 automation system can be provided libraries simplify the use even of
programmed in the respective familiar complex units from automation, motion
environment of the automation engineer: control, and information technology / web.
All five languages of IEC 61131-3 are
supported, as are C, C++ or Java.

M-PLC programming interface

Features
Easy entry into IEC 61131-3
IT, ST, LD, FDB, CFC, QFB
Convenient debugging on the target system
with single-step, breakpoints, etc.
Provided libraries with pre-finished and tested
functions

C / C++ Developer

Features
Languages: ANSI C and C++
Gnu compiler gcc
Automatic adaptation and management
of the computer environment
Editor and debugger based on Eclipse CDT
Intellisense: Automatic supplementation
of structure elements
Syntax highlighting
Folding code ranges, e.g. for complete while loops

301
 Programming
M-PLC
Programming interface

PLC programming interface according to

IEC 61131-3

M-PLC is a complete development environment for

programming the M1 controller in accordance with
IEC 61131-3. The M-PLC puts a simple approach
to the powerful IEC language at the disposal of the
PLC programmer. Use of the edit and debugging
functions is based on the proven development
program environments of advanced programming
languages.

• Easy entry into IEC 61131-3

• All languages defined in IEC standard 61131-3 are
supported (instruction list, structured text, ladder
diagram, function block diagram, continuous
function chart, sequential function chart).
• Editor and debugging functions
• Provided libraries with pre-finished and tested
functions

Programming
• Editors for programming in all IEC 61131-3
languages
IL Instruction List
ST Structured Text
LD Ladder Diagram
FBD Function Block Diagram
SFC Sequential Function Chart
CFC Continuous Function Chart
• Syntax highlighting for key words defined in
IEC 61131-3
• Graphic project navigation bar (based on
Windows Explorer)
• Support of all elementary IEC 61131-3 data
types to 64 bit
• Support of fields, structures and pointers
• Graphic controller and task configuration
• CAN objects from *.dcf files in M-PLC can be
applied as symbols
• PB objects from *.2bf files in M-PLC can be
applied as symbols
• Library management for creation and
management of libraries
• Watch manager and recipe manager (freely
definable variable monitoring)
Controller Controller
• M-PLC can be started several times (multiple
projects open and online in parallel)
IEC61131
SMI
IEC61131
• Automatic project backup and creation of backup
• Project archiving on the controller
VxWorks

VxWorks
Tasks

Tasks
Tasks

Tasks

• Password protection for projects

Tasks
Tasks

• Offline simulation
• Online help
VxWorks VxWorks
• Data exchange system-wide via SVI/SMI
interface programming

302
 Programming

Runtime system Online functions

• Any number of running M-PLC projects on one • Online change (exchange of blocks in running
processor operation) also for multitasking projects
• Every PLC project supports up to 16 separate • Monitoring of all project variables
tasks • Writing and forcing of variables
• Each task can be configured independently of • Single cycle, single step and break points
the others in terms of (priority, task call-up • Sequence control (program lines that have
mode [event, timetrigger, free running, sync], been run through will be displayed)
watchdog) • Recording and graphic presentation of
• Actual multitasking via operating system tasks project variables – trace
(VxWorks)

SW module 1 SW module 2 SW module 3

C/C++ GD data
Simulink IEC61131 IEC61131

Global variables Global variables

VxWorks

VxWorks

VxWorks
Tasks

Tasks

Tasks
Tasks

Tasks

Tasks
Tasks

Tasks
Tasks

SMI/SVI

VxWorks

• Communication between software modules (pre-

compiled units)
• Between different tasks of an IEC61131 module:
global variables or SMI/SVI
• Between IEC61131 modules: GD flag
range or SMI/SVI
• Between IEC61131 modules and other modules
(C/C++, Simulink): SMI/SVI
• Between any modules on different controllers:
SMI
• Interface to visualization/SCADA/BDE
• Standard protocols: OPC DA, IEC 61850/
IEC61400, Modbus, …
• Libraries for integration into separate software
(for C/C++, C#.NET, Java)
• Support of battery-buffered data (RETAIN flag)

303
 Programming

Manufacturer libraries • Support for exception handling in the runtime

system
• STANDARD IEC 61131-3 Standard functions • Display of the status "in error handling"
and function blocks (ERROR) in the interface
• CONT_PLC 7 standard PID controllers • Implementation of the I/O modules of the process
• MIO_PLC Functions for direct access image in the runtime system
to hardware I/Os • Optimized for performance, flexibility and
• SMI_PLC Functions for fast combinability, shared use of an I/O module by
communication between modules multiple projects/SW modules possible
and controllers (SMI/SVI) • Saving/loading of the entire project including
• EHD_PLC Functions for inputting and sources to/from the controller
managing errors in the EHD • Transparency of the global variables
• UTIL_PLC Functions for access to RTC, (flags, symbolic variables, structures)
runtime system info, special controller- and visualization-wide
conversions 
• FILE_PLC Functions for access to files,
directories and serial Integration in the SolutionCenter
interfaces (projects are SW modules)
• CIA405 Functions for access to CAN
• DN_PLC Functions for access to • Generation of an executable *.m file with
device net configuration information
• PB_PLC Functions for access to Profibus • Task
 interval time measurement, can be queried in
• USS_PLC Functions for communication the project itself and in Device Manager
with "Micromaster" frequency • Watchdog integration
converters • Execution
 possible in an application layer
(memory protection)
• Install,
 start, stop, reset and delete of PLC
Extensions relative to CoDeSys projects in Device Manager
• Grouping possibility for I/O modules in the • The state machine of a PLC project in
process image (controller configuration) the runtime system always corresponds to the
• runtime-optimized process image (only model defined for SW modules.
channels being used are processed) • Integration
 via M1 system debug mode and M1
• CAN objects with symbolic names in the system logbook
process image • Start
 of a project when booting through entry in
• Addressing for inputs/outputs: undelayed MConfig.ini
access that bypasses the process image
• Adjustment of the interval time and watchdog
time in the controller configuration
• Multiple, concurrently running PLC projects
on one CPU with different priorities/
interval times
• Actual operating system tasks within the
PLC projects
• GD flag range for shared data from
multiple projects on one CPU
• RD flag range for remnant (battery-buffered) data
• Optionally, the normal flag range
(MX .. MR) can also be placed in the battery-
buffered memory area.
• Interface in the runtime system for libraries
• Initialization (C), deinitialization, version
check, memory management, management
of background tasks, provision for online change

304
 Programming

C / C++ Developer

High-level language programming in C and C++ is

also gaining increased significance in automation
technology. These languages are not only widely
used, they also offer the possibility of extremely
efficient programming and of encapsulating
frequently-used sequences in classes. The ability
to structure a software module into any number
of tasks, and in the process being able to use all
the resources of a powerful operating system,
VxWorks®, without restriction is an incredible
expansion of the possibilities. C  /  C++ Developer
enables programming in ANSI C, as well as
in C++.
Thanks to the mature interface and the restriction
to the required setting possibilities, getting started
with C and C ++ programming remains easy.
For the start of a new project multiple selectable
project templates available that already contain
all calls for the start of the software module
and its interaction with the operating system.
Consequently the programmer can immediately
devote himself to the logic of his application.
Projects can be compiled immediately after they
are created. The result is a finished, executable
program file for the M1 controller family. The
»make« environment and all configuration files
are managed and set up by C  /C++ Developer
automatically. For transfer of existing projects
from a different development environment there
is also the possibility of continuing to use the
existing configuration files for the compile process,
without having them managed by the C  /  C++
Developer (»unmanaged make«). Integration of
existing libraries (*.a) in projects is also possible,
as is generation of your own libraries.
The generated executable program file can be
directly transferred, configured, installed and
started from the C  /  C++ Developer on the control
system.

305
 Programming

Troubleshooting is supported by a mature • Languages

 ANSI C and C++
debugger that can not only be active after • Gnu compiler gcc
download of the project, but also enables • Automatic adaptation and management of the
integration of a software module that is already compiler environment
running. Set break points can be deactivated • Editor and debugger based on Eclipse CDT
and will be saved automatically in the project, in • Intellisense: Automatic supplementation of
addition they can also be saved in lists. In addition structure elements
to the break points, watch points, also referred • Syntax highlighting
to as »hardware breakpoints« are also available. • Folding code ranges, e. g. for complete
These do not stop a task when it executes a while loops
defined code, but rather they stop a task when • Jump to the declaration of variables and
a specific memory address is read and / or written functions from the code
to. • Debug agent integrated in the M1 operating
The contents of the stack variables and the global system (MSys), no additional settings are
variables are readable and writable, complex data necessary
types and structures are resolved appropriately • Installation and start of the created software
and mapped in the form a tree. In addition, any module from the development environment
number of memory contents can be listed in • Coupling of the debugger to the running
numeric format. software modules
All tasks that belong to the software module • Generation and integration of libraries
are presented. For each function that is in the • All important compiler settings are accessible
debugger the call-up hierarchy is displayed via dialogs
(stack trace).

306
 Model-based design/Simulation

Proven security for the future.

M-Target for Simulink® enables rapid simulation, before trials are executed
implementation of algorithms developed on real prototypes of machines and
in MATLAB®/Simulink® on the M1 plants. Automatic code generation
automation system. Processes are enables transfer of the developed
presented in the simulation environment algorithms to the controller and
of MATLAB® and suitable control and automatically establishes the connection
regulation strategies are developed for to the input/output modules used.
this. The overall system can be varied
as often as desired in the computer

307
 Model-based design/Simulation

®
M-Target for Simulink

Fast development of controllers and

sequence controllers

®
The MATLAB program package and the
®
associated toolbox, Simulink from Mathworks
Inc. are considered to be the worldwide standard
in the area of modeling dynamic systems in
technologically demanding processes.

With the complete integration of the M1 controller

as target system, a convenient and efficient
®
implementation of the MATLAB functions is
enabled on an M1 control system. The user can
concentrate exclusively on working in the familiar,
®
graphic Simulink programming environment,
where he can model the system in its entirety
and simulate the effect of changes even before
transfer to an M1 control system. The code for the
M1 target system is generated automatically in
the background and requires no knowledge of a
programming language. This complete integration
enables efficient programming and commissioning
of the M1 control system.

•F
 aster implementation of controllers through
shorter controller design phases
•S
 horter commissioning processes through
reliable automatic code generation
•H
 igher level of agreement between
machine model and controller model

® ®
Existing MATLAB / Simulink subsystems can
be reused in new simulations of the controller
programs. The integration of Bachmann »ready-
to-use« software modules facilitates development
of complex, customer-specific software. The
unique and direct interplay between process
model, controller model and support a more
Item Item no. stable modeling of the overall process. Transfer to
M-Target for Simulink the M1 controller is executed automatically from
® ®
One-time License 00015577-60 the MATLAB / Simulink environment, parameter
M-Target for Simulink variations in the model are implemented online
Annual Maintenance 00015577-70 in the M1 target system (target). Sequential
programs can be implemented through the
optional Stateflow and Coder toolboxes.

308
 Model-based design/Simulation

Development Process
1. Modeling 2. Simulation
Both plant (physical system) and control systems are The resulting complete model is now simulated
modeled in Simulink®. Using application specific offline on the computer. Comprehensive test
tools reduces the time spent developing the series of all possible operating conditions or
system. This is achieved by enabling the developer error situations are played through. Iterative
to use modeling languages native to the domain model adjustments and new simulations
of interest. Domain-specific products for physical follow seamlessly. The high-quality process/
modeling, such as SimElectronics, SimHydraulics, solver for numeric calculation of differential
SimMechanics, make it easier to create equations also prove themselves outside
intuitive, reusable models of the multidomain of simple analytical systems. Outstanding
physical system. For mathematical modeling, graphic depiction possibilities, such as curves
MATLAB® and Simulink® also offer a range of and surface plots and even animated 3D-CAD
capabilities. Established service companies models, optimize the work sequence.
offer additional expertise in all domains.

3. Generation and 4. Test and

1. Modeling 2. Simulation 5. Operation
download optimization

Parameters
Download

Commands

Monitoring
Output

Output

Output
Input

Input

Input

Process

309
 Model-based design/Simulation

3. Generation and download 5. Operation

In this step, the process model is first separated As soon as a satisfactory result is achieved, the
from the actual control or regulation part. Then project management PC can be separated from the
a mouse click triggers automatic code generation controller – which continues to run autonomously
and preparation of the application for the real- in real time. All interfaces to parallel-running
time system. This can be loaded directly from applications on the same (or other) controllers
the Simulink® interface into the controller. remain in place. The published process variables
can be depicted through the general engineering
tool SolutionCenter or in visualizations.

4. Test and optimization

The generated real-time program now runs in
the controller. But it can exchange data directly
with the Simulink® interface on the PC through
the communication interfaces integrated during
code generation. Then, in the so-called “external
mode”, the actual process values (variables,
channel values) are available directly online in
Simulink®. At the same time, variable values
or internal parameters of the Simulink® blocks
can also be changed from there in the real-time
program. In this mode, the Simulink® model
created by the developer is only the graphic
front end for visualization of process values and
stipulation of parameters. Using the real process
environment, the discovered solution can be
verified and further optimized. If necessary,
users can switch to a prior process step and
make changes there (iterative improvement).

External Mode
Display and change online data directly
from real-time systems in Simulink® .

310
Visualizing. Web-compliant. Versatile.

HMI and SCADA Solutions through web

technology

Increasing complexity and the constantly escalating level of automation in a

wide variety of systems demand future-oriented technologies to monitor and
control processes effectively. HMI and SCADA systems contribute significantly
in this regard and guarantee a highest possible degree of security. Moreover,
future applications have to be able to demonstrate a high degree of flexibi-
lity; even connecting to fixed operator control stations in the age of mobile
terminals is a thing of the past.

Due to its generic structure, the specially designed HMI and SCADA solutions
from Bachmann electronic for professional and control center technology can
be used in all areas of application and industries like energy, plant construc-
tion and mechanical engineering, maritime applications, building control
systems in the infrastructure sector or logistics. The modern and efficient
structure makes for scaling from extremely small applications with scarcely a
dozen information points up to industrial-scale systems with several hundred
thousand process values. Top-quality user interfaces are produced by using
web technologies alone, while installations on the HMI equipment fall by the
wayside. Visualization is available on all equipment with a standard browser
and is not constrained by screen sizes and resolutions.

314
 atvise® scada

The new "Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition" solution puts the Internet in the service of
the automation world thanks to pure Web technology. With the continuous use of industrial and
communication standards (e.g. OPC UA), the engineering effort is reduced to a minimum.

• Latest-generation SCADA/HMI system

• Client-server architecture (multi-client)
• History database
• User administration & access security
• Java Script server- and client side, open for customer-specific adaptation of the Java Script
• OPC UA Data Access and Alarms & Conditions interface to superior systems

Client Client Client Client

Ethernet/Internet

atvise® scada
Server Engineering Tool

Ethernet/Internet

PLC PLC PLC PLC

315
 atvise® scada

atvise® scada
Pure web Supervisory Control and Data
Acquisition Solution

The provision of information independent of

location and daytime has become the paradigm
of all areas of our life in our Internet age. This
requirement expands within the industrial
automation in terms of role- and person-selective
operation and process manipulation. Conventional
control and operating systems emerged along
with other requirements and were based on older,
restrictive technologies, making their suitability
clearly limited for today’s challenges.

State-of-the-Art Technology
By using the latest technologies for the
development atvise® scada, classical limitations
have been overcome: the Internet now serves the
automation world - the visualization is based on
pure web technology. The implementation of valid
industrial and communication standards (e.g. OPC
UA) allows for example customers to reduce the
efforts in project and maintenance to a minimum.

Open Standards
By focusing on international standards (such
as HTML5, SVG - vector graphics, TCP / IP) the
generated user interface is displayed and executed
on all popular Web browsers without special
additives, such as individual plug-ins, ActiveX,
Java or Silverlight. This means added value in
various ways: Web browsers are everywhere
device independently available - whether on
the particular facility level or in the case of
remote services. Eliminating cumbersome client
installations and updates means less effort for
operation and maintenance. Maximum possibilities
in graphic design along with maximum access
security are the values of benefit that the latest

Item Item No.

atvise scada 50 CCD* - micro 00021504-00
atvise scada 150 CCD* - small 00021504-10
atvise scada 1500 CCD* - standard 00021504-20**
atvise scada 10000 CCD* - large 00021504-30**
atvise scada Unlimited CCD* - xxl 00021504-40

atvise Server-sided Scripting Option 00021679-00

atvise Fixed Client Option 00021680-00
atvise Elements Option 00021681-00

* CCD = Concurrent Connected Data points (via http). e.g.: 50CCD = an opened
Web browser displays 50 data points or two opened Web browsers display 25 data points apiece, etc.
** Starting with the standard, a fixed workstation is included 316
 atvise® scada

stage of expansion of the Internet (web 2.0) and to its generic structure can be utilized in all fields
the smartphone era offer. atvise scada is completely and industries. The modern and efficient design
based on standards rather than the makeshift „to allows scaling from small applications with only a
connect to the outside,“ therefor securing highest few dozens data-points to world-scale plants with
performance, scalability and simplicity. more than 100,000 process variables

Powerful Engineering Tool • Latest generation SCADA / HMI system

The project and configuration is done with the • Client-Server architecture (Multi-client)
engineering tool atvise builder from any PC. Via LAN • User interfaces in pure web technology
or Internet the tool accesses the server and allows • Device and operating system independent
online, during ongoing operation of the plant, e.g. the (HTML5, SVG) PC / Mac / Unix, Tablet,
creation of data objects, the configuration of alarms or Smartphone, iPad ...*
the drawing of process images. • Process connection OPC UA
A variety of preconfigured standard objects and • Online Engineering / multi-user
panel layouts are available. Their graphics have been • Built-in alarm system
created with the onboard-tools of the atvise builders • History database
editor and therefore are completely customizable • Online-/offline trending
by the user. The user can also create own objects • Online language/font switching
and apply the pre-configured dynamizations to • User management and access security
these elements. The designed user interfaces are • Java script, server- and client-sided
immediately and without any modification applicable • OPC UA Data Access and Alarm Conditions
on all target systems - regardless of screen resolution, interface to superior level systems
operating system or Web browser. Refresh rates and
response surpass all previous experience with Web
applications and even conventional supervisory control
systems.

SCADA Functions
atvise scada in general supports all typical SCADA
functionalities in regards to alarming, historisation,
trending, user management and multi-language.
For specific requirements an additional high
performance client-and server-side Java Script option
is available within a built-in script editor.
This system has been specifically designed for
professional automation and control systems and due

* Current browser compatibility list can be called up at www.atvise.com.

317
 atvise® scada

Client Client Client Client

Ethernet/Internet

atvise® scada
Server Engineering Tool

Ethernet/Internet

PLC PLC PLC PLC

318
 atvise® scada

atvise®
Process interface
Protocols OPC Unified Architecture (UA) Data Access
OPC Data Access V2.05, V3.0
webMI Data Interface
Physical interface Ethernet (physical type dependent on target system)
Parallel operation yes (multiple protocols, multiple data sources)
Data types all OPC UA compliant elementary types, arrays and structures
Data mapping integrated (to digital, analog and string as elements of arbitrary
structures)
Data model mapping yes (automatically)
Data naming arbitrary names (use source name possible)
Source time stamping yes (from PLC/controller, OPC compliant)
Quality tagging yes (from PLC/controller, OPC compliant)
Transmission mode event-driven, cyclically (configurable)
Update rate dependent on project and configuration (starting from 100 ms)*
sampling and publish intervals configurable
Update inhibition time / threshold dependent
Connection monitoring yes
Access control / security yes (OPC UA compliant, including SSL encryption)
Namespace browsing yes (hierarchical browsing interface at design and runtime)
Simulation mode yes
Logging yes (diagnostics user interface per item element)
Server
Core technology C++ platform independent
Process data model fully structured, object oriented (hierarchy, derived types)
Engineering model type (class) / instantiated objects, inherited properties
Data volume scalable and dependent on hardware platform
(with Windows 7 32-Bit up to approx. 700 000 process items)*
Multi processing multithreaded computation / benefits from multi-core / multi-CPU
systems
Server time stamping yes (additionally to source time stamp)
Database embedded, powerfail-safe
Configuration storage engineering database
Alarm system OPC UA Alarms & Conditions compliant (arbitrary alarm categories)
Historian process value database with incremental archiving
archive groups with configurable sampling interval and offset
alarm database (alarm history)
Longtime archiving yes (data aggregation, derived long term archives)
Trending online trending (without archiving)
historical trending (offline)
combined online/offline trending

* Performance data depends on data volume, computation power, (available) controller performance /
device and network topology/-load. Performance depends generally on application.

319
 atvise® scada

atvise®
Server
Trend configuration fixed configuration at design time
user configurable tend displays at runtime (persistable)
User administration yes (privileges/rights, groups, users)
Functional Extensions Java Script (server sided)
full access to all item releated functions and external databases (via
ODBC)
specific extensions via DLL
Module interface C++ API
Virtualization possible
Client Interface HTTP / HTTPS (integrated webserver)
Supervisory Interface OPC UA Data Access (also atvise® <-> atvise® connectivity)
(supervisory systems) OPC UA Alarms & Conditions
Client
Technology client up to date, standard-compliant web browser*
Technology process images HTML, SVG, Java Script
Number of clients technically almost any number of clients (>>20)
dependent on license, see also Installation/CCDs
Zooming yes, continously
Deluttering yes (zoom level dependent visibility/content)
Scaling yes (automatic resize/adaption to client device)
Vector graphics yes (lossless scaling/zooming)
Base objects see “Configuration/Engineering"
Process objects see “Configuration/Engineering”
Alarm screen yes
Trend / multitrend yes
Operator input protocol yes
Operation mouse or other pointer devices
keyboard (hotkeys configurable)
touchscreen, multitouch**
Multi language yes (online language change)
Font type switching yes (online)
Character sets any (inclusive asian sign languages, cyrillic etc.)
Maps / GIS yes
Parallel content yes (anything running in a web browser: HTML, Video, Audio,
VRML/3D, Chat, …)
Functional extensions Java Script (client sided)

* Latest browser compatibility list can be accessed at www.atvise.com

** Multitouch support depends on specific device functionality, operating system and web browser

320
 atvise® scada

atvise®
Configuration/engineering
Data model editor yes (integrated in atvise® builder)
Prozess image editor (fully yes (integrated in atvise® builder)
graphical)
Programming editor yes (integrated Java Script Editor in atvise® builder)
Page editor yes (integrated HTML Source Editor in atvise® builder, not required for
engineering)
Engineering model type (Class) / instantiated objects, inheritance of properties,
graphical objects (face plates) may be a property of a data object
Graphical objects primitives: line, polygon, shape (any), rectangle, ellipse, etc.
widgets: label, text field, table, trend etc.
Object library yes , comprehensive catalogue of predefined standard objects in pure
vector graphics (adjustable, extensible), contains beyond others bar
graphs, gauges, tanks, engines, etc.
Picture library yes (optional)
Graphic format support SVG (and others compliant to W3C)
Animations text, value, boundary color, background color, text color, visibility,
operability, size x/y, position x/y, rotation, flashing, ...
Advanced graphics arbitrary shapes and clippings, bevel, simple and complex gradient
shading, transparency, semi transparency (alpha blending), rotation,
shading, transformation/adaption of existing SVG graphics
Server interface OPC UA (Ethernet/Internet)
Online engineering yes (project changes during runtime/operation)
Remote engineering yes (remote access possible)
Multi engineering yes (several engineering users work on one project)
Variations Engineering system atvice builder can offer a configured feature set
to users (different groups / qualification levels in engineering)
Import/export XML and CSV
Installation
Clients no installation required (pure web technology)
Server installation by Internet/network (or CD-ROM)
Configured installation yes (project specific adjustments via XML)
Licensing CCD (Concurrent Data Points) - simultanously displayed data items on
all connected clients
License protection hardware dependent software key (server sided)

321
 atvise® scada

atvise®
Diagnosis
Process data monitor yes
Process data statistics yes
Systemlog yes
Online help system yes
System requirements server
Device minimum: PC or server with at least 500 MHz Intel
Pentium oder equivalent, 512 MB RAM (project dependent), network
(LAN), input devices, 128 MB available disk space.
Recommended: PC or server with 1.6 GHz Intel Pentium or equiva-
lent, 2 GB RAM (project dependent), network (LAN), input device,
display 1280x1024, 512 MB available disk space**
Operating system Windows XP SP3, Windows 7 (32), Windows 7 (64)***,
Windows Server 2008
Operating elements not required (headless server operation with remote administration
possible)
System requirements engineering
Device PC with 1,6 GHz Intel Pentium equivalent or better, 2G B RAM (project
dependent), network (LAN), display 1280x1024, 512 MB available
disk space
Operating system Windows XP SP3, Windows 7 (32), Windows 7 (64)***,
Windows Server 2008
Operating elements keyboard, 2-button mouse
System requirements client
Device PC, notebook, tablet, smartphone, iPad or similar.
Required CPU-performance und memory depends on device type/
technology and project size / parameters
Operating system any (Web browser is relevant)
Web browser* any up-to-date Web Browser (Java Script, HTML 5, SVG)
e.g. recent versions of Internet Explorer, Firefox, Chrome, Safari or
similar
Operating elements dependent from device technolgy and operating system

* Latest browser compatibility list can be accessed at www.atvise.com

** For large scale configurations state-of-the-art server hardware with up to date performance
*** Windows 7 64-Bit currently in 32-Bit compatibility mode, full 64-Bit support in preparation

322
 atvise® scada

atvise®
Variants
atvise scada 50 CCD* - micro atvise scada software package for one SCADA Server for Windows
(web licening), limited to a maximum of 50 concurrent visualised
datapoints
atvise scada 150 CCD* - small atvise scada software package for one SCADA Server for Windows
(web licening), limited to a maximum of 150 concurrent visualised
datapoints
atvise scada 1500 CCD* - standard atvise scada software package for one SCADA Server for Windows
(web licening), limited to a maximum of 1500 concurrent visualised
datapoints **
atvise scada 10000 CCD* - large atvise scada software package for one SCADA Server for Windows
(web licening), limited to a maximum of 10000 concurrent visualised
datapoints **
atvise scada unlimited CCD* - xxl atvise scada software package for one SCADA Server for Windows
(web licening), more then 10000 concurrent visualised datapoints
atvise serversided scripting option offers serversided scripting in JavaScript on the atvise scada server
(requires atvise scada)
atvise fixed client option grants access for an additional operating station, independent of the
actual status of the CCD count (requires atvise scada "standard" or
higher)
atvise elements option advanced symbol and objects library with more than 4,000 high
quality vector graphic elements (per engineering workstation)

* CCD = Concurrent Connected Datapoints (over http). E.g.: 50 CCD = one opened webbrowser
displaying 50 datapoints or two opened webbrowser displaying 25 datapoints each, etc.
** Licenses "standard" and higher include 1 fixed client

323
atvise® scada

324
 M1 webMI pro

The M1 webMI pro server for Web visualization runs directly on the controller, slim and high-
performing software that makes any device with a browser into a user interface for a machine
anywhere at any time.

• directly integrated into the M1 controller system

• No dedicated HMI devices necessary
• Free scalability thanks to vector graphics (SVG)
• Device and operating system-independent for, e.g., operator terminals, iPad, ...
• Operate and monitor with standard browser
• Alarming and journaling of variables

Client Client Client Client

Ethernet/Internet

PLC

M1 webMI pro

325
 M1 webMI pro

M1 webMI pro
Web visualization directly on the controller

For the operation and monitoring of machines

and systems, usually dedicated MMI devices
are required and the software for this purpose
must be installed and allocated. Thanks to the
M1 webMI pro, this is no longer necessary; here,
the visualization is integrated directly on the
controller. As a result, each authorized device
using a current browser becomes the HMI - always
and everywhere.

Pure Web standards

With the M1 webMI pro it is possible to exploit
the advantages of the Web technologies entirely
without limiting add-ons such as browser plug-
ins and ActiveX. Any visualization devices from
smartphones to a high-performance control panel
can be connected directly to the M1 controller via
a secure web server - operating and monitoring
when- and wherever the process calls for it.

High-quality user interface

The integration into the powerful M1 controller
system is evidence of the kind of performance
that state-of-the art web technologies provide:
A flicker-free display is produced even at data
update rates of well under 100 ms and with
hundreds of animated graphic elements. The
additional resources that are required here are
minimal.

When viewing an M1 webMI pro visualization

page, the singular advantages of HTML5 and SVG
(Scalable Vector Graphics), the basis of all graphic
objects, become immediately apparent. Perfect
graphic results are achieved with zero loss of
quality when scaling and zooming.

Item Item No.

M1 webMI pro RT 00022839-63
M1 webMI pro YMT 00022839-70
M1 webMI pro Starter 00022846-00
M1 webMI pro DVD 00022839-00

326
 M1 webMI pro

All major HMI functions on board

Thanks to fully-graphic planning incl. dynamization of
the objects depicted, the creation of visualizations is
easy and possible without programming knowledge.
Here all functions of a modern HMI solution such as
alarming, journaling, trending, user administration,
and multilinguality are supported. Special
requirements of the HMI can be implemented via
client-slide Java scripts, there are practically no limits
to the possibilities.

• Directly integrated in the controller

• Client-server architecture (multi-client)
• User interface in pure Web technology
• Device and operating system-independent (HTML5,
SVG) PC/Mac/Unix, tablet, smartphone, iPad, …*
• Alarming and journaling of variables
• Graphic trend display
• Online language/font switchover
• User administration & access security
• Client-side Java Script

* Current browser compatibility list can be called up

at www.atvise.com.

Client Client Client Client

Ethernet/Internet

PLC

M1 webMI pro

327
 M1 webMI pro

M1 webMI pro
Server
Installation Web server as a software module directly on the M1 controller via
SolutionCenter
Parallel Operation yes, multiple visualizations can be run on several TCP interfaces
Sampling interval Server monitors the process variables in a cycle of 50 to 5000 ms
Access security/Security yes (AccessControl of the M1, HTTPS with SSL encryption)
Server time stamp yes
Alarm system Alarms on variables incl. persistence of the alarm status
Archiving Archiving of the process values on the controller, configuration of the
sample intervals via archive groups, up to 100.000 data points can be
stored in the database
User Administration yes (rights, groups, users)
Functional expansions yes, M1 applications can provide data for processing in the HMI
Client
Installation No installation necessary
Technology process images HTML, SVG, Java Script
Number of clients Up to 16 clients at the same time
Zooming yes, continuously without quality loss
Scaling yes (automatic adaptation of the resolution on the target device)
without additional engineering effort
Vector graphics yes (all components of the HMI are SVGs)
Trend yes (live trending and historical data views are possible)
Operation Mouse or other pointing device
Keyboard (hotkeys can be configured)
Touchscreen, Multitouch**
Multilingual yes (online)
Font switching yes (online)
Fonts any (including Asian-language characters, Cyrillic, etc.)
Embedding of external contents yes (everything that runs in the Web browser: HTML, video, audio,
VRML/3D chat, etc.)*
Functional expansions Total flexibility through Java Script (client-side)

* Current browser compatibility list can be called up at www.atvise.com.

** Multi-touch dependent on device functionality, operating system and browser version

328
 M1 webMI pro

M1 webMI pro
Configuration/Engineering
Variable integration Variables can be read in directly from the M1 controller
Fully-graphic process image editor yes (integrated into atvise builder)
Program editor yes (integrated Java Script editor in atvise builder)
Page editor yes (integrated HTML source editor in atvise builder)
Graphic objects Primitive: line, polygon, shape (any), rectangle, ellipse, bezier curve, etc.
Widgets: label, text field, table, trend, etc.
Object library yes, extensive catalog of pre-configured standard objects in pure
­ ector graphic (adaptable, expandable) contains among other things
v
bar graphs, tacho/gauges, tanks, engines and much more
Graphic incorporation SVG (and all other according to W3C) as well as pixel graphics (PNG,
JPG, etc.)
Animation types Text, value, frame color, background color, text color, visibility,
­operability, size x/y, position x/y, rotation, blinking, distortion, …
Graphic options Any shapes & sectors, roundings, simple and complex color
­ rocesses, transparency, semi-transparency (alpha blending),
p
­rotation, shading, transformation/change of existing SVG graphics
Interface to the server HTTP(S), FTP(S)
Import/Export XML (customer-specific expansions feasible)
System prerequisites
Clients commercially available browser only*
Server All M1 CPUs except ME203 (MH2xx, MC2xx, MPC2xx, MX2xx)
with at least M-Base 3.85
Ausführungen
M1 webMI pro RT Licenses to operate the M1 webMI pro on one controller CPU.
­Deployment of dynamized web pages (HTML, SVG) via the integra-
ted web server to display on modern browser-enabled devices. Data
coupling to SVI and IO channels locally, simple alarm handling and
archiving value directly to the controller system. Engineering with
ativse Builder and SolutionCenter.
M1 webMI pro AMT Product support and updates delivery of webMI pro for one year.
M1 webMI pro Starter Combination package of 10 Runtime Licenses M1 webMI pro, ­basic
training M1 webMI pro for up to 8 people, advanced training M1
­webMI pro for up to 4 people. One Year of product support and up-
dates delivery are included in this package (Annual Maintenance).
(Can only be ordered once per company, only one date per training,
prices for training location Feldkirch/A or Bochum/D otherwise extra
travel expenses are added).
M1 webMI pro DVD Installation media for webMI (DVD). Graphical development tool
atvise Builder and runtime component M1 webMI pro. Without valid
Runtime License only limited operation possible. Requires M-Base SC.

* Current browser compatibility list can be called up at www.atvise.com.

329
M1 webMI pro

330
 Vis Designer

The Bachmann Vis Designer visualization package is a comprehensive software solution for all
the requirements of fully-graphic machine and plant visualization.

• Full-graphic visualization software for HMI applications (operating  /  monitoring)

• Complete configuration tool with graphic user interface (Eclipse)
• Platform-neutral thanks to Java technology
• Online language switchover
• Recipes  /  dataset management

Vis Designer

Based on the latest Java technology the Vis

Designer enables creation and operation of graphic
user interfaces, both in the form of conventional
applications, as well as for web access (applets).
Vis Designer is available as an intuitively
operated, graphic editor for generation process
images. From the supplied basic elements,
such as buttons, input fields, or selection lists,
the pages are built up and linked with process
variables. Your own graphics and icons can be
easily imported. Convenient dialogs guide the
user through all important work steps so that no
programming skills whatsoever are required for
a simple visualization.

Finished created applications can be executed

per mouse click, either as a complete application
directly on the PC, or they can be installed as
software modules on the visualization devices of
the WT, CT, OT, or IPC series. Another possibility
is that the application can also be stored as an
applet on a web server (e.g. on an M1 controller).
In this case the visualization application can
be loaded and executed from any Java-capable
visualization device (PC, IPC, OT, WT, CT). The
running application is fully network capable
and communicates autonomously with the
SVI interfaces of all automation devices from
Bachmann electronic.

331
 Vis Designer

• Full-graphic visualization software for

HMI applications (operating/monitoring)
• Complete configuration tool with graphic user
interface
• Platform-neutral thanks to Java technology
• Visualization can run on
• PC / IPC
• Operator terminals (OT, WT)
• Control terminals
• Web-capable through applets and
Java Webstart
• Extensive presentation possibilities
• Online language switchover
• Recipes / dataset management
• Alarm handling, message screen
• Trend presentation
• Mature window technology (frames, dialogs)
• Input aids: Cursor linking, tab order, soft
keyboard, number pad
• Extensive cross-references / search function

The Vis Designer supports the most important

control elements and image formats, it is fully-
graphic and allows the use of different fonts.
The user of the visualization application can
switchover between any number of languages
online. In addition, to numerous animation types,
pre-finished and easy to configure commands
can be stored for user inputs.

332
 Vis Designer

Vis Designer
Features – development environment
Project management multiple projects  /  concurrently in access
Project data storage configuration time: XML
runtime: compiled Java code
Image creation graphic editor and configurators: Vis Designer
Presentation fully-graphic
Color depth designer trueColor
Window technology yes (Elipse dockable views and perspectives)
Page display multi-document view (multiple pages open in parallel)
Navigation project tree and tabs in the main view
Zoom in the editor yes (infinite)
Project planning aids wizards, content assistance, problems view with
quick-fix function, drag & drop
Undo / Redo yes (user-defined depth)
Cross-reference function yes (with list output  /  search tree)
Search function wild card search and filtering in tables
Graphic objects line, circle/ellipse, rectangle, button, text (label), input field,
text field, combo box, check box, radio box, image/icon, scale, poin-
ter instrument, table, trend
Animations value presentation (formated), number format, visibility, operability,
presentation, image content, image sequence, color change, fill level,
position, pointer position, transparency (operating-system dependent)
Reuse / templates (groups of animated graphic objects) with the possibility
object orientation of reuse through referenced variables (placeholders). Changes to the
template will be automatically effective in every instance.
User interaction input, mouse click left (touch), mouse click right, selection,
Hover, etc.
Commands -V  alue: write constant  /  toggle value  /  copy from variable  /  increment
(with step)  /  decrement (with step)
- Recipe (dataset): load   /   save
- Image change (with target area)
- Language switchover
- Data source: connect  /  disconnect  /  change (multiplex)
- Start program, data operations, and much more
Number formatting freely definable for variable configuration
Value ranges freely definable for variable configuration
Variable definition manual in the table or import of online controllers
Local variables yes
Colors visualization as many as desired (functional color names  /  referencing)
Fonts TrueType fonts can be imported; functional font names
with referencing
Language switchover editor yes
Number of languages  /  project User defined (memory-dependent)

333
 Vis Designer

Vis Designer
Features – development environment
Transfer to target device Can run as:
• application on the PC / IPC (local or on the network)
• application on Bachmann target device (OT, CT, WT)
• Java applet on Bachmann M1 controller and execution in the brow-
ser
• Webstart application
Preview yes
• Not dynamized in the editor or
• local
 deployment dynamized (process data connection)
Recipe management integrated (flat dataset handling)
Button navigation runtime cursor linking can be manually configured or generated automatically.
Preview of the jump targets directly in the editor
Tabulator navigation runtime tab order can be manually configured or generated automatically.
Preview of the jump targets directly in the editor
Features – runtime system
Type PC, IPC, WT or CT series
Graphic depending on the target device from QVGA (320x240) to XGA
Presentation fully-graphic
Colors depends on the target device (to TrueColor)
Fonts TrueType fonts can be used in the project planning (at runtime,
then either converted embedded fonts, or use of the TrueType fonts
installed on the target system)
Operation 2-button mouse, keyboard, touch screen, or membrane keyboard
Navigation in the image menus, cursor linking, (arrow keys), tab linking, mouse
Menus configurable
Number of process images user defined (memory-dependent)
(pages)
Number of objects  /  image user defined (performance-dependent)
Online language switchover yes, online
Language management/switcho- yes, online (user-defined number of color schemes, e.g. for day/night
ver or for error indication)
Communication with the Bachmann M1 VHD  /  SVI with automatic communication groups
controller
Protocols TCP  /  IP, UDP  /  IP, QSOAP
Communication security SSL (Secure Socket Layer)
Multiplexing of controllers yes (can be selected from the interface)
Number of data sources user-defined (data from multiple controllers can be presented
in the same process image)

334
 Visualization

Greater transparency and flexibility in process visualization.

The clear and understandable of the Bachmann software is based on

presentation of process and machine Java and web technologies.
information, as well fully intuitive This offers independence from devices
interaction are the center of the and operating systems and saves time,
visualization software from Bachmann as well as maintenance costs. The
electronic. provided »ready-to-use« functions,
In order to provide these characteristics, the available libraries and components,
not only locally on the machine, but and the extraordinary suitability
also in a distributed manner on the of Java for visualization tasks reduce
intranet / Internet, the latest generation engineering effort of the applications.

M-JVIS, M-JSYS Tool library

Features
Tool library for Java visualizations
Management of process variables and their values
Language management  /  switchover
Alarm handling
Quality table
Communication to the controller (RPC, FTP, Vis)
Basis of M1 software modules
Monitoring the communication

335
 Visualization

M-JVIS, M-JSYS
Tool library

M-JVIS and M-JSYS are libraries for creation

of visualizations under Java that can be used
platform-independently on Java-capable devices.
The components are based on Java version 1.1.8.
This version is supported by the VM (virtual
machine) from Bachmann electronic.

M-JVIS consists of the following packages:

•M  -JVIS  /  DACC
• M-JVIS  /  UTIL
• M-JVIS  /  GUI

The packages are divided into two types

of classes:

• Configuration classes that are implemented

in the form of beans
• Runtime
 classes that allow a dynamic
configuration and during runtime handle
the management or presentation of the data

The configurations of all objects are

stored in XML files.

336
 Visualization

M-JVIS / DACC M-JVIS / GUI

The M-JVIS  /  DACC package manages The M-JVIS  /  GUI contains the graphic components
process variables and their values The graphic components are based on AWT.
(DACC = Data Access).
M-JVIS  /  GUI consists of the following components:
M-JVIS / DACC consists of the following • XY diagram
components: • Table
• Process variable management • Tree view
• Recipe management • Screen keyboard
• Unit switchover • Input fields
• Communication interface • Button

M-JVIS / UTIL M-JSYS

The M-JVIS  /  UTIL package consists of the The M-JSYS package allows general access to the
following components: control system.
• Language management  /  language switchover • Read-out
 and change of the controller
• Protocols configuration
• Alarm handling • RPCs for control
• Quality table  /  statistical process control • Access to system software modules

Web-Start / browser

M-JVIS / GUI

XY-diagram Buttons Table Input error Tree-view Screen

keyboard

Visualization
XML

M-JVIS / DACC M-JVIS / UTIL

Process Quality stab. /

Units Recipe Alarm Logging
variable stat. process
conversion management handling
management control

Communic­
M1-proxy Language
ation
switchover
interface

Visualization device

M1 controller

M-SYS

PLC task C task Java task

337
Visualization

338
339
Standardized. Special. Overlapping.

Motion Control –
standardized drive control

The requirements imposed on modern drive technology are becoming ever

more specialized, and not rarely are mechanical engineers confronted with
special requests or special regulations from the customer side. Even with
the most modern machines, with the most innovative drives, individual
drive solutions are still requested. No problem for Bachmann electronic:
with the M1 automation system, drive controllers can be selected with
complete independence from the drive type.

Building on the IEC 61800-7 standard, an open and universal interface to

the drive technology is implemented in the M1 automation system, with
the name »Drive Middleware«. Drive Middleware takes over the translation
from the logical drive with a manufacturer-independent, standardized drive
profile on the respective physical drive.

The Drive Middleware interface permits selection of a drive that is

perfectly matched to the respective requirements. In this regard the
fieldbus technology (CANopen, EtherCAT, SERCOS, PROFINET, etc.) or the
product line of the drive manufacturer are irrelevant. Thanks to fieldbus-
independence with concurrent standardization of the fieldbus profiles, the
finished Motion Control applications can be implemented in the shortest
time possible and the training/maintenance costs of the various drive
worlds are significantly reduced. At Bachmann electronic, perfect solutions
for every request are just part of the standard.

340
 Control

Professional motion guidance for individual requirements.

With expert know-how gained through palette of freely usable components

years of experience in the area of control extends from simple motion control
and system technology, Bachmann of multiple axes, to CNC and shaft
electronic is indisputably one of the controllers, to special modules for
leading providers of special solutions demanding temperature applications.
in the industry. This knowledge and
the associated technology does not
necessarily have to be worked out by each
company itself. Customers and partners of
Bachmann electronic can rely on proven
and highly-optimized software controllers
for a wide variety of applications. Thus
years of development work can be
embedded as a finished, configurable
module in your own application.

Extensive libraries for C or

IEC61131-3 encapsulate the functionality
and guarantee standardized access
from the application program. Naturally
all controller modules from Bachmann
electronic support SVI communication
(Standard Variable Interface), as well
as the synchronizing function »Sync« of
the M1 system family. Commissioning
and diagnostic tools with graphic
interface designed by experienced
users additionally facilitate use. The

M-SMC M-CNC
Software Motion Control Three-dimensional
motions
Features Features
Software module for regulating Path motion for Cartesian
the speed and / or position 3-axis system
of motion axes Profile specification in accordance
Combined actuator  /  controller with DIN 66025 (program structure
operation of numerically-controlled axes)
Master  /  slave operation Interfaces (analog, incremental,
for parallel guided motions fieldbus, etc.)
Convenient commissioning Configuration and diagnostics
via monitor via Device Manager
Library for IEC 61131-3 Commissioning interface
PLC programs (CNC monitor)
Library for IEC 61131-3 PLC
programs

341
 Control

M-SHAFT
Shaft controller

Features
Software module that simulates
a virtual shaft from 0° to 360°
Cyclic and synchronous regulation
of 32-axes
Speed of the shaft can be changed
in running operation
Independent master operation or
can be synchronized as slave
Convenient axis commissioning
via monitor

Drive Middleware

Features
Uniform, fieldbus-independent
programming of motion
applications in accordance
with IEC 61800-7
Full integration in the Bachmann
SolutionCenter
Easy addition of new,
supplemental drives
Position control, speed control,
and torque control are integrated
Easy management of the drive
parameters

M-TEMP
Temperature controller

Features
Temperature control software
for universal implementation
Modes: Actuator or controller
(2-3 point)
Automatic parameter assignment
(learn function)
Heating power monitoring
Sensor failure detection
For heating sections, cooling
sections, and combined sections

342
 Control

M-SMC
Software Motion Control

Software module for regulating the speed and /

or position of motion axes Based on a simple
configuration a wide variety of options or modes
of regulation can be selected.

•C  onfiguration as speed controller, position

controller, or underlying speed controller
(cascade control)
• Combined actuator  /  controller operation
•M  aster  /  slave operation for parallel guided
motions
•S  pecification of speed, accelerations, delays
and the target position to be approached
•S  pecification of position tolerance window and
tolerance monitoring time (settling time)
•Sampling times: min. 200 µs, in 100 µs
increments
•E  asy application through FUB interface
for PLC programs
•C  ommissioning interface

343
 Control

Features

•U  p to 16 freely configurable axes •S

 oftware module available for all M1 processor
per SMC module can be defined modules
• Software module can be loaded multiple times •E
 asy integration of visualization systems
• Free configuration of the hardware through disclosure of the parameter interfaces
input and output signals via Device Manager and addressing via symbolic variables
• »Controller enable« signal (output), •D
 ifferent methods of interpolation for position,
»controller ready« signal (input) speed and acceleration
• Master slave relationship between axes •C
 onfigurable PID controller structure
• Flying saw with FeedForward
• Online switchover from speed •D
 ifferent methods for implementing
to position specification master/slave applications
• Online change of the controller parameters •S
 upport of fieldbus systems
• Change of target position or speed during travel (CAN, SERCOS, EtherCAT)
• Selection of different pre-defined •E
 asy commissioning through
referencing methods is possible the Windows interface SMC monitor
•R  eversing operation with teach function for •T
 est function for determination of
controller adjustment the section parameters
• I ntegrated drag error monitor with various
response methods and status output
•M  onitoring of software limit switches
•M  onitoring of hardware limit switches
•P  LC function library

Visualization SMC monitor

M1 controller

M-SMC Application
(PLC / C)
Manipulated variable
Position

Speed

Motion unit

ENC M T

344
 Control

M-SHAFT
Shaft controller

M-SHAFT is a software module that simulates

a virtual shaft that turns from 0° to 360°.
Different axis types can be synchronized on this
shaft. M-SHAFT is ideally suited for machines with
a cyclically recurring sequence, such as packaging
machines, processing machines, etc.

•S  peed (rpm) of the shaft can be changed in

running operation
• I ndependent master operation or can be
synchronized as slave
•U  p to 32 axes per software module can be
synchronized to the shaft
•S  tep up  /  step down ratio for each axis can be
freely selected
•A  xes can be switched on and off in running
operation
•E  nd position monitor and dead time
compensation for digital axes
•O  ffline collision monitoring of the axes
•C  onvenient commissioning tool M-SHAFT
monitor

345
 Control

Profile specification Axis types

•O  ffline or online profile specification for each • Regulated, absolute

axis is possible (absolute coordinates, e. g. lift cylinder)
• Profile specification via an external file is •R  egulated, relative
possible (up to 360 interpolation points) (relative coordinates, e. g. feed)
• Profile calculation online in the production cycle •A  nalog
without stop (online interpolation) (analog manipulated variable, e. g. -10 .. +10 V)
• Free selection of the type of interpolation •D  igital (e. g. pneumatic ejector, press)
between the interpolation points • Multi-cam (16 digital cams per axis)
• Interpolation types: Linear, sinoid, sinus2,
modified sinus, spline, trapeze, Bestehorn, Summary – features
polygon 6th degree, temporal, ext. signal
 onfigurable and parameter-assignable
•C
Table interpreter software module
•A
 ll options can be configured via software
• Profile calculation for minimal cycle times (number of axes, axis type, I  /  Os, etc.)
via table interpreter •F
 ast commissioning via graphic
•R  ecord by record position-oriented consideration presentation of all datasets
of profiles (similar to CNC) •H
 igh product quality through high repeatability
•C  NC commands (F, W, X, E, T) •S
 hort set-up times through omission of
•L  oop command for automatic repetitions mechanical switch cams
of specific table columns •S
 implified mechanics through independent
• I nput of tables via M-SHAFT monitor drives
•S
 oftware module can be instanced

346
 Control

M-CNC
Three-dimensional motions

M-CNC is a software module for path control of

three-dimensional motions with three axes in
Cartesian arrangement. Motions are specified in
accordance with DIN 66025.

•P ath motion for Cartesian 3-axis system

•P rofile specification in accordance with
DIN 66025 (program structure of numerically-
controlled axes)
• Configuration
 and diagnostics via Device
Manager
•C ommissioning interface (CNC monitor)
•L ibrary for IEC 61131-3 PLC programs

347
 Control

Functions Special functions

• Genuine 3-axis CNC controller • Fast and direct setting of outputs

• Circle segments and straight lines user-defined from M-CNC
in space •S  ingle-axle travel
• Point control behavior (PTP travel) • Teaching of axes  /  positions
• Straight line interpolation (path) •C  ascading with speed controller
• Circle interpolation (M-SMC)
(clockwise / counterclockwise) •A  ctiveX element for Visual Basic,
• Predefined dwell time Visual C and Delphi
• Tool path corrections: •C  ommissioning monitor for efficient
• Tool corrections: graphic user guidance
• Reference point travel
• Referencing (various methods)
• Multiple instances of the module are possible
• Different methods for area monitoring
at calculation and execution
• Several methods of interpolation for position,
speed, acceleration of single axis

Visualization CNC monitor

M1 controller

M-CNC Application
(PLC / C)
Actuating variable
Position

Speed

Motion unit

348
 Control

Drive Middleware

Investment security
The investment in a motion application is not lost
if there is a change in the drive supplier.

Learning effort is reduced

The different drive profiles, such as SERCOS,
ProfiDRIVE, and DS402 have their own state
machines, error routines, and parameter
designations. Through standardization in
accordance, the training effort and the complexity
of drive solutions is reduced.

Drive-independence for coordinated axis

motions
Multi-axis applications, as they are realized
with M-SMC, M-SHAFT, etc. can be implemented
independently of the fieldbus profiles of the
individual drives.

Features
• Uniform, fieldbus-independent programming
of motion applications in accordance
• Full integration in the Bachmann SolutionCenter
• Connection to motion applications for multi-axis
applications is already integrated
• Easy addition of new, supplemental drives
• Cyclical and non-cyclical communication is
possible
• Referencing methods in accordance with DS402
are integrated

349
 Control

User applications (PLC, C/C+)

Motion Control

M-SMC M-SHAFT M-CNC

Positioning/ Camming DIN66025
Gantry Gearing Motion

IEC 61800-7 Drive dependent

Drive
Descriptions
<xml
... Drive Middleware
*

* on request
Drives

350
 Control

M-TEMP
Temperature controller

M-TEMP is a software module of the M1 controller

for monitoring and regulating temperature-
dependent processes. To achieve an optimal
adaptation to the controlled system, all control
parameters can also be changed during operation.

•T emperature control software for universal

implementation
•M odes: Actuator or controller
•A utomatic parameter assignment
(learn function)
• Integrated adaptive setpoint filtering
•T emperature range -200 °C to +1400 °C

Visualization

M1 controller

M-TEMP Application
(PLC / C / …)

351
 Control

Features Possible functions

•F  ast commissioning via graphic user interface •H

 eating controller
• User-defined changing between actuator and •C
 ooling controller
controller operation •T
 hree-state controllers (combined heating
• Heating and cooling path control with one and cooling section)
controller is possible
• Setpoint change during operation is possible Process monitoring functions
(setpoint function)
• Suppression of vibrations in the event of major • T olerance band monitoring
setpoint changes, through adaptive setpoint • I ncrease monitoring
filtering • H
 eating power monitoring
• Change of all control parameters is possible • H
 eating current monitoring
during operation
• Possibility of autonomous determination Actual value acquisition via
of the control parameters
• Precise determination of the target temperature • A
 IO288 (Pt100 sensor)
and process monitoring functions • T
 CO2xx-C (thermal element)
• Versatile possibilities for data input and output • D
 A3284-C (Pt100, Pt1000)
• Automatic generation of a cleaning pulse for • P
 TAI216 (Pt100 sensor)
analog cooling controllers • S
 VI interface (external)
• Conventional and user-defined temperature
units are possible Manipulated variable to
• Detection of sensor break
• Detection of defective power switches •A
 IO288, AO204 (analog value 0 .. 10 V)
• Current measurement function •T
 CO2xx-C, DO2xx, DIO2xx, DIO2xx-C,
• PLC function library DA3284-C (digital output with pulse width
• Maximum of 9 controller systems, each modulation)
with up to 127 controllers
• Controller sample time 20 ms to 30 min SVI interface
• Pulse width modulation periods from 20 ms
to 30 min •E
 xternal, e.   g. for a different task
• Temperature resolution 1 / 100 °C

352
Planning. Detecting. Preventing.

Condition Monitoring

The annual revenue of a production plant is significantly determined

by its reliability. Particularly for difficult to reach plants and plants that
can only be reached under specific conditions, such as offshore wind
power plans, focused planning of maintenance is necessary. A Condition
Monitoring System (CMS) integrated in the automation system can
provide all information, in order to detect failure hazards early on and
plan maintenance tasks in good time. Thus the costs for spare parts and
maintenance can be minimized and downtimes can be significantly reduced.

Condition Monitoring is based on the continuous or regular acquisition

of the machine condition by measuring and analyzing meaningful physical
variables (e.g. vibration, temperature, condition of lubricant, etc.).

A CMS that is built with the Bachmann M1 system benefits from its versatile
communication and service interfaces and also reduces the training period
of the operating and maintenance personnel. Secure web technologies
also enable defined access to the full system or to individual parts of the
plant from the outside. Thus data is accessible at all times for operators
and maintenance personnel, so that optimal process control and power
generation are ensured.

CERTIFICATE NO. TC-GL-002A-2014, Rev.1

354
 Condition Monitoring

More control, fewer outages.

The operational availability of modern The condition of the equipment (wear

machines and plants requires a and damage) can be monitored and
comprehensive maintenance and maintenance and service can be timely
service concept as well as a consistent scheduled to ensure maximum operability.
design. Due to the high costs of failure, Within the framework of Condition
heavy mechanical elements for power Monitoring, in addition to numerous well-
transmission (power trains, gears, prime known indicators, such as temperature,
movers) and bearings in particular place current consumption or load selective
considerable pressures on manufacturers operating hour acquisition, vibration
and operators. A continuous and if analyses in the frequency range, in
possible automatic monitoring of the particular, has proven to be an effective
mechanical systems is the ideal solution. output variable.

Vibration sensor
input module AIC212

Features
Number of inputs: 12 analog inputs
(9 inputs with IEPE interface for Piezo vibration
sensors and 3 inputs with + / -10 V)
Resolution: > 17 bit
Dynamics: > 95 dB
Sampling rate up to 50 kHz, adjustable
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V

Ω-Guard® Remote service via

Stand-alone solution WebLog Expert

Features Features
12 analog inputs Client-based »WebLog
PLC-independent CMS ­Expert« software for
Fixing with mounting feet, remote diagnostics
direct mounting or magnets

355
 Condition Monitoring

Ω-Guard®
TopBox-integrated solution

Features
12 analog inputs
PLC-independent CMS
Installation in existing control
­cabinet

Ω-Guard®
Fully integrated solution

Features
12 analog inputs
PLC-independent CMS
Installation in existing control
­cabinet

Acceleration sensors
BAM100 / BAM500

Features
Robust design
Connection via ICP inputs
of the AIC212
Hermetically sealed
Corrosion resistant
Insulated housing

µ-bridge
Sensor

Features
IEPE standard
Operating current: 4 .. 10 mA
Surge protection: Imax = 16 mA
Output voltage (offset)
11 ± 0.5 V
Max. saturation degree 8V

SVM300 series
Structural Vibration Monitor

Features
Measurement in 2 axes
Measurement range ± 2 g
Resolution: ≥0.305 mg
Internal memory (≤150 days)
Protection class IP67 356
 Condition Monitoring

Vibration sensor
input module AIC212

The M1 automation system's AIC212 module

offers up to nine vibration measuring inputs for
high resolution, signal correlated monitoring of
different measuring points. Three signal inputs
with a standard signal level of ±10 V and a
position transducer input provide consistent
acquisition of other relevant variables and the
angle or position relation of the mechanics.
Thanks to the embedding in the M1 system
analyses can also directly consider any other
signals or variables of the entire controller
composite (e. g. current performance, operating
condition), doubling the sensor system.

The AIC212 module has its own integrated

working memory to record time series of signal
profiles for up to 50 kilo samples / second –
which is far below the controller cycle time. The
evaluation is carried out in the well established
M1 CPU modules in the form of CMS application
programs that can operate as required with static
processes, frequency or location analyses. The
measuring data is also provided as channel values
in the cycle of controller programs as directly
recorded online variables.

Item Item no.

AIC212 00014151-00
AIC212 00017444-00

357
 Condition Monitoring

Alarm, service information

or external analysis

M1-CPU AIC212 AIC212

Results

Buffer
Analysis memory

History &
reference Recording
...

...
Sensor signals

As an M1 standard module, the AIC212 allows • All channels, including position measurement
implementation of »stand-alone« condition monitoring (Rotary encoder signal) sampled synchronously
as well as use in the various remote or distributed • Analog filter and digital filtering with
configurations of the Bachmann automation system. adjustable cut-off frequency
The use of M1 CPUs for evaluation, logging and • Resolution > 17 bits
alarming allows such a CMS to benefit from the wide • Dynamics > 95 dB
range of communication and service interfaces and • Sampling rate 50 kHz, adjustable
also reduces the training requirements for start-up • Different trigger modes for the recording start
and maintenance personnel. (position / location, IO bus sync, etc.)
• High-speed buffer memory directly
Instead restricting evaluations through a strictly on the module
prescribed frame, the AIC212 system concept allows • Access to channel values also synchronous
a free design of the Condition Monitoring software with application (direct access and process
for the particular requirements of the respective image for PLC programs)
application. Regardless of the implementation • Embedding in M1 plant management system
(C/C++, IEC 61131 or Matlab® / Simulink®) the or as autonmous CMS
recording time sequences of the CPU are available • Use of any signals of other modules
in memory and enable consistent access via the or calculated variables for evaluation
location and time specific software. (change to ... • Signal base suitable for frequency analysis
consistent location-specific and time-specific access with / without location reference
through the software. Existing evaluation packages • Several AIC212 modules in one system
can be ported to the M1 CPU system (VxWorks® / Intel simultaneously
x86 compatible processor) since no special solutions • Evaluations can be designed to individual
(DSPs, special operating systems) are required. requirements
• Broad spectrum of usable implementation
• 12 analog inputs (9 inputs with ICP® interface technologies (C, C++, Matlab®/Simulink®)
for Piezo vibration sensors and 3 inputs with ±10 V) on the real-time operating system VxWorks®
• Position detection (incremental encoder input • Synergy by using fieldbus
24 V and A / B / N track or 2 counter inputs and service communication
with 24 V for initiators) • Local memory in evaluation CPU:
CF card, PC card

358
 Condition Monitoring

AIC212
Analog inputs
Quantity 9 3
Measuring range AC-coupled ±6 V, ICP interface
®
±10 V
Resolution > 17 bits
Dynamic > 95 dB
Scan rate* up to 50 kHz per channel adjustable
Frequency range general 0.1 Hz .. 20 kHz
Error (full scale) at +25 °C ±0.1 %
Digital filter adjustable depending on sampling frequency
Distortion attenuation / distortion
factor
THD+N (fSIN_In=1kHz, fSample=50kHz)

LevelIN_from_FullScale= 0 dB < -78 dB

LevelIN_from_FullScale= -20 dB < -68 dB
LevelIN_from_FullScale= -40 dB < -48 dB
Input impedance 200 kOhm >1 MOhm
Current source for ICP interface 5 mA / channel
Cross-talk control range +8 .. +12 V ±2 V
Error detection wire break
Interference voltage strength -15 .. +36 V
Incremental and counter inputs
Interface 24 V initiators / proximity switch incremental
with 10mA sink
either one incremental interface or two counter inputs
can be used for proximity switches
Number of channels 2 1
Display yes, via green LED no
Counter frequency 5 kHz 36 kHz
Measured value / resolution 32 bit 32 bit
Input signals A A-, A+ / B-, B+ / N-, N+
Filter frequency programmable ---
Error detection error pulse phase error
Evaluation - 1, 2, 4 edge signals & pulse
direction mode
Supply for external sensors: 24 V / 5 V short circuit proof
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V

* Frequency bands/fsample:20 kHz / 48 kHz;10 kHz / 24 kHz; 5 kHz / 12 kHz; 2.5 kHz / 6 kHz

359
 Condition Monitoring

AIC212
Operating conditions

Power supply 24 V (18 V .. 34 V) with reverse polarity protection

Power consumption module approx. 9.5 W without encoder supply

Ambient conditions Standard ColdClimate ( )

Operating temperature -30 .. +60 °C

Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C

Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation

Model variants

AIC212 Analog measuring module for Condition Monitoring; 9x Input ICP;

3x Input +-10V; 18bit; 0.1%; >95dB dynamic range; 20µs sample
time; 1x INC HTL; 36kHz; A,A/B/N; 128MB measured data storage
AIC212 like AIC212; ColdClimate ( )

360
 Condition Monitoring

Ω-Guard®
System variants

With the GL-tested and certified machine

diagnostic system (Condition Monitoring System:
CMS) Ω-Guard® an intelligent monitoring solution
without mechanical moving components (hard
disks, fans) is available for use under harsh
ambient conditions.

The hardware and software architecture has

been based on a modular concept. Thus analog
and digital inputs and outputs can be flexibly
configured. Ω-Guard® in particular has extensive
self-test possibilities that enable a detailed
Stand-alone solution function check of the CMS. Script-oriented
software enables easy adaptation to different
monitoring tasks with due consideration of the
special requirements imposed on technical plant
management.

The following characteristics of this CMS

must be particularly highlighted:
• Modularity
• Future compatibility (inclusion many additional
measured values is possible)
• Extensive temperature range
• Robust relative to environmental influences
• Watchdog monitoring
• Client-based »WebLog E ­ xpert« software for
remote diagnostics
TopBox-integrated solution

Item Item no.

Ω-Guard®
Stand-alone solution 00022367-00
Ω-Guard®
TopBox-integrated solution 00022370-00
Ω-Guard®
Fully integrated solution 00022373-10

Fully integrated solution

361
 Condition Monitoring

Ω-Guard®
Analog measurement channels
Number of channels 12 analog inputs (9 inputs with IEPE interface
for piezo vibration sensors and 3x ±10 V inputs)
Sampling rate up to 50 kHz, all channels including position detection
(encoder signal) scanned synchronously
Measuring range IEPE standard, current (4-20 mA), voltage (±10 V)
Error detection Cable break, interference pulse, phase error
Sensor supply
IEPE 4 mA
External operating voltage For external sensors: 24 V / 5 V short-circuit-proof
Power supply
Multi-voltage power supply 100 .. 240 V / 50 .. 60 Hz / 50 W
Interference immunity
ESD EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic field EN 61000-4-3
Burst EN 61000-4-4
Surge EN 61000-4-5
Conducted HF EN 61000-4-6
DIPS (line voltage fluctuations) EN 61000-4-11
Operation with multi-voltage power supply
CPU unit
Interfaces Ethernet, FASTBUS
Communication LAN, GRPS, Modem
Housing / power supply
Type Wall mounting, fixing feet mounting, mounting with magnets
Degree of protection IP65
Dimensions 380 mm x 380 mm x 210 mm (Stand-alone solution)
Operating parameters
Operating temperature -25 .. +60 °C
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C

362
 Condition Monitoring

Remote service
via WebLog Expert

Client-based »WebLog ­Expert« software for Communication and analyses are based on
remote diagnostics progressive web-based and database-based
technologies. Through its scalability and modularity
The success of a condition monitoring system »WebLog Expert« permits secure adaptation and
is closely linked to correct installation, fast configuration for solving all tasks, extending
parameterization and commissioning, as well as to demanding tasks in the condition monitoring
rapid and correct reaction to reported changes of area in various industries (particularly wind
status. Our experts accordingly handle all concerns energy, biogas, shipping industry, etc.) Thus
on-site, even training and orientation of customer »WebLog Expert« is the basis for use of many
personnel. Our modern teleservice for distributed Condition Monitoring systems that can be installed
applications includes online monitoring over a immediately in the original equipment with the
secure Internet connection and thus is available »M1« controller by the OEM on the same bus
worldwide. Currently we monitor far more than system, or that are available for retrofitting
2.000 Condition Monitoring systems via Internet. of machines and plants.
In this regard the power range of the systems
extends from 250 kW to 5 MW. We developed the • Password protected access
»WebLog Expert« portal new for this. It serves • On the start page all current
as an interface to the diagnostic system and error messages are displayed
enables worldwide access to the status data of the • Visualization of the detailed
monitored plants. Alarm messages are signaled to diagnostic results for each measurement point
the users via a status window. • Expert tools for fault diagnosis
Simultaneously a trend analysis of the state of
the machine can be executed via the integrated
database. The »WebLog Expert« software solution
that can be implemented universally is the
foundation for the worldwide telediagnostics and
early error detection for distributed machines and
plants.

363
 Condition Monitoring

Acceleration sensors
BAM100 / BAM500

The tried and tested acceleration sensors are

provided with an extremely robust housing, a
hermetic sealing and an insulated housing and
are thus proven even for demanding ambient
conditions. Their minimally invasive mounting on
the object as well compact dimensions make them
suitable for difficult to access measuring points.

The piezo vibration sensors offer a sensitive

response to the smallest accelerations and are
connected via the IPC inputs of the AIC212.
The BAM100 sensor is suitable for fast rotating
­machine areas. The more sensitive BAM500
sensor is used for slow rotating areas.

Item Item no.

BAM100 00020455-00
BAM500 00020456-00

Acceleration sensor BAM100 BAM500

Technical data
Sensitivity 100 mV/g 500 mV/g
Output ICP®-compatible
Sensor connection M12
Measuring range 0.5/0.2 Hz .. 14 kHz
Acceleration range VDC >25 V VDC >22 V
80 g maximum 10 g maximum
Amplitude nonlinearity 1%
Frequency response ± 3 dB ± 3 dB
0.5 Hz .. 14 kHz 0.2 Hz .. 14 kHz
Resonance frequency 30 kHz
Operating voltage 18 .. 30 VDC
Operating current 2 .. 10 mA

364
 Condition Monitoring

µ-bridge sensor

We developed the »μ-bridge« sensor to capture

sound waves and flexural vibrations in machines
and plants (e.g. on components, solid bodies,
etc.). The structure-borne sound waves emitted
by machine parts are characteristic for the wear
status of a part.

For the µ-bridge sensor the force of the sound wave

is converted to a measurement voltage without a
detour through a spring mass damper
system. This even makes it possible to detect
structure-borne sound waves and flexural vibrations
at frequencies from 10 kHz to under 1 Hz with high
resolution and bandwidth; this means that the
sensor is particularly well suited for measurements
on slowly rotating or vibrating parts.

Item Item no.

µ-bridge 00019918-00

µ-bridge
Technical data
Operating mode IEPE standard
Operating current 4 .. 10 mA
Output voltage (offset) 11 ±0.5 V
Max. saturation degree 8V
Sensitivity 0.7 V/N
Signal-to-noise ratio -83 dB
Carrier-to-interference ratio -79 dB
Low limit frequency high pass 1st order, ƒg = 1.6 Hz
High limit frequency ƒg > 10 kHz

365
 Condition Monitoring

Structural Vibration Monitor

SVM300 series
The SVM300 structural vibration monitor series is
used for analyzing oscillations, shocks and vibra-
tions. It has an internal memory that enables grid-
independent autonomous analysis for up to 150
days and is implemented in protection class IP67.

• Measurement in 2 axes
• Measurement range ±2 g
• Resolution: ≥0.305mg
• Internal memory (≤150 days)
• Protection class IP67

Item Item no.

SVM300/E 00020930-00

SVM300 Series
Acceleration sensors
Acceleration axes x, y
Measuring range max. ±2 g
Resolution ≥0.305 mg
Signal bandwidth (low-pass) ≤5 Hz
Sample rate min. 25 samples/s
Memory
Internal memory 2 GB
Recording period 150 days (at 25 samples/s)
Real-time clock (RTC)
Deviation/year ≤15 minutes/year (battery buffered)
Diagnostics
2 status LEDs Operation/fault and communication
Connections/interfaces
Ethernet (ETH) 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 socket, push pull (variant 4)
Power supply (PWR) +12 V (10 .. 34 V) with reverse polarity protection, push-pull (variant 4)
Housing/power supply
Degree of protection IP 67
Dimensions 150 mm x 150 mm x 40 mm
Environmental condition
Operating temperature -40 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature -40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model
SVM300/E Structural vibration monitor with Ethernet connection and two accel-
eration axes

366
Fast. Flexible. Future-proved.

Sector-specific solutions

Bachmann offers sophisticated automation solutions to its customers world-

wide in a wide range of application areas. Setting new standards, thinking
ahead, as well as responding quickly and flexibly to new challenges – these
are the tasks to which we are committed in securing the critical competitive
edge for our customers. All our activities are focused on the benefit to the
customer: We deliver tailored solutions and set ourselves the highest stan-
dards. The independence we have in development and production enables us
to tackle specific market and customer requirements with passion and com-
mitment every day.

Our broad and modular product range meets really every customer requi-
rement. We provide you with a homogeneous and holistic system solution
that also ensures a high level of availability and is future proof. We offer you
everything from a single source and at the highest quality. Our automation
systems stand out on account of their extraordinary robustness, high perfor-
mance and open interfaces. The latest and most innovative platform for your
sector specific requirements.

368
 Sector-specific solutions

Wind Turbine Essentials WTE

The WTE software package is tailored to the

requirements of manufacturers and control
system developers of wind turbines, and helps
to considerably reduce the time required for
developing and commissioning the controller
software and the visualization. Bachmann’s Wind
Turbine Essentials cover many standard tasks
required for the automation of wind turbines.
The configurator of the WTE toolset is integrated
into the Engineering Suite SolutionCenter and
enables the structured configuration of the event
system, user roles and access rights, data sampling
with long-term recording and statistical processing.
A visualization for developers and customers is
created in parallel with the data configuration.
The runtime components execute the event
system, sample data values, send alarm messages
and check passwords of users. The complete
logging of all events and user operations is secured
by the M1 system features.
A visualization is offered both for a PC with mouse
operation and for a panel with touch screen (OT) in
optimal resolution. The visualization offers access
to process data which can be arranged in arbitrary
groups with freely selectable physical units and
description texts in any language or character
set. The PC visu contains additionally graphical
components for snapshots and long-term trends as
well as power curve and wind rose diagrams.
The software developer can additionally use the
WTE features in his own code because most
features are also delivered in program libraries for
IEC61131-3 (M-PLC) und C/C++.
For user management and access control, WTE
contains also a dedicated login-checker and a tool
to generate passwords.

Item Item no.

WTE SDK 00022097-00
(DVD for installation)
WTE Admin Tool 00022098-00
(DVD for installation)
WTE Company Licence 00022097-60
WTE Runtime Licence 00022097-63

369
 Sector-specific solutions

• Configuring instead of programming • Numerous statistical functions with automatic

• Readable, comparable, extensible project format data sampling and graphical display in
• High performance in execution of vast event visualization
configurations • Flexible assignment of user access rights
• Setting and resetting events automatically from depending on login name and password
variable value or from user program • Ready-to-use visualization is created by
• Individual configurable time delay for setting and configuration
resetting events and for power-up • Arbitrary grouping of monitor- and parameter
• Freely configurable reactions to events values
• Complete logging with high-resolution time stamps • Arbitrary language and character sets for
• Standardized power curve created with a few mouse description texts
clicks • Extensive program libraries for customer specific
extensions

Configure Deploy Execute

WTE M1 WTE.m
settings
Configurator Project.zip

Visu
Plug-in for SC settings

Monitor
Implement

WTE.Visu
Libs for PLC and C Standalone

Software package overview: Wind Turbine Essentials (WTE)

370
 Sector-specific solutions

Wind Turbine Essentials WTE

Configurator
Environment The configurator is installed as extension to the Bachmann SolutionCenter.
Project handling Turbine projects are stored without any external dependencies and thus can
be transferred easily from one PC to another.
Workflow For all parts of the configuration, comfortable table editors with input
assistants are available.
Validation Immediate check for plausible and complete configuration parameters
User management Configuration of user roles, assignment of required role to each value.
Required role for reading and writing can differ
Storage format Project files in readable format enable comparison between versions and
parallel work of different team members
Version control Tools for version control (SVN, CVS, etc.) can be operated directly from the
project navigator. This assures that always complete projects are stored on
the server.
Import of external models Project contents like event configuration can also be imported from different
sources as CSV format. Projects of the predecessor product M-WAB can be
imported directly into the WTE configurator
Software modules for the controller
WTE software module Executable program for the controller, behavior is defined by configuration
project. Executes event system, logging, sampling of production data,
statistical processing, trend- and snapshot-recordings. Supports fail-safe
software update.
WTE alarm handler Executable program for the controller. Is called in case of an error by
the WTE module for automatic dispatch of E-mail and/or SMS messages.
Triggering is also possible by other application programs. WTE event logs
are included as attachment.
WTE login checker Executable program for the controller. See User management and access
rights for details
Visualization
WTE Visualization ready-to-use visualization for a Desktop PC with mouse operation, graphical
display of trends, power curve, wind rose. Buttons for turbine commands,
arbitrary grouping of values in tables for numerical display of monitor
values, parameters, event logs and access logs.
Displayed values Variable values are selected and grouped, then descriptive texts, formats
and physical units are assigned. The visualization displays the values
according to the selected language and the access right of the current user.
Both values of the WTE software module and values of any other process
variable on the controller can be selected.
WTE eVis visualization optimized for HMI panels with touch screen under Windows or
Linux
Internationalization Definition of descriptive texts for events, parameters and monitor values
directly in the WTE configurator. Export and import of languages to CSV
format for external translation. Filter for missing translations is available.

371
 Sector-specific solutions

Wind Turbine Essentials WTE

Visualization
Character set all international character sets are supported, e. g. for Asian, Cyrillic or
Arabic languages
Text representation of status information is commonly stored as numerical values. For these
numerical values values it is possible to configure descriptive texts for different languages.
Brand labeling icons and images can be replaced by manufacturer-specific images
Event system
Event parameters Events are operational states which are derived from sensor data, from
programmed reactions and from operator input. The complete list of all
events that might occur is the central part of the turbine control program.
Necessary reactions to events, like stopping the turbine, yawing operations
etc. are assigned to events. For each event, a set of the following additional
parameters can be configured:
arbitrary number and type of user-defined event reactions.
Typical are brake, yaw and alarm level.
Creation of follow-up-events on repeated occurrence of another event
within a defined period, e. g. frequent exceeding of a temperature limit
Descriptive name of event in different languages for display in the visualiza-
tion
classification in Info, Warning, Error
Possibility to deactivate an event, e. g. during service procedures. Required
user access right for deactivating.
time delay after power up, e. g. to wait for the completion of an average
calculation.
time delay between setting an event and calling the reaction
required user right for resetting events (error acknowledgement)
Setting and resetting events automatically by variable value
automatically via handler block with hysteresis
via set- and reset-functions of WTE libraries
via reset command of the visu (depends on access right)
Max. number of events only limited by memory and CPU load
Trends and snapshots
Trends continuous long-term recording of values for archiving reasons, e. g. for
recording of the turbine’s production data
Snapshots continuous short-term recording of some selected variable values until a
trigger condition occurs. Then the last few minutes are stored, otherwise
the values are discarded. Typically used for error-analysis with a pre-trigger
condition.

372
 Sector-specific solutions

Wind Turbine Essentials WTE

Trends und Snapshots
Storage File based on the storage media of the controller. Each recording is stored in
one file, the filename contains time and date of the recording. File format is
documented and thus can be parsed also by customer specific tools.
Storage Selection of available recordings by type and by date and time. The trend
display offers several Y-axes, show/hide curves and measurement cursors
with numerical value display. Trend values can also be shown as table.
Statistical functions
Average calculation Average calculation of linear and polar values, selectable sample time and
averaging time, with or without calculation of minimum/maximum values
and standard deviation.
State counter Counts rising edges and duration of on-state, separated output as
day-, year- and total count/duration. Values are shown as variables and are
stored automatically in files. Maximum values for edge count and duration
can be configured, then exceeding the limit can raise a maintenance
warning. Typically used for counting operating hours of aggregates.
Energy counter Adds up the current power to energy and keeps produced and consumed
energy separated, both are displayed as day-, year- and total values.
Results are displayed in variables and are automatically logged to files.
Power curve Creates a power curve according to IEC61400-12, selectable with or without
internal average calculation. One type can directly process raw data, the
other expects input data which are already averaged. The WTE Visualization
displays the power curve together with an optional reference curve. It is
possible to keep several power curves on the controller, e. g. to verify the
result of parameter changes
Wind rose Shows the distribution of wind speed depending on the wind direction. The
WTE visualization has a graphical display of the wind rose.
User management and access rights
Definition of user rights Creation of a list of user roles in the configurator, then assignment of
required role to a variable.
Required role can be different for Read- and write-access. E. g. reading
of operating hours is possible for everybody, resetting the counter is only
allowed for certain users.
Password generator Separated stand-alone tool to create passwords which are valid for a limited
period between one day and one year.
Login Checker Executable program for the controller. Derives user rights from login name,
password and date and can limit the access of the user
Access log Complete logging of all logins and write operations to the controller. Log is
stored on the controller

373
 Sector-specific solutions

Wind Turbine Essentials WTE

Programming libraries
Supported languages The libraries are available with an identical feature set for IEC61131-3 (M-
PLC) as *.lib and for C/C++ as *.a
WTE Interface Library Comfortable interface for communication between user program and WTE
software module, especially for setting/resetting events, retrieving current
state of events, resetting counters, triggering snapshots and start/stop
wind rose and power curve recordings.
WTE Library Functions and function blocks for statistical data processing, energy- and
state-counters, creation and administration of specific log files
File functions
General features Fast and resource-saving access to storage media
Automatic creation of a series of files with a configurable maximum size for
each file
Filename contains date and time of last entry which makes sorting in
chronological order easy
Each file contains an optional header with selectable information, e. g.
turbine name, software version etc.
The oldest file can optionally be deleted automatically
Files can optionally be zipped automatically on closing
Supported file formats CSV with header information and column captions
Binary with header information
Ring file for temporary storage of values
System requirements
Engineering PC Bachmann SolutionCenter needs to be installed, required version
M-Base 3.80 or better
Controller software M-Base 3.80 or better
Controller hardware controller CPU of series MX200, MPC200, MC200 and MH200
Delivery variants
WTE SDK DVD for installation
Software development Kit contains configurator, runtime components,
libraries and visualization
WTE Admin Tool DVD for installation
Tool to create manufacturer specific passwords with limited validity period.
Matches the login checker included in WTE
WTE Company Licence License to use the WTE development tools in the whole company
WTE Runtime Licence License to use the WTE software module on controller

374
 Sector-specific solutions

Wind Power Scada WPS

Based on atvise® scada, Bachmann‘s Wind Power

Scada software (WPS) provides a SCADA system
specifically designed for the wind power sector. WPS
makes it possible to obtain both a comprehensive
and a detailed view of the entire wind farm and any
individual turbine at the same time.

State-of-the-art technologies
Just like atvise® scada, WPS uses pure web techno-
logy to provide the user with a completely seamless
system on all levels. Thanks to this technology, the
visualization can be operated on any PC, tablet or
smartphone. The use of s ­ cal­able vector graphics
(SVG) enables the creation of a highly ergonomic
­solution for any device level (control center/wind
farm/individual plant).

Communication standards
WPS implements communication standards such
as OPC UA (Unified Architecture) and IEC61400-
25. The OPC UA interface ergonomically integrates
live ­process data and alarms and can be used for
­historization. Process variables are standardized
thanks to the use of data structures compliant with
IEC 61400-25.

375
 Sector-specific solutions

Scalability
WPS makes it possible to represent all relevant
plant levels: From the global view of the region,
to the wind farm, right down to the individual
­turbine. Specific information providing the user
with an overview at any time is displayed for
each level. If detailed information is required, the
corresponding level can be accessed quickly and
conveniently.

SCADA functions
WPS provides the functions familiar to users of
atvise® scada, such as alarm handling, historiza-
tion, trending and multi-lingual functionality. User
management is implemented transparently and
ergonomically for the user. A login procedure on
the WPS is all that is needed to allow access right
through to individual turbines. The well-known
security standards of the Bachmann M1 control-
ler are used here for transmission (SSL) and user
management (groups/level) in order to prevent
unauthorized access. Data history, alarms/events
and trending are logged by the M1 and seamlessly
redirected to the WPS to allow extensive analysis
(power curve/wind rose/filter).

Project design
The WPS is designed using the atvise® Builder
tool. The IEC61400-25 compliant object structure
enables the user to design the required elements
simply. As with atvise® scada, the data points
are linked in the Builder by browsing an OPC UA
data source. The scripting functionality as well
as all the other benefits of the atvise® Builder
can likewise be used for designing a WPS project.
A comprehensive library offers a wide range of
ready-to-use components specifically designed for
the wind sector. The fully object-oriented imple-
mentation of these components allows an efficient
operation (reproduction / adaptation).

Connection to external systems

The standard OPC UA interface makes it possible
to integrate external controller systems based on
the IEC61400-25 data model directly into the WPS
system.

376
 Sector-specific solutions

Third party systems that do not support these • Live process data on all visualization levels
standards can be integrated using a (gateway) • Automatic adaption of the graphic solution for PC,
Bachmann controller that provides the basis for the tablet or smartphone
WPS functions. • All visualizations are available on a wide range of
The standard communication protocols of the M1 state-of-the-art hardware such as smartphone,
(Profinet/Profibus/CANBus…) are available to provi- tablet or PC
de a basis for taking the process data from the wind • Standard user management for SCADA and
turbine. Customized, proprietary solutions can also ­turbine
be implemented on the gateway controller in order • Online/offline trending
to fully utilize WPS. • Online language selection
• Alarm and data history
• Sector-specific SCADA system
• Use of standard OPC UA and IEC61400-25
­communication protocols
• High scalability

WPS – Wind Power Scada

Process connection / Communication
Protocols OPC Unified Architecture (UA) Data Access
IEC61400-25
Physical interface Ethernet
Parallel operation Yes, several clients with different technologies (PC, tablet, cell phone)
Scalability Cascadable server with WPS instances
Project design
Development environment atvise builder
Functionalities
Language switchover Yes
Data history Yes, logged by the M1
Alarm/Event Logging Yes, logged by the M1
Trending (Event trigger) Yes, logged by the M1
Wind rose Yes
User management Yes
Access security Yes, with SSL transmission
Visualization
Browser HTML5 visualization (Chrome / Firefox / Internet Explorer / Safari) with
SVG graphics (Scalable Vector Graphics)

377
Sector-specific solutions

378
379
Safe. Qualified. Certified.

Directives and certificates –

for worldwide implementation

Product certifications and approvals are essential prerequisites for global

acceptance of industrial products.

Whether national standards, climatic conditions, degrees of protection,

set-up, installation, operation or maintenance possibilities – in international
implementation the course must be set in the project coordination phase.
And it is precisely at this point that our strengths are brought to bear.

Approvals
GL Germanischer Lloyd
CE Declaration of Conformity
UL Underwriters Laboratories
CSA Canadian Standards Association
HALT Highly Accelerated Life Test
ISO9001 / 2000 Quality management
CCC China Compulsory Certification
DNV DetNorske Veritas
LR Lloyds Register
BV Bureau Veritas
ABS American Bureau of Shipping

380
 Standards and approvals

M1 controller hardware
Item no. Module CE CCC UL cUL GL DNV LR ABS BV RoHS*
00009928-10 ACR222/2 • • • • •
00012245-10 AI202/SI • • • • • • • • • •
00010693-20 AI204/1 • • • • • • • • • •
00010693-10 AI204/2 • • • • • • • • • •
00010693-00 AI204/4 • • • • • • • • • •
00017447-00 AI204/4 • • • • • • • • • •
00012245-00 AI204/SI • • • • • • • • • •
00017772-00 AI208/SI • • • • • • • • • •
00018843-00 AI208/SI • • • • • • • • • •
00014151-00 AIC212 • • • • • • • • • •
00017444-00 AIC212 • • • • • • • • • •
00020627-00 AIO208 ** ** **
00020628-00 AIO208 ** ** **
00020631-00 AIO216 ** ** **
00020632-00 AIO216 ** ** **
00014470-00 AIO288 • • • • • • • • • •
00016157-00 AIO288 • • • • • • • • • •
00014470-10 AIO288/1 • • • • • • • • • •
00010692-00 AO202 • • • • • • • • • •
00012246-10 AO202/SI • • • • • • • • • •
00012246-00 AO204/SI • • • • • • • • • •
00011244-00 AO208/I • • • • • • • • • •
00017441-00 AO208/I • • • • • • • • • •
00009540-00 A-PCC200 • • •
00009754-00 BEM201 • • • • •
00012846-00 BEM211 • • • • •
00009755-10 BES202 • • • • •
00009755-00 BES202/N • • • • •
00012847-00 BES212 • • • • •
00012848-00 BES212/N • • • • •
00013502-00 BES222 • • • • •
00013503-00 BES222/N • • • • •
00010507-00 BS201 • • • • • • • • • •
00009802-00 BS202 • • • • • • • • • •
00009313-00 BS203 • • • • • • • • • •
00015947-00 BS203 • • • • • • • • • •
00016785-00 BS203/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009752-00 BS204 • • • • • • • • • •
00015948-00 BS204 • • • • • • • • • •

* RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)

** Certification in process

381
 Standards and approvals

M1 controller hardware
Item no. Module CE CCC UL cUL GL DNV LR ABS BV RoHS*
00016786-00 BS204/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009206-00 BS205 • • • • • • • • • •
00015949-00 BS205 • • • • • • • • • •
00016787-00 BS205/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009792-00 BS206 • • • • • • • • • •
00015950-00 BS206 • • • • • • • • • •
00016788-00 BS206/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009207-00 BS207 • • • • • • • • • •
00015951-00 BS207 • • • • • • • • • •
00016789-00 BS207/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009793-00 BS208 • • • • • • • • • •
00015952-00 BS208 • • • • • • • • • •
00016790-00 BS208/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009634-00 BS209 • • • • • • • • • •
00015953-00 BS209 • • • • • • • • • •
00016791-00 BS209/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009794-00 BS210 • • • • • • • • • •
00015954-00 BS210 • • • • • • • • • •
00016792-00 BS210/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009795-00 BS211 • • • • • • • • • •
00015955-00 BS211 • • • • • • • • • •
00016793-00 BS211/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009796-00 BS212 • • • • • • • • • •
00015956-00 BS212 • • • • • • • • • •
00016794-00 BS212/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009797-00 BS213 • • • • • • • • • •
00015957-00 BS213 • • • • • • • • • •
00016795-00 BS213/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009798-00 BS214 • • • • • • • • • •
00015958-00 BS214 • • • • • • • • • •
00016796-00 BS214/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009799-00 BS215 • • • • • • • • • •
00018623-00 BS215 • • • • • • • • • •
00016797-00 BS215/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009800-00 BS216 • • • • • • • • • •
00018624-00 BS216 • • • • • • • • • •
00016798-00 BS216/S • • • • • • • • • •
00009698-00 CM202 • • • • • • • • • •
00016404-00 CM202 • • • • • • • • • •

* RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)

*** on request

382
 Standards and approvals

M1 controller hardware
Item no. Module CE CCC UL cUL GL DNV LR ABS BV RoHS*
00010709-10 CNT204/H • • • • • • • • • •
00016407-10 CNT204/H • • • • • • • • • •
00010709-20 CNT204/R • • • • • • • • • •
00013178-00 CS200 • • • • • • • • • •
00013179-00 CS200/N • • • • • • • • • •
00013597-00 DA3284-C • • • • • • • • • •
00017450-00 DA3284-C • • • • • • • • • •
00010281-00 DI212 • • • • • • • • • •
00009002-00 DI216 • • • • • • • • • •
00008997-00 DI232 • • • • • • • • • •
00016411-00 DI232 • • • • • • • • • •
00012162-00 DI232/48 • • • • • • • • • •
00011516-00 DI232/np1 • • • • • • • • • •
00010285-00 DIO16-C • • • • • • • • • •
00017453-00 DIO16-C • • • • • • • • •
00010615-00 DIO216 • • • • • • • • • •
00010892-00 DIO216/4 • • • • • • • • • •
00016141-00 DIO216/4 • • • • • • • • • •
00013034-00 DIO232 • • • • • • • • • •
00019116-00 DIO248 • • • • • • • • • •
00019115-00 DIO264 • • • • • • • • • •
00009205-00 DIO264-C • • • • • • • • • •
00019114-00 DIO280 • • • • • • • • • •
00019119-00 DIO280 • • • • • • • • • •
00010129-00 DIO32-C • • • • • • • • • •
00010526-00 DIO48-C • • • • • • • • • •
00009884-00 DMS202 • • • • •
00012696-00 DNM201 • • • • • • • • • •
00009004-00 DO216 • • • • • • • • • •
00009003-00 DO232 • • • • • • • • • •
00016414-00 DO232 • • • • • • • • • •
00012176-00 DO232/48 • • • • • • • • • •
00014497-10 DOR206/230 • • • • • • • • • •
00010555-00 DPM200 • • • • • • • • • •
00018032-00 DPM200 • • • • •
00012671-00 EM203 • • • • • • • • • •
00017321-00 EM213 • • • • • • • • • •

* RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)

** Certification in process

383
 Standards and approvals

M1 controller hardware
Item no. Module CE CCC UL cUL GL DNV LR ABS BV RoHS*
00017470-00 EM213 • • • • • • • • • •
00017192-00 FCS214/G • • • • • • • • • •
00017192-10 FCS214/F • • • • • • • • • •
00010495-00 FM211 • • • • • • • • • •
00010496-00 FM212 • • • • • • • • • •
00016747-10 FM221 • • • • • • • • • •
00018091-10 FM221 • • • • • • • • • •
00016747-00 FM222 • • • • • • • • • •
00018091-00 FM222 • • • • • • • • • •
00010497-00 FS211 • • • • • • • • • •
00010498-00 FS211/N • • • • • • • • • •
00010499-00 FS212 • • • • • • • • • •
00010500-00 FS212/N • • • • • • • • • •
00016749-10 FS221/N • • • • • • • • • •
00018092-10 FS221/N • • • • • • • • • •
00016749-00 FS222/N • • • • • • • • • •
00018092-00 FS222/N • • • • • • • • • •
00020620-00 GIO212 ** ** **
00020623-00 GIO212 ** ** **
00022162-00 GM260 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **
00017829-00 GMP232 • • • • • • • • • •
00019063-00 GMP232 • • • • • • • • • •
00019756-00 GSP274 • • • • ** ** ** ** ** •
00021759-00 GSP274 • • • • ** ** ** ** ** •
00013737-00 ISI222 • • • • • • • • • •
00016421-00 ISI222 • • • • • • • • • •
00014127-00 ISI222/8 • • • • • • • • • •
00014477-00 LM20 • • • • • • • • • •
00009494-00 LM201 • • • • • • • • • •
00018805-10 MC205 • • • • ** ** ** ** ** •
00018805-12 MC205-CFA4GB • • • • ** ** ** ** ** •
00020513-1x MC205 • • • • ** ** ** ** ** •
00018806-1x MC210 • • • • ** ** ** ** ** •
00020514-1x MC210 • • • • ** ** ** ** ** •
00013176-00 ME203/CN • • • • • • • • • •
00016336-00 ME203/CN • • • • • • • • • •
00013191-00 ME203/CNW • • • • • • • • • •

* RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)

384
 Standards and approvals

M1 controller hardware
Item no. Module CE CCC UL cUL GL DNV LR ABS BV RoHS*
00013177-00 ME203/EN • • • • • • • • • •
00015985-00 ME203/EN • • • • • • • • • •
00016370-0x MH212/S • • • • • • • • • •
00018652-0x MH212/S • • • • • • • • • •
00012711-40 MPC240 • • • • • • • • • •
00018591-x0 MPC240 • • • • • • • • • •
00016338-40 MPC240 • • • • • • • • • •
00020547-x0 MPC240 • • • • • • • • • •
00013127-40 MPC240/W • • • • • • • • • •
MPC240/W-
00021018-00 • • • • • • • • • •
CF512MB
MPC240/W-
00018372-00 • • • • • • • • • •
CF4GB
00012708-40 MPC265 • • • • • • • • • •
00018587-x0 MPC265 • • • • • • • • • •
00012710-40 MPC270 • • • • • • • • • •
00018589-x0 MPC270 • • • • • • • • • •
00016180-40 MPC270 • • • • • • • • • •
00020413-x0 MPC270 • • • • • • • • • •
00013129-40 MPC270/W • • • • • • • • • •
MPC270/W-
00023264-00 • • • • • • • • • •
CF512MB
00014274-40 MPC293 • • • • • • • • • •
MPC293-
00017629-00 • • • • • • • • • •
CF512MB
00017332-40 MPC293/W • • • • • • • • • •
MPC293/W-
00020575-00 • • • • • • • • • •
CF512MB
00014445-00 MX207 • • • • • • • • • •
00018594-x0 MX213 • • • • • • • • • •
00018597-x0 MX213 • • • • • • • • •
00018593-x0 MX220 • • • • • • • • • •
00019210-00 MX220 • • • • • • • • • •
00017689-x0 MX220 • • • • • • • • • •
00012754-00 NT250/48 • • • • • • • •
00013251-00 NT255 • • • • • • • • • •
00016158-00 NT255 • • • • • • • • • •
00012081-10 PCC201/ 8 • • • • • • • • • •

* RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)

** Certification in process

385
 Standards and approvals

M1 controller hardware
Item no. Module CE CCC UL cUL GL DNV LR ABS BV RoHS*
00012081-20 PCC201/16 • • • • • • • • • •
00012081-30 PCC201/32 • • • • • • • • • •
00012081-40 PCC201/64 • • • • • • • • • •
00010708-00 PTAI216 • • • • • • • • • •
00017456-00 PTAI216 • • • • • • • • • •
00011056-00 PWM202 • • • • •
00021235-00 RS204 • • • • • • • • • •
00021674-00 RS204 • • • • • • • • • •
00009542-00 S201 • • • • • • • • • •
00014544-00 SDI208 • • • • •
00017459-00 SDI208 • • • • ** ** ** ** ** •
00014545-00 SDO204 • • • • •
00017462-00 SDO204 • • • • ** ** ** ** ** •
00011756-00 SEM201 • • • • •
00014273-00 SLC284 • • • • •
00017465-00 SLC284 • • • • ** ** ** ** ** •
00012672-00 SWI205/S • • • • • • • • • •
00010851-00 TCO204-C • • • • • • • • • •
00010850-00 TCO208-C • • • • • • • • • •
00008673-00 TCO216-C • • • • • • • • • •
00014008-00 TI214 • • • • • • • • • •
00014008-20 TI214/2 • • • • *** *** *** *** *** •
00009496-00 VP200 • • • • •
00009498-00 VP200/S • • • • •

* RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)

*** on request

386
 Standards and approvals

HMI devices
Item no. Module CE CCC UL cUL GL DNV LR ABS BV RoHS*
00014221-00 CT205/BE1 • • • • • • • • • •
00014336-00 CT205/V/BE1 • • • • • • • • • •
00016898-00 IPC1410/BE1/CM1G1 • • • • - - - - - •
00016902-00 IPC1410/BE1/CD1G6 • • • • - - - - - •
00016899-00 IPC1412/BE1/CM1G1 • • • • - - - - - •
00016903-00 IPC1412/BE1/CD1G6 • • • • - - - - - •
00016900-00 IPC1415/BE1/CM1G1 • • • • - - - - - •
00016904-00 IPC1415/BE1/CD1G6 • • • • - - - - - •
00016905-00 IPC1419/BE1/CD1G6 • • • • - - - - - •
00017609-00 IPC312/BE1 • • • • - - - - - •
00017227-10 IPC315/BE1 • • • • - - - - - •
00014569-00 OT115/R/BE1 • • • • • • • • • •
00014570-00 OT115/R/BE2 • • • • • • • • • •
00017593-00 OT115/R/BE2/CC • • • • • • • • • •
00018216-00 OT205/BE1 • • • • • • • • • •
00018217-00 OT205/M/BE1 • • • • • • • • • •
00018218-00 OT205/V/BE1 • • • • • • • • • •
00018219-00 OT205/V/BE1/CC • • • • • • • • • •
00018221-00 OT205/V/BE2 • • • • • • • • • •
00022298-00 OT1310/BE1/GT1G0 • • • • - - - - - •
00021833-00 OT1312/BE1/GT1G0 • • • • - - - - - •
00022299-00 OT1315/BE1/GT1G0 • • • • - - - - - •
00021831-00 OT1319/BE1/GT1G0 • • • • - - - - - •
00014314-00 WT310/BE1 • • • • - - - - - •
00014329-00 WT312/BE1 • • • • - - - - - •
00014399-00 WT315/BE1 • • • • - - - - - •

M1 controller hardware
Item no. Module BDEW VDE4105 TR3 TR8
00017829-00 GMP232 • - • •
00019063-00 GMP232 • - • •
00019756-00 GSP274 • • • •
00021759-00 GSP274 • • • •

* RoHS China (keine RoHS Europa)

** Zertifizierung läuft
387
Standards and approvals

388
 ColdClimate

ColdCimate modules
Processor modules Item designation Item number
Processor module ME203/EN 00015985-00
Processor module ME203/CN 00016336-00
Processor module MX213/ -CF512MB 00018597-00
Processor module MX213/ -CF4GB 00018597-10
Processor module MX220/ 00019210-00
Processor module MX220/ -CF512MB 00017689-00
Processor module MX220/ -CF4GB 00017689-10
Processor module MPC240 00016338-40
Processor module MPC240 -CF512MB 00020547-00
Processor module MPC240 -CF4GB 00020547-10
Processor module MPC270 00016180-40
Processor module MPC270 -CF512MB 00020413-00
Processor module MPC270 -CF4GB 00020413-10
Processor module MC205 00020513-10
Processor module MC205 -CFA4GB 00020513-12
Processor module MC210 00020514-10
Processor module MC210 -CFA4GB 00020514-12
Processor module MH212/S 00018652-00
Processor module MH212/S -CFA4GB 00018652-02
Digital input/output modules Item designation Item number
Digital input module DI232 00016411-00
Digital output module DO232 00016414-00
Digital input/output module DIO216/4 00016141-00
Digital input/output module DIO232 00019502-00
Digital input/output module DIO280 00019119-00
Safety modules Item designation Item number
Safety Logic Controller SLC284 00017465-00
Safety digital input module SDI208 00017459-00
Safety digital output module SDO204 00017462-00
Analog input/output module Item designation Item number
Universal input/output module GIO212 00020623-00
Universal input/output module AIO208 00020628-00
Universal input/output module AIO216 00020632-00
Analog input module AI208/SI 00018843-00
Analog input module AI204/4 00017447-00
Analog output module AO208/I 00017441-00
Analog input/output module AIO288 00016157-00
Temperature recordung module PTAI216 00017456-00
Temperature input module TI214 00018808-00
Measurement module for Condition Mon. AIC212 00017444-00
Functional module Item designation Item number
Counter modulel CNT204/H 00016407-10
Positioning module ISI222 00016421-00
Grid measurement module Item designation Item number
Grid measurement module GMP232 00019063-00
Interface module Item designation Item number
Industrie-Ethernet-Master EM213 00017470-00
Interface module RS204 00021674-00

389
 ColdClimate

ColdCimate modules
System networking Item designation Item number
Ethernet Remote Station ERS202 00021244-00
Media converter FCS214/F 00019104-10
Media converter FCS214/G 00019104-00
FASTBUS module FM221 00018091-10
FASTBUS module FM222 00018091-00
FASTBUS module FM221/N 00018092-10
FASTBUS module FM222/N 00018092-00
CANopen Master module CM202 00016404-00
PROFIBUS DP-Master module DPM200 00018302-00
Decentralized CAN modules Item designation Item number
Digital input/output module DIO16-C 00017453-00
Analog and digital in/output module DA3284-C 00017450-00
Fieldbusses Item designation Item number
EtherCAT slave module ECS200 00019206-00
PROFIBUS-DP-Master module DPM200 00018032-00
Digital input/output module DIO16-C 00017453-00

ColdClimate modules
System modules Item designation Item number
Power supply NT255 00016158-00
Backplane BS203 00015947-00
Backplane BS204 00015948-00
Backplane BS205 00015949-00
Backplane BS206 00015950-00
Backplane BS207 00015951-00
Backplane BS208 00015952-00
Backplane BS209 00015953-00
Backplane BS210 00015954-00
Backplane BS211 00015955-00
Backplane BS212 00015956-00
Backplane BS213 00015957-00
Backplane BS214 00015958-00
Backplane BS215 00018623-00
Backplane BS216 00018624-00

ColdClimate Terminals
OT100 series Item designation Item number
Operator Terminal OT115/R/BE2/CC 00017593-00
OT200 series Item designation Item number
Operator Terminal OT205/V/BE1/CC 00018219-00
OT1300 series Item designation Item number
Operator Terminal OT1310/BE1/CC/GT1G0 on request
Operator Terminal OT1312/BE1/CC/GT1G0 on request

390
 CAE/CAD data

CAE/CAD data –
the convenient solution.

High-quality automation components are good and important, however they no longer
suffice for successful machine building and process plant engineering projects.
Development and project planning also play a crucial role for automation. Consequently
the electrical and mechanical design of control cabinets is increasingly executed with
3D-supported programs that can ensure optimal placement of components and cable
routing.

The same applies at Bachmann electronic: With eCAD import functionality in the
SolutionCenter the turnaround time of automation projects can be significantly reduced.
We satisfy the new market requirements and support our customers with additional
components in the integrated engineering process.

391
 CAE/CAD data

ePLAN library for control cabinet

construction

Good automation components no longer suffice for

successful machine building and plant engineering
projects. Efficient development and project
planning is becoming ever more important.
Bachmann electronic meets the requirements
and supports its customers with two additional
components in the integrated engineering process.

The device data necessary for electrical design of

the Bachmann automation components is provided
as a library in the ePLAN data portal. Macros
for circuit diagram and control cabinet layout,
function templates for intelligent configuration of
controllers, item data for the spare parts catalog;
The data that is created and certified with ePLAN
can be loaded directly into the ECAD project and
immediately used for the design – a significant
contribution in time savings, as well as for uniform
structuring of the project.

With the new eCAD import functionality in the

SolutionCenter the time of automation projects
can be significantly reduced. While one team
plans parts lists, circuit diagrams and control
cabinet layouts, another team can create the
required software in parallel. Through the use of
symbolic variables in the software, to this point
in the project knowledge of the structure of the
hardware is not required. Only through automatic
import of the ECAD data into the SolutionCenter
will a link be established between symbolic
variables and the hardware used, and an operable
software module be generated.
Variants, extensions or corrections in ECAD
project planning are no problem – the software
module will simply be re-generated with the
changed and newly-imported ECAD data.

392
 CAE/CAD data

ePLAN library ECAD import in the SolutionCenter

The ePLAN library contains device data, macros • Software is created with symbolic variables
and technical documentation of all automation • Linking of the symbolic variables with the
components: M1 hardware, visualization hardware hardware used through import of the ECAD data
and S1 servo system. into the SolutionCenter
• Direct transfer from the portal into the • An operable software module is generated
electrical project planning • Variants, extensions, or corrections in the ECAD
• Tested and assured quality through Certification project planning can be easily integrated at any
• Ongoing update and extension time through subsequent import
• Support for the entire electrical project planning
– circuit diagrams, control cabinet layouts,
Overview drawings, PLC configurations and
spare part documentation
• Support for implementation of the library
• Use of design software ePLAN P8 and higher

393
 CAE/CAD data

3D-CAD model library for control

cabinet design

Control cabinets are increasingly being designed

with 3D-assisted programs in order to guarantee
an optimal placement of the components and
the wiring. Bachmann electronic supports its
customers in this engineering process and makes
a library available for this purpose.

The 3D-CAD model library contains the versioned

3D models of the controller and terminal products.
The 3D models are created on a 1:1 scale. The
STEP format was chosen so that it can be further
processed by all major 3D drawing programs. The
models show the external details of the products
at full resolution so that a realistic appearance for
the 3D design is facilitated. Internal details are
largely masked out, which achieves a considerable
reduction of the data size.

Bachmann electronic provides this library without

charge to its customers for standard products.
Libraries can be created for customer-specific
products if needed.

3D-CAD model library

• Detailed display of the products in the STEP 3D
exchange format
• Data reduced to the required Data volume
• Labeling of the 3D models with the product
version number

394
 Installation in the control cabinet / housing

M1 controller hardware

UL / CSA regulations and those of the EU Directive 73 / 23 EC (Low-voltage Directive)

specify that controllers be mounted in a cabinet, an enclosure or a closed operating area
in order to meet the requirements for electrical safety. When determining the spatial
requirements of an M1 controller, certain minimum distances between the mounting rack
and the adjacent fixtures must be considered

40 mm

RDY

62 mm
10 mm 10 mm
199 mm

56 mm

1 2 3 n
64 mm*
40 mm

n x 55 mm + 20 mm

*for cables an additional movement space of at least 30 mm must be provided. When using high covers for
the D-SUB connectors more space can also be required.

HMI systems

In order to protect against the potential danger of overheating, the visualization

equipment should be mounted in a cabinet or housing, with the minimum distances
specified below.

50 mm

50 mm 50 mm

10 mm

50 mm

Note: Every device series can have lower minimum distances upon request, depending on the
395 specific conditions.
 CAE/CAD data

Installation in the control cabinet*

Interfaces
Vertical 45° angle Horizontal
Bottom/top

CT200 series 50 °C 50 °C 50 °C 45 °C
OT100 series 60 °C 60 °C 60 °C 55 °C
OT200 series** 50 °C 50 °C 50 °C 45 °C
OT1300 series 60 °C 60 °C 60 °C 55 °C
WT300 series 50 °C 45 °C 45 °C 45 °C
IPC300 series** 50 °C 45 °C 45 °C 45 °C
IPC1400 series** 50 °C 45 °C 45 °C 45 °C

Installation in the control housing

Vertical Horizontal

CT200 series 45 °C 40 °C
OT100 series 55 °C 50 °C
OT200 series** 45 °C 40 °C
OT1300 series 55 °C 50 °C
WT300 series 45 °C 40 °C
IPC300 series** 45 °C 40 °C
IPC1400 series** 45 °C 40 °C

* Subject to observation of the defined minimum clearances and surrounding volume in the control cabinet.
** Maximum ambient temperature, individual device variants may vary (see user manual for detailed
information).
396
 Dimensions – HMI devices

Dimensions
Device W x H x D (mm)

CT series
CT205 212 x 156 x 49
CT205M 212 x 156 x 49
CT205V 212 x 156 x 49

OT series
OT115/R/BE1 170 x 128 x 50
OT115/R/BE2 170 x 160 x 50
OT205/BE1 212 x 156 x 49
OT205/V/BE1 270,5 x 175 x 49
OT205/M/BE1 212 x 156 x 49
OT1310/BE1/GT1G0 310 x 234 x 68
OT1310/BE1/CC/GT1G0 310 x 234 x 68
OT1312/BE1/GT1G0 341 x 253 x 68
OT1312/BE1/CC/GT1G0 341 x 253 x 68
OT1315/BE1/GT1G0 406 x 308 x 75
OT1319/BE1/GT1G0 471 x 375 x 76
OT1312/BE1/CE1G1 341 x 253 x 74

WT series
WT310/BE1 307 x 233 x 94
WT312/BE1 307 x 256 x 97
WT315/BE1 405 x 308 x 97

Dimensions – industrial PCs

Dimensions
Device W x H x D (mm)

IPC series
IPC310/BE1 307 x 233 x 94
IPC312/BE1 337 x 256 x 97
IPC315/BE1 405 x 308 x 97
IPC1410/BE1 314 x 240 x 110
IPC1412/BE1 337 x 256 1102)/1593)
IPC1415/BE1 405 x 308 x 1242)/1713)
IPC1419/BE11) 470 x 374,6 x 1212)/1703)

1)
for 19” installation
2)
without attachment / expansion units
3)
with 2 attachments (1 attachment = 25 mm)

397
Dimensions – control system

Dimensions
Module W x H x D (mm) Weight (g)

Processor modules
MPC2xx 110 x 119 x 61 650
ME203 / x 55 x 119 x 61 230
ME203 / xN 55 x 119 x 61 310
MX213 110 x 119 x 61 670
MH212/x 220 x 119 x 96 1870
Safety modules
SLC284 110 x 119 x 61 360
SDI208 55 x 119 x 61 210
SDO204 55 x 119 x 61 230
Digital input/output module
DI2xx/xx 55 x 119 x 61 200
DO2xx/xx 55 x 119 x 61 240
DOR206/xx 55 x 119 x 61 220
DIO216 / xx 55 x 119 x 61 210
DIO232 55 x 119 x 61 210
DIO248 110 x 119 x 61 370
DIO264 110 x 119 x 61 390
DIO280/x 110 x 119 x 61 385
Analog input/output module
GIO212 55 x 119 x 61 200
AIO208 55 x 119 x 61 200
AIO216 55 x 119 x 61 200
AI204 / x 55 x 119 x 61 210
AI20x / SI 55 x 119 x 61 210
AO202 55 x 119 x 61 200
AO208 / Ix 55 x 119 x 61 230
AO202 / SI 55 x 119 x 61 200
AO204 / SI 55 x 119 x 61 210
AIO288/x 55 x 119 x 61 240
PTAI216x 55 x 119 x 61 220
TI214/x 55 x 119 x 61 210
DMS202 55 x 119 x 61 235
AIC212x 110 x 119 x 61 360
Technology module
CNT204 / Hx 55 x 119 x 61 200
CNT204 / R 55 x 119 x 61 225
ISI222/x 55 x 119 x 61 235
ACR222 / 2 55 x 119 x 61 265
PWM202 55 x 119 x 61 220
Interface module
RS204 / x 55 x 119 x 61 200
EM213x 55 x 119 x 61 340
SWI205/S 55 x 119 x 61 240
Bus module
BEM211 55 x 119 x 61 195
BES212 55 x 119 x 61 205
BES222 55 x 119 x 61 205
BES202 / N 55 x 119 x 61 290
BES2x2/N 55 x 119 x 61 290
FCS214/x 55 x 119 x 61 290
Grid measurement module
GSP274 165 x 119 x 75 640
GMP232 110 x 119 x 61 600
GM260 55 x 119 x 61 190

398
 Dimensions – control system

Dimensions
Module W x H x D (mm) Weight (g)

Bus modules
FM211 55 x 119 x 70 320
FM222 55 x 119 x 70 400
FS221/N 55 x 119 x 70 350
FS222/N 55 x 119 x 70 425
CM202x 55 x 119 x 61 200
CS200/x 55 x 119 x 61 300
DPM200 55 x 119 x 61 200
DNM201 55 x 119 x 61 205
SEM201 55 x 119 x 72 200
Dezentralized CAN modules
DIO16-Cx 110 x 119 x 61 485
DIO32-C 164 x 119 x 61 695
DIO48-C 228 x 119 x 61 750
DIO264-C 137 x 119 x 61 250
DA3284-Cx 228 x 119 x 61 850
TCO2xx-C 137 x 119 x 61 250
Power supply modules / bus rails / accessories
NT250 / 48 55 x 119 x 61 300
NT255x 55 x 119 x 61 300
VP200/x 55 x 119 x 61 260
LM201 55 x 119 x 61 115
BS201 55 x 119 x 14 260
BS202 110 x 119 x 22 150
BS203x 165 x 119 x 22 260
BS204x 220 x 119 x 22 365
BS205x 275 x 119 x 22 440
BS206x 330 x 119 x 22 515
BS207x 385 x 119 x 22 620
BS208x 440 x 119 x 22 690
BS209x 495 x 119 x 22 740
BS210x 550 x 119 x 22 880
BS211x 605 x 119 x 22 960
BS212x 660 x 119 x 22 1000
BS213x 715 x 119 x 22 1100
BS214x 770 x 119 x 14 1200
BS215x 825 x 119 x 22 1310
BS216x 880 x 119 x 22 1420
BS203/S 165 x 137 x 22 280
BS204/S 220 x 137 x 22 385
BS205/S 275 x 137 x 22 460
BS206/S 330 x 137 x 22 535
BS207/S 385 x 137 x 22 640
BS208/S 440 x 137 x 22 710
BS209/S 495 x 119 x 22 760
BS210/S 550 x 137 x 22 900
BS211/S 605 x 137 x 22 980
BS212/S 660 x 137 x 22 1020
BS213/S 715 x 137 x 22 1120
BS214/S 770 x 137 x 14 1220
BS215/S 825 x 137 x 22 1330
BS216/S 880 x 137 x 22 1440

399
Together. Competent. Efficient. Training

Bachmann training:
profit from our knowledge.

Availability of qualified personnel is a crucial factor for assurance of product

quality. Consequently employees at all levels of an enterprise must be
offered advanced training on a regular basis. We are pleased to support you
in this regard: with our extensive Bachmann training offering.

Our offering
Our training offering extends from proven standard training courses to
training courses that are individually tailored to your requirements.

Our procedure
Our modularly structured training concept makes it possible to put
together a training program that meets the needs of your company.

Your result
Qualified employees and documentation that meets the requirements
of your training program.

We would be pleased to create a training program for your company!

Contact us: [email protected]

[i]
Note: Additional information on this topic
is provided in our training catalog
»bachmann.training«.

400
 Imprint

Copyright © 2014
by Bachmann electronic GmbH
Bachmann electronic GmbH
Kreuzäckerweg 33
6800 Feldkirch, Austria
P +43 (0) 55 22 / 34 97-0
[email protected]
www.bachmann.info

Publisher:
Bachmann electronic GmbH, Feldkirch

Product overviews, operating manuals, manuals,

and software are protected by copyright.
Copying, duplication, translation or conversion
to any electronic medium or machine readable
form in whole or in part is prohibited. All other
rights to the software are specified in the license
provisions. Citation of products that do not
come from Bachmann electronic GmbH, is for
information purposes only and does not constitute
misuse of trademarks. Bachmann electronic GmbH
assumes no guarantee relative to the selection,
performance or usability of these products. All
rights reserved.

[i]
Specification subject to change – the product’s cha-
racteristics are exclusively governed by the data of
the respective user manual.

Limitation of liability:
We have checked the content of the
document for agreement with the described
hardware / software. Nevertheless the possibility
of deviations cannot be excluded; we cannot
assume any liability for complete agreement.
The information in this document is checked on
a regular basis and necessary corrections will be
included in subsequent editions.

KA-SYSTEM / 06EN, 03/2014

www.bachmann.info